Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 2054

TECPETROL S.

A
LEASE/LOCATION: DELLA PAOLERA 299

1117715

(2) 30" HORIZONTAL 3-PHASE SEPARATOR


CALCUALTIONS
Hanover
2207 FM 949

Alleyton, Texas 78935-2034

COMPRESS Pressure Vessel Design Calculations

Customer: HANOVER
Shop Order: STOCK
30" OD X 10'-0" S/S @ 1440# HORIZONTAL 3 PHASE
Vessel Description:
SEPARATOR
Drawing Number: D-HANO-481530025
Vessel Tag Number:
Date: Wednesday, July 26, 2006

Loadings of UG-22 (a) thru (i) are considered and those not listed are deemed not applicable.
Deficiencies Summary

Warnings Summary

Warnings for 30" OD 2:1 LEFT HEAD


UCS-79: The extreme fiber elongation exceeds 5 percent and the thickness exceeds 5/8 inch;. Heat treatment per
UCS-56 is required if fabricated by cold forming. (warning)

Warnings for 30" OD 2:1 RIGHT HEAD


UCS-79: The extreme fiber elongation exceeds 5 percent and the thickness exceeds 5/8 inch;. Heat treatment per
UCS-56 is required if fabricated by cold forming. (warning)

Warnings for SADDLE


There is possible interference between saddle 'SADDLE (Other saddle)' and nozzle 'N15 18" 600 RF HBN MANWAY
(N15)' at elevation 98.50". (warning)

1/106
Nozzle Schedule

Materials
Nozzle Service Size
mark Fine Fine
Nozzle Impact Norm Pad Impact Norm Flange
Grain Grain

4.00 LWN A105 Class


N1 N1 4" 600# RF LWN INLET SA-105 No No No N/A N/A N/A N/A
IDx1.00 600

2.00 LWN A105 Class


N10A N10A 2" 600# RF LWN DRAIN SA-105 No No No N/A N/A N/A N/A
IDx0.65 600

2.00 LWN A105 Class


N10B N10B 2" 600# RF LWN DRAIN SA-105 No No No N/A N/A N/A N/A
IDx0.65 600

2.00 LWN A105 Class


N10C N10C 2" 600# RF LWN DRAIN SA-105 No No No N/A N/A N/A N/A
IDx0.65 600

N14 6" 600# RF LWN 6.00 LWN A105 Class


N14 SA-105 No No No N/A N/A N/A N/A
HANDHOLE IDx1.38 600

18.00 SA-350 LF2 HB A350 LF2 Cl.1


N15 N15 18" 600 RF HBN MANWAY No No No N/A N/A N/A N/A
IDx2.60 Cl 1 Class 600

N2 4" 600# RF LWN GAS 4.00 LWN A105 Class


N2 SA-105 No No No N/A N/A N/A N/A
OUTLET IDx1.00 600

2.00 LWN A105 Class


N3 N3 2" 600# RF LWN OIL OUT SA-105 No No No N/A N/A N/A N/A
IDx0.65 600

N4 2" 600# RF LWN WATER 2.00 LWN A105 Class


N4 SA-105 No No No N/A N/A N/A N/A
OUT IDx0.65 600

N5A 2" 600# RF LWN OIL LVL 2.00 LWN A105 Class
N5A SA-105 No No No N/A N/A N/A N/A
CONTROL IDx0.65 600

N5B 2" 600# RF LWN OIL LVL 2.00 LWN A105 Class
N5B SA-105 No No No N/A N/A N/A N/A
CONTROL IDx0.65 600

N6A 2" 600# RF LWN WTR LVL 2.00 LWN A105 Class
N6A SA-105 No No No N/A N/A N/A N/A
CONTROL IDx0.65 600

N6B 2" 600# RF LWN WTR LVL 2.00 LWN A105 Class
N6B SA-105 No Yes Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A
CONTROL IDx0.65 600

N7A 2" 600# RF LWN LSL/LSL 2.00 LWN A105 Class


N7A SA-105 No No No N/A N/A N/A N/A
BRIDLE IDx0.65 600

N7B 2" 600# RF LWN LSL/LSL 2.00 LWN A105 Class


N7B SA-105 No No No N/A N/A N/A N/A
BRIDLE IDx0.65 600

N8A 2" 600# RF LWN WATER 2.00 LWN A105 Class


N8A SA-105 No No No N/A N/A N/A N/A
LSL/LG IDx0.65 600

N8B 2" 600# RF LWN WATER 2.00 LWN A105 Class


N8B SA-105 No No No N/A N/A N/A N/A
LSL/LG IDx0.65 600

N9A 2" 600# RF LWN RELIEF 2.00 LWN A105 Class


N9A SA-105 No No No N/A N/A N/A N/A
VALVE IDx0.65 600

N9B 2" 600# RF LWN RELIEF 2.00 LWN A105 Class


N9B SA-105 No No No N/A N/A N/A N/A
VALVE IDx0.65 600

2/106
Nozzle Summary

Reinforcement
Shell
Nozzle OD t Req t Pad Corr A /A
n n A1? A2? a r
mark (in) (in) (in) (in) (%)
Nom t Design t User t Width t
pad
(in) (in) (in) (in) (in)

N1 6.00 1.0000 0.3075 Yes Yes 1.1250* 1.0073 1.1250 N/A N/A 0.0625 123.1

N10A 3.31 0.6550 0.2515 Yes Yes 1.1250 N/A N/A N/A 0.0625 Exempt

N10B 3.31 0.6550 0.2515 Yes Yes 1.1250 N/A N/A N/A 0.0625 Exempt

N10C 3.31 0.6550 0.2515 Yes Yes 1.1250 N/A N/A N/A 0.0625 Exempt

N14 8.75 1.3750 0.2930 Yes Yes 1.1250 1.1123 N/A N/A 0.0625 106.2

N15 23.19 2.5950 0.7445 Yes Yes 1.1250 1.1123 N/A N/A 0.0625 101.1

N2 6.00 1.0000 0.3075 Yes Yes 1.1250 1.1123 N/A N/A 0.0625 103.7

N3 3.31 0.6550 0.2515 Yes Yes 1.1250 N/A N/A N/A 0.0625 Exempt

N4 3.31 0.6550 0.2515 Yes Yes 1.1250 N/A N/A N/A 0.0625 Exempt

N5A 3.31 0.6550 0.2515 Yes Yes 1.1250 1.1123 N/A N/A 0.0625 308.2

N5B 3.31 0.6550 0.2515 Yes Yes 1.1250 1.1124 N/A N/A 0.0625 294.8

N6A 3.31 0.6550 0.2515 Yes Yes 1.1250 N/A N/A N/A 0.0625 Exempt

N6B 3.31 0.6550 0.2515 Yes Yes 1.1250 1.1125 N/A N/A 0.0625 222.1

N7A 3.31 0.6550 0.2515 Yes Yes 1.1250 N/A N/A N/A 0.0625 Exempt

N7B 3.31 0.6550 0.2515 Yes Yes 1.1250 N/A N/A N/A 0.0625 Exempt

N8A 3.31 0.6550 0.2515 Yes Yes 1.1250* N/A 1.1250 N/A N/A 0.0625 Exempt

N8B 3.31 0.6550 0.2515 Yes Yes 1.1250* N/A 1.1250 N/A N/A 0.0625 Exempt

N9A 3.31 0.6550 0.2515 Yes Yes 1.1250 N/A N/A N/A 0.0625 Exempt

N9B 3.31 0.6550 0.2515 Yes Yes 1.1250 N/A N/A N/A 0.0625 Exempt

tn: Nozzle thickness


Req tn: Nozzle thickness required per UG-45/UG-16
Nom t: Vessel wall thickness
Design t: Required vessel wall thickness due to pressure + corrosion allowance per UG-37
User t: Local vessel wall thickness (near opening)
Aa: Area available per UG-37, governing condition
Ar: Area required per UG-37, governing condition
Corr: Corrosion allowance on nozzle wall
* Head minimum thickness after forming

3/106
Pressure Summary

Pressure Summary for Chamber bounded by 30" OD 2:1 RIGHT HEAD and 30" OD 2:1 LEFT HEAD

P T Total Corrosion
Identifier MDMT MDMT Impact
Design Design (°F) Exemption Allowance Test
( psi) (°F) (in)

30" OD 2:1 LEFT HEAD 1440.0 120.0 25.4 Note 1 0.063 No

Straight Flange on 30" OD 2:1 LEFT HEAD 1440.0 120.0 25.4 Note 2 0.063 No

30" OD X 10'-0" LG SHELL 1440.0 120.0 35.8 Note 3 0.063 No

Straight Flange on 30" OD 2:1 RIGHT HEAD 1440.0 120.0 25.4 Note 2 0.063 No

30" OD 2:1 RIGHT HEAD 1440.0 120.0 25.4 Note 4 0.063 No

SADDLE 1440.0 120.0 N/A N/A N/A N/A

N1 4" 600# RF LWN INLET (N1) 1440.0 120.0 -22.7 Note 5 0.063 No

N10A 2" 600# RF LWN DRAIN (N10A) 1440.0 120.0 -22.7 Note 5 0.063 No

N10B 2" 600# RF LWN DRAIN (N10B) 1440.0 120.0 -22.7 Note 5 0.063 No

N10C 2" 600# RF LWN DRAIN (N10C) 1440.0 120.0 -22.7 Note 5 0.063 No

N14 6" 600# RF LWN HANDHOLE (N14) 1440.0 120.0 35.8 Note 6 0.063 No

N15 18" 600 RF HBN MANWAY (N15) 1440.0 120.0 -55.0 Note 7 0.063 No

N2 4" 600# RF LWN GAS OUTLET (N2) 1440.0 120.0 -22.7 Note 5 0.063 No

N3 2" 600# RF LWN OIL OUT (N3) 1440.0 120.0 -22.7 Note 5 0.063 No

N4 2" 600# RF LWN WATER OUT (N4) 1440.0 120.0 -22.7 Note 5 0.063 No

N5A 2" 600# RF LWN OIL LVL CONTROL (N5A) 1440.0 120.0 -22.7 Note 5 0.063 No

N5B 2" 600# RF LWN OIL LVL CONTROL (N5B) 1440.0 120.0 -22.7 Note 5 0.063 No

N6A 2" 600# RF LWN WTR LVL CONTROL (N6A) 1440.0 120.0 -22.7 Note 5 0.063 No

N6B 2" 600# RF LWN WTR LVL CONTROL (N6B) 1440.0 120.0 -22.7 Note 5 0.063 No

N7A 2" 600# RF LWN LSL/LSL BRIDLE (N7A) 1440.0 120.0 -22.7 Note 5 0.063 No

N7B 2" 600# RF LWN LSL/LSL BRIDLE (N7B) 1440.0 120.0 -22.7 Note 5 0.063 No

N8A 2" 600# RF LWN WATER LSL/LG (N8A) 1440.0 120.0 -22.7 Note 5 0.063 No

N8B 2" 600# RF LWN WATER LSL/LG (N8B) 1440.0 120.0 -22.7 Note 5 0.063 No

N9A 2" 600# RF LWN RELIEF VALVE (N9A) 1440.0 120.0 -22.7 Note 5 0.063 No

N9B 2" 600# RF LWN RELIEF VALVE (N9B) 1440.0 120.0 -22.7 Note 5 0.063 No

Chamber design MDMT is 43.00°F


Chamber rated MDMT is 35.80°F @ 1440.00 psi

Chamber Design MAWP hot & corroded is 1440.00 psi

This pressure chamber is not designed for external pressure.

Notes for Maximum Pressure Rating:

Note # Details

1. Option to calculate MAP was not selected. See 'Set Mode => Calculation' dialog.

2. Option to calculate MAWP was not selected. See 'Set Mode => Calculation' dialog.

4/106
Notes for MDMT Rating:

Note # Exemption Details

1. Straight Flange governs MDMT

Material impact test exemption temperature from Fig UCS-66 Curve B = 37 °F


2. UCS-66 governing thickness = 1.125 in
Fig UCS-66.1 MDMT reduction = 11.6 °F, (coincident ratio = 0.8842819)

Material impact test exemption temperature from Fig UCS-66 Curve B = 37 °F


3. UCS-66 governing thickness = 1.125 in
Fig UCS-66.1 MDMT reduction = 1.2 °F, (coincident ratio = 0.9883177)

4. Straight Flange governs MDMT

5. Flange rating governs: UCS-66(b)(1)(b)

Nozzle impact test exemption temperature from Fig UCS-66 Curve B = 37 °F


6. UCS-66 governing thickness = 1.125 in.
Fig UCS-66.1 MDMT reduction = 1.2 °F, (coincident ratio = 0.98802)

7. Nozzle is impact tested to -55 °F (UCS-66(g)) UCS-66 governing thickness = 1.125 in.

Design notes are available on the Settings Summary page.

5/106
Revision History

No. Date Operator Notes

0 6/23/2004 rneuendorf Import COMPRESS 5 file: J:\HS-STD\VESSEL_00\CALC\SEPH3PHH\81530025.VSL.


Converted from ASME Section VIII Division 1, 1998 Edition, A00 Addenda to ASME
Section VIII Division 1, 2001 Edition, A03 Addenda. During the conversion, changes
1 6/23/2004 rneuendorf
may have been made to your vessel (some may be listed above). Please check your
vessel carefully.
Converted from ASME Section VIII Division 1, 2001 Edition, A03 Addenda to ASME
Section VIII Division 1, 2004 Edition, A05 Addenda. During the conversion, changes
2 7/26/2006 rneuendorf
may have been made to your vessel (some may be listed above). Please check your
vessel carefully.

6/106
Settings Summary

COMPRESS Build 6258

Units: U.S. Customary

Datum Line Location: 3.00" from right seam

Design

ASME Section VIII Division 1, 2004 Edition, A05 Addenda

Design or Rating: Get Thickness from Pressure


Minimum thickness: 1/16" per UG-16(b)
Design for cold shut down only: No
Design for lethal service (full radiography required): No
Design nozzles for: Design P only
Corrosion weight loss: 100% of theoretical loss
UG-23 Stress Increase: 1.20
Skirt/legs stress increase: 1.2
Minimum nozzle projection: 5.0000"
Juncture calculations for α > 30 only: Yes
Preheat P-No 1 Materials > 1.25&#34 and <= 1.50" thick: Yes
Butt welds are tapered per Figure UCS-66.3(a).

Hydro/Pneumatic Test

Shop Hydrotest Pressure: 1.3 times design P


Test liquid specific gravity: 1.00
Field Hydrotest Pressure: 1.3 times design P
Wind load present @ field: 33% of design
Maximum stress during test: 90% of yield

Required Marking - UG-116

UG-116 (e) Radiography: RT2


UG-116 (f) Postweld heat treatment: None

Code Cases\Interpretations

Use Code Case 2547: No


Apply interpretation VIII-1-83-66: Yes
Apply interpretation VIII-1-86-175: Yes
Apply interpretation VIII-1-83-115: Yes
Apply interpretation VIII-1-01-37: Yes
Apply interpretation VIII-1-04-08: No
Disallow UG-20(f) exemptions: No

7/106
UG-22 Loadings

UG-22 (a) Internal or External Design Pressure : Yes


UG-22 (b) Weight of the vessel and normal contents under operating or test conditions: Yes
UG-22 (c) Superimposed static reactions from weight of attached equipment (external loads): No
UG-22 (d)(2) Vessel supports such as lugs, rings, skirts, saddles and legs: Yes
UG-22 (f) Wind reactions: No
UG-22 (f) Seismic reactions: No
Note: UG-22 (b),(c) and (f) loads only considered when supports are present.

8/106
Thickness Summary

Component Material Diameter Length Nominal t Design t Joint Load


Identifier (in) (in) (in) (in) E

30" OD 2:1 LEFT HEAD SA-516 70 30.00 OD 8.06 1.1250* 1.0715 1.0000 Internal

Straight Flange on 30" OD 2:1 LEFT HEAD SA-516 70 30.00 OD 2.00 1.2500 1.1126 1.0000 Internal

30" OD X 10'-0" LG SHELL SA-516 70 30.00 OD 120.00 1.1250 1.1126 1.0000 Internal

Straight Flange on 30" OD 2:1 RIGHT HEAD SA-516 70 30.00 OD 2.00 1.2500 1.1126 1.0000 Internal

30" OD 2:1 RIGHT HEAD SA-516 70 30.00 OD 8.06 1.1250* 1.0715 1.0000 Internal

Nominal t: Vessel wall nominal thickness


Design t: Required vessel thickness due to governing loading + corrosion
Joint E: Longitudinal seam joint efficiency
* Head minimum thickness after forming

Load
internal: Circumferential stress due to internal pressure governs
external: External pressure governs
Wind: Combined longitudinal stress of pressure + weight + wind governs
Seismic: Combined longitudinal stress of pressure + weight + seismic governs

9/106
Weight Summary

Weight ( lb) Contributed by Vessel Elements


Component
Metal Metal Insulation & Piping Operating Test
Lining
New* Corroded* Supports + Liquid Liquid Liquid

30" OD 2:1 LEFT HEAD 366.87 348.52 0.00 0.00 0.00 66.19 146.51

30" OD X 10'-0" LG SHELL 3,267.48 3,093.03 0.00 0.00 0.00 1,212.76 2,670.23

30" OD 2:1 RIGHT HEAD 370.39 351.85 0.00 0.00 0.00 66.85 145.00

SADDLE 212.00 212.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

TOTAL: 4,216.73 4,005.41 0.00 0.00 0.00 1,345.81 2,961.74

* Shells with attached nozzles have weight reduced by material cut out for opening.

Weight ( lb) Contributed by Attachments


Component Nozzles &
Body Flanges Packed Trays & Rings & Vertical
Flanges
Beds Supports Clips Loads
New Corroded New Corroded

30" OD 2:1 LEFT HEAD 0.00 0.00 78.90 76.66 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

30" OD X 10'-0" LG SHELL 0.00 0.00 2,558.43 2,520.13 27.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

30" OD 2:1 RIGHT HEAD 0.00 0.00 46.40 44.45 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

TOTAL: 0.00 0.00 2,683.73 2,641.23 27.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

Vessel operating weight, Corroded: 8,019 lb


Vessel operating weight, New: 8,273 lb
Vessel empty weight, Corroded: 6,674 lb
Vessel empty weight, New: 6,927 lb
Vessel test weight, New: 9,889 lb

Vessel center of gravity location - from datum - lift condition

Vessel Lift Weight, New: 6,900 lb


Center of Gravity: 60.43"

Vessel Capacity

Vessel Capacity** (New): 349 US gal


Vessel Capacity** (Corroded): 352 US gal
**The vessel capacity does not include volume of nozzle, piping or other attachments.

10/106
Hydrostatic Test

Shop test pressure determination for Chamber bounded by 30" OD 2:1 RIGHT HEAD and 30" OD 2:1 LEFT
HEAD based on design P per UG-99(b)

Shop hydrostatic test gauge pressure is 1,872 psi at 70 °F (the chamber design P = 1,440 psi)

The shop test is performed with the vessel in the horizontal position.

Local test Test liquid UG-99 UG-99


Identifier pressure static head stress pressure
psi psi ratio factor
30" OD 2:1 LEFT HEAD (1) 1,873.295 1.295 1 1.30

Straight Flange on 30" OD 2:1 LEFT HEAD 1,873.29 1.291 1 1.30

30" OD X 10'-0" LG SHELL 1,873.295 1.295 1 1.30

Straight Flange on 30" OD 2:1 RIGHT HEAD 1,873.29 1.291 1 1.30

30" OD 2:1 RIGHT HEAD 1,873.295 1.295 1 1.30

N1 4" 600# RF LWN INLET (N1) 1,872.65 0.65 1 1.30

N10A 2" 600# RF LWN DRAIN (N10A) 1,873.552 1.552 1 1.30

N10B 2" 600# RF LWN DRAIN (N10B) 1,873.552 1.552 1 1.30

N10C 2" 600# RF LWN DRAIN (N10C) 1,873.552 1.552 1 1.30

N14 6" 600# RF LWN HANDHOLE (N14) 1,872.902 0.902 1 1.30

N15 18" 600 RF HBN MANWAY (N15) 1,873.114 1.115 1 1.30

N2 4" 600# RF LWN GAS OUTLET (N2) 1,872.253 0.253 1 1.30

N3 2" 600# RF LWN OIL OUT (N3) 1,873.552 1.552 1 1.30

N4 2" 600# RF LWN WATER OUT (N4) 1,873.552 1.552 1 1.30

N5A 2" 600# RF LWN OIL LVL CONTROL (N5A) 1,872.595 0.596 1 1.30

N5B 2" 600# RF LWN OIL LVL CONTROL (N5B) 1,873.101 1.101 1 1.30

N6A 2" 600# RF LWN WTR LVL CONTROL (N6A) 1,872.722 0.722 1 1.30

N6B 2" 600# RF LWN WTR LVL CONTROL (N6B) 1,873.227 1.227 1 1.30

N7A 2" 600# RF LWN LSL/LSL BRIDLE (N7A) 1,872.253 0.253 1 1.30

N7B 2" 600# RF LWN LSL/LSL BRIDLE (N7B) 1,873.552 1.552 1 1.30

N8A 2" 600# RF LWN WATER LSL/LG (N8A) 1,872.614 0.614 1 1.30

N8B 2" 600# RF LWN WATER LSL/LG (N8B) 1,873.191 1.191 1 1.30

N9A 2" 600# RF LWN RELIEF VALVE (N9A) 1,872.253 0.253 1 1.30

N9B 2" 600# RF LWN RELIEF VALVE (N9B) 1,872.253 0.253 1 1.30

11/106
Notes:
(1) 30" OD 2:1 LEFT HEAD limits the UG-99 stress ratio.
(2) The zero degree angular position is assumed to be up, and the test liquid height is assumed to the top-most
flange.

The test temperature of 70 °F is warmer than the minimum recommended temperature of 65.8 °F so the brittle
fracture provision of UG-99(h) has been met.

Field test pressure determination for Chamber bounded by 30" OD 2:1 RIGHT HEAD and 30" OD 2:1 LEFT
HEAD based on design P per UG-99(b)

Field hydrostatic test gauge pressure is 1,872 psi at 70 °F (the chamber design P = 1,440 psi)

Local test Test liquid UG-99 UG-99


Identifier pressure static head stress pressure
psi psi ratio factor
30" OD 2:1 LEFT HEAD (1) 1,873.295 1.295 1 1.30

Straight Flange on 30" OD 2:1 LEFT HEAD 1,873.29 1.291 1 1.30

30" OD X 10'-0" LG SHELL 1,873.295 1.295 1 1.30

Straight Flange on 30" OD 2:1 RIGHT HEAD 1,873.29 1.291 1 1.30

30" OD 2:1 RIGHT HEAD 1,873.295 1.295 1 1.30

N1 4" 600# RF LWN INLET (N1) 1,872.65 0.65 1 1.30

N10A 2" 600# RF LWN DRAIN (N10A) 1,873.552 1.552 1 1.30

N10B 2" 600# RF LWN DRAIN (N10B) 1,873.552 1.552 1 1.30

N10C 2" 600# RF LWN DRAIN (N10C) 1,873.552 1.552 1 1.30

N14 6" 600# RF LWN HANDHOLE (N14) 1,872.902 0.902 1 1.30

N15 18" 600 RF HBN MANWAY (N15) 1,873.114 1.115 1 1.30

N2 4" 600# RF LWN GAS OUTLET (N2) 1,872.253 0.253 1 1.30

N3 2" 600# RF LWN OIL OUT (N3) 1,873.552 1.552 1 1.30

N4 2" 600# RF LWN WATER OUT (N4) 1,873.552 1.552 1 1.30

N5A 2" 600# RF LWN OIL LVL CONTROL (N5A) 1,872.595 0.596 1 1.30

N5B 2" 600# RF LWN OIL LVL CONTROL (N5B) 1,873.101 1.101 1 1.30

N6A 2" 600# RF LWN WTR LVL CONTROL (N6A) 1,872.722 0.722 1 1.30

N6B 2" 600# RF LWN WTR LVL CONTROL (N6B) 1,873.227 1.227 1 1.30

N7A 2" 600# RF LWN LSL/LSL BRIDLE (N7A) 1,872.253 0.253 1 1.30

N7B 2" 600# RF LWN LSL/LSL BRIDLE (N7B) 1,873.552 1.552 1 1.30

N8A 2" 600# RF LWN WATER LSL/LG (N8A) 1,872.614 0.614 1 1.30

N8B 2" 600# RF LWN WATER LSL/LG (N8B) 1,873.191 1.191 1 1.30

N9A 2" 600# RF LWN RELIEF VALVE (N9A) 1,872.253 0.253 1 1.30

N9B 2" 600# RF LWN RELIEF VALVE (N9B) 1,872.253 0.253 1 1.30

Notes:
(1) 30" OD 2:1 LEFT HEAD limits the UG-99 stress ratio.
(2) The zero degree angular position is assumed to be up, and the test liquid height is assumed to the top-most
flange.

The test temperature of 70 °F is warmer than the minimum recommended temperature of 65.8 °F so the brittle

12/106
fracture provision of UG-99(h) has been met.

13/106
30" OD X 10'-0" LG SHELL

ASME Section VIII Division 1, 2004 Edition, A05 Addenda

Component: Cylinder
Material specification: SA-516 70 (II-D p. 14, ln. 20)
Material impact test exemption temperature from Fig UCS-66 Curve B = 37 °F
Fig UCS-66.1 MDMT reduction = 1.2 °F, (coincident ratio = 0.9883177)
UCS-66 governing thickness = 1.125 in

Internal design pressure: P = 1440 psi @ 120°F

Static liquid head:

Ps =0.4528 psi (SG=0.9000, Hs=13.9375" Operating head)


Pth =1.2950 psi (SG=1.0000, Hs=35.8750", Horizontal test head)

Corrosion allowance: Inner C = 0.0625" Outer C = 0.0000"

Design MDMT = 43.00°F No impact test performed


Rated MDMT = 35.80°F Material is not normalized
Material is not produced to Fine Grain Practice
PWHT is not performed

Radiography: Longitudinal joint - Full UW-11(a) Type 1


Left circumferential joint - Spot UW-11(a)(5)b Type 1
Right circumferential joint - Spot UW-11(a)(5)b Type 1

Estimated weight: New = 3465.7087 lb corr = 3280.2544 lb


Capacity: New = 314.1848 gal corr = 317.0216 gal
OD = 30.0000"
Length Lc = 120.0000"
t = 1.1250"

Design thickness, (at 120.00°F) Appendix 1-1

t = P*Ro/(S*E + 0.40*P) + Corrosion


= 1440.45*15.0000/(20000*1.00 + 0.40*1440.45) + 0.0625
= 1.1126"

% Extreme fiber elongation - UCS-79(d)

= (50 * t / Rf) * (1 - Rf / Ro)


= (50 * 1.1250 / 14.4375) * (1 - 14.4375 / ∞)
= 3.8961 %

Allowable Compressive Stress, Hot and Corroded- ScHC, (table CS-2)


A = 0.125 / (Ro / t)
= 0.125 / (15.0000 / 1.0625)
= 0.008854
B = 17340.9727 psi
S = 20000.0000 / 1.0000
= 20000.0000 psi
ScHC = 17340.9727 psi

14/106
Allowable Compressive Stress, Hot and New- ScHN, (table CS-2)
A = 0.125 / (Ro / t)
= 0.125 / (15.0000 / 1.1250)
= 0.009375
B = 17355.1367 psi
S = 20000.0000 / 1.0000
= 20000.0000 psi
ScHN = 17355.1367 psi

Allowable Compressive Stress, Cold and New- ScCN, (table CS-2)


A = 0.125 / (Ro / t)
= 0.125 / (15.0000 / 1.1250)
= 0.009375
B = 17355.1367 psi
S = 20000.0000 / 1.0000
= 20000.0000 psi
ScCN = 17355.1367 psi

Allowable Compressive Stress, Cold and Corroded- ScCC, (table CS-2)


A = 0.125 / (Ro / t)
= 0.125 / (15.0000 / 1.0625)
= 0.008854
B = 17340.9727 psi
S = 20000.0000 / 1.0000
= 20000.0000 psi
ScCC = 17340.9727 psi

Allowable Compressive Stress, Vacuum and Corroded- ScVC, (table CS-2)


A = 0.125 / (Ro / t)
= 0.125 / (15.0000 / 1.0625)
= 0.008854
B = 17340.9727 psi
S = 20000.0000 / 1.0000
= 20000.0000 psi
ScVC = 17340.9727 psi

15/106
30" OD 2:1 LEFT HEAD

ASME Section VIII, Division 1, 2004 Edition, A05 Addenda

Component: Ellipsoidal Head


Material Specification: SA-516 70 (II-D p.14, ln. 20)
Straight Flange governs MDMT

Internal design pressure: P = 1,440 psi @ 120 °F

Static liquid head:

Ps= 0.4528 psi (SG=0.9, Hs=13.9375" Operating head)


Pth= 1.295 psi (SG=1, Hs=35.875" Horizontal test head)

Corrosion allowance: Inner C = 0.0625" Outer C = 0"

Design MDMT = 43°F No impact test performed


Rated MDMT = 25.4°F Material is not normalized
Material is not produced to fine grain practice
PWHT is not performed
Do not Optimize MDMT / Find MAWP

Radiography: Category A joints - Seamless No RT


Head to shell seam - Spot UW-11(a)(5)(b) Type 1

Estimated weight*: new = 366.9 lb corr = 348.5 lb


Capacity*: new = 17.3 US gal corr = 17.5 US gal
* includes straight flange

Outer diameter = 30"


Minimum head thickness = 1.125"
Head ratio D/2h = 2 (new)
Head ratio D/2h = 1.9911 (corroded)
Straight flange length Lsf = 2"
Nominal straight flange thickness tsf = 1.25"
Results Summary

The governing condition is internal pressure.


Minimum thickness per UG-16 = 0.0625" + 0.0625" = 0.125"
Design thickness due to internal pressure (t) = 1.0715"

K (Corroded)

K=(1/6)*[2 + (D / (2*h))2]=(1/6)*[2 + (27.875 / (2*7))2]=0.994061

K (New)

K=(1/6)*[2 + (D / (2*h))2]=(1/6)*[2 + (27.75 / (2*6.9375))2]=1

Design thickness for internal pressure, (Corroded at 120 °F) Appendix 1-4(c)

t = P*Do*K / (2*S*E + 2*P*(K - 0.1)) + Corrosion


= 1,440.45*30*0.994061 / (2*20,000*1 + 2*1,440.45*(0.994061 - 0.1)) + 0.0625

16/106
= 1.0715"

The head internal pressure design thickness is 1.0715".

% Extreme fiber elongation - UCS-79(d)

= (75*t / Rf)*(1 - Rf / Ro)


= (75*1.25 / 5.3425)*(1 - 5.3425 / ∞)
= 17.548%

The extreme fiber elongation exceeds 5 percent and the thickness exceeds 5/8 inch;. Heat treatment per UCS-56 is
required if fabricated by cold forming.

17/106
Straight Flange on 30" OD 2:1 LEFT HEAD

ASME Section VIII Division 1, 2004 Edition, A05 Addenda

Component: Straight Flange


Material specification: SA-516 70 (II-D p. 14, ln. 20)
Material impact test exemption temperature from Fig UCS-66 Curve B = 37 °F
Fig UCS-66.1 MDMT reduction = 11.6 °F, (coincident ratio = 0.8842819)
UCS-66 governing thickness = 1.125 in

Internal design pressure: P = 1440 psi @ 120°F

Static liquid head:

Ps =0.4487 psi (SG=0.9000, Hs=13.8125" Operating head)


Pth =1.2905 psi (SG=1.0000, Hs=35.7500", Horizontal test head)

Corrosion allowance: Inner C = 0.0625" Outer C = 0.0000"

Design MDMT = 43.00°F No impact test performed


Rated MDMT = 25.40°F Material is not normalized
Material is not produced to Fine Grain Practice
PWHT is not performed

Radiography: Longitudinal joint - Seamless No RT


Circumferential joint - Spot UW-11(a)(5)b Type 1

Estimated weight: New = 63.9020 lb corr = 60.8388 lb


Capacity: New = 5.1425 gal corr = 5.1893 gal
OD = 30.0000"
Length Lc = 2.0000"
t = 1.2500"

Design thickness, (at 120.00°F) Appendix 1-1

t = P*Ro/(S*E + 0.40*P) + Corrosion


= 1440.45*15.0000/(20000*1.00 + 0.40*1440.45) + 0.0625
= 1.1126"

% Extreme fiber elongation - UCS-79(d)

= (50 * t / Rf) * (1 - Rf / Ro)


= (50 * 1.2500 / 14.3750) * (1 - 14.3750 / ∞)
= 4.3478 %

Allowable Compressive Stress, Hot and Corroded- ScHC, (table CS-2)


A = 0.125 / (Ro / t)
= 0.125 / (15.0000 / 1.1875)
= 0.009896
B = 17368.5449 psi
S = 20000.0000 / 1.0000
= 20000.0000 psi
ScHC = 17368.5449 psi

18/106
Allowable Compressive Stress, Hot and New- ScHN, (table CS-2)
A = 0.125 / (Ro / t)
= 0.125 / (15.0000 / 1.2500)
= 0.010417
B = 17381.2754 psi
S = 20000.0000 / 1.0000
= 20000.0000 psi
ScHN = 17381.2754 psi

Allowable Compressive Stress, Cold and New- ScCN, (table CS-2)


A = 0.125 / (Ro / t)
= 0.125 / (15.0000 / 1.2500)
= 0.010417
B = 17381.2754 psi
S = 20000.0000 / 1.0000
= 20000.0000 psi
ScCN = 17381.2754 psi

Allowable Compressive Stress, Cold and Corroded- ScCC, (table CS-2)


A = 0.125 / (Ro / t)
= 0.125 / (15.0000 / 1.1875)
= 0.009896
B = 17368.5449 psi
S = 20000.0000 / 1.0000
= 20000.0000 psi
ScCC = 17368.5449 psi

Allowable Compressive Stress, Vacuum and Corroded- ScVC, (table CS-2)


A = 0.125 / (Ro / t)
= 0.125 / (15.0000 / 1.1875)
= 0.009896
B = 17368.5449 psi
S = 20000.0000 / 1.0000
= 20000.0000 psi
ScVC = 17368.5449 psi

19/106
Straight Flange on 30" OD 2:1 RIGHT HEAD

ASME Section VIII Division 1, 2004 Edition, A05 Addenda

Component: Straight Flange


Material specification: SA-516 70 (II-D p. 14, ln. 20)
Material impact test exemption temperature from Fig UCS-66 Curve B = 37 °F
Fig UCS-66.1 MDMT reduction = 11.6 °F, (coincident ratio = 0.8842819)
UCS-66 governing thickness = 1.125 in

Internal design pressure: P = 1440 psi @ 120°F

Static liquid head:

Ps =0.4487 psi (SG=0.9000, Hs=13.8125" Operating head)


Pth =1.2905 psi (SG=1.0000, Hs=35.7500", Horizontal test head)

Corrosion allowance: Inner C = 0.0625" Outer C = 0.0000"

Design MDMT = 43.00°F No impact test performed


Rated MDMT = 25.40°F Material is not normalized
Material is not produced to Fine Grain Practice
PWHT is not performed

Radiography: Longitudinal joint - Seamless No RT


Circumferential joint - Spot UW-11(a)(5)b Type 1

Estimated weight: New = 63.9020 lb corr = 60.8388 lb


Capacity: New = 5.1425 gal corr = 5.1893 gal
OD = 30.0000"
Length Lc = 2.0000"
t = 1.2500"

Design thickness, (at 120.00°F) Appendix 1-1

t = P*Ro/(S*E + 0.40*P) + Corrosion


= 1440.45*15.0000/(20000*1.00 + 0.40*1440.45) + 0.0625
= 1.1126"

% Extreme fiber elongation - UCS-79(d)

= (50 * t / Rf) * (1 - Rf / Ro)


= (50 * 1.2500 / 14.3750) * (1 - 14.3750 / ∞)
= 4.3478 %

Allowable Compressive Stress, Hot and Corroded- ScHC, (table CS-2)


A = 0.125 / (Ro / t)
= 0.125 / (15.0000 / 1.1875)
= 0.009896
B = 17368.5449 psi
S = 20000.0000 / 1.0000
= 20000.0000 psi
ScHC = 17368.5449 psi

20/106
Allowable Compressive Stress, Hot and New- ScHN, (table CS-2)
A = 0.125 / (Ro / t)
= 0.125 / (15.0000 / 1.2500)
= 0.010417
B = 17381.2754 psi
S = 20000.0000 / 1.0000
= 20000.0000 psi
ScHN = 17381.2754 psi

Allowable Compressive Stress, Cold and New- ScCN, (table CS-2)


A = 0.125 / (Ro / t)
= 0.125 / (15.0000 / 1.2500)
= 0.010417
B = 17381.2754 psi
S = 20000.0000 / 1.0000
= 20000.0000 psi
ScCN = 17381.2754 psi

Allowable Compressive Stress, Cold and Corroded- ScCC, (table CS-2)


A = 0.125 / (Ro / t)
= 0.125 / (15.0000 / 1.1875)
= 0.009896
B = 17368.5449 psi
S = 20000.0000 / 1.0000
= 20000.0000 psi
ScCC = 17368.5449 psi

Allowable Compressive Stress, Vacuum and Corroded- ScVC, (table CS-2)


A = 0.125 / (Ro / t)
= 0.125 / (15.0000 / 1.1875)
= 0.009896
B = 17368.5449 psi
S = 20000.0000 / 1.0000
= 20000.0000 psi
ScVC = 17368.5449 psi

21/106
30" OD 2:1 RIGHT HEAD

ASME Section VIII, Division 1, 2004 Edition, A05 Addenda

Component: Ellipsoidal Head


Material Specification: SA-516 70 (II-D p.14, ln. 20)
Straight Flange governs MDMT

Internal design pressure: P = 1,440 psi @ 120 °F

Static liquid head:

Ps= 0.4528 psi (SG=0.9, Hs=13.9375" Operating head)


Pth= 1.295 psi (SG=1, Hs=35.875" Horizontal test head)

Corrosion allowance: Inner C = 0.0625" Outer C = 0"

Design MDMT = 43°F No impact test performed


Rated MDMT = 25.4°F Material is not normalized
Material is not produced to fine grain practice
PWHT is not performed
Do not Optimize MDMT / Find MAWP

Radiography: Category A joints - Seamless No RT


Head to shell seam - Spot UW-11(a)(5)(b) Type 1

Estimated weight*: new = 370.4 lb corr = 351.9 lb


Capacity*: new = 17.3 US gal corr = 17.5 US gal
* includes straight flange

Outer diameter = 30"


Minimum head thickness = 1.125"
Head ratio D/2h = 2 (new)
Head ratio D/2h = 1.9911 (corroded)
Straight flange length Lsf = 2"
Nominal straight flange thickness tsf = 1.25"
Results Summary

The governing condition is internal pressure.


Minimum thickness per UG-16 = 0.0625" + 0.0625" = 0.125"
Design thickness due to internal pressure (t) = 1.0715"

K (Corroded)

K=(1/6)*[2 + (D / (2*h))2]=(1/6)*[2 + (27.875 / (2*7))2]=0.994061

K (New)

K=(1/6)*[2 + (D / (2*h))2]=(1/6)*[2 + (27.75 / (2*6.9375))2]=1

Design thickness for internal pressure, (Corroded at 120 °F) Appendix 1-4(c)

t = P*Do*K / (2*S*E + 2*P*(K - 0.1)) + Corrosion


= 1,440.45*30*0.994061 / (2*20,000*1 + 2*1,440.45*(0.994061 - 0.1)) + 0.0625

22/106
= 1.0715"

The head internal pressure design thickness is 1.0715".

% Extreme fiber elongation - UCS-79(d)

= (75*t / Rf)*(1 - Rf / Ro)


= (75*1.25 / 5.3425)*(1 - 5.3425 / ∞)
= 17.548%

The extreme fiber elongation exceeds 5 percent and the thickness exceeds 5/8 inch;. Heat treatment per UCS-56 is
required if fabricated by cold forming.

23/106
N1 4" 600# RF LWN INLET (N1)

ASME Section VIII Division 1, 2004 Edition, A05 Addenda

tw(lower) = 1.125 in
Leg41 = 0.375 in
Leg43 = 0.375 in
hnew = 0.375 in

Note: round inside edges per UG-76(c)

Located on: 30" OD 2:1 LEFT HEAD


Liquid static head included: 0 psi
Nozzle material specification: SA-105 (II-D p. 14, ln. 6)
Nozzle longitudinal joint efficiency: 1
Flange description: 4 inch Class 600 LWN A105
Bolt Material: SA-193 B7 Bolt <= 2 1/2 (II-D p. 382, ln. 33)
Flange rated MDMT: -22.7°F
(UCS-66(b)(1)(b))
Liquid static head on flange: 0 psi
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAWP: 1454 psi @ 120°F
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAP: 1480 psi @ 70°F
ASME B16.5 flange hydro test: 2225 psi @ 70°F
Nozzle orientation: 0°
Calculated as hillside: yes
User input vessel thickness: 1.125 in
End of nozzle to datum line: 134 in
Nozzle inside diameter, new: 4 in
Nozzle nominal wall thickness: 1 in
Nozzle corrosion allowance: 0.0625 in
Opening chord length: 4.2432 in
Projection available outside vessel, Lpr: 5.3504 in
Projection available outside vessel to flange face, Lf: 7.1004 in
Distance to head center, R: 6 in

24/106
Reinforcement Calculations for Internal Pressure

UG-45
Nozzle Wall
UG-37 Area Calculation Summary (in2) Thickness
For P = 1440 psi @ 120 °F Summary
The opening is adequately reinforced
(in)
The nozzle
passes UG-45

A A A
A1 A2 A3 A5 treq tmin
required available welds

4.0089 4.9356 0.4995 3.667 0.5469 -- 0.2222 0.3075 1

Weld Failure Path Analysis Summary


The nozzle is exempt from weld strength
calculations per UW-15(b)(1)

UW-16 Weld Sizing Summary


Required weld Actual weld
Weld description Status
throat size (in) throat size (in)

Nozzle to shell fillet (Leg 41) 0.25 0.2625 weld size is adequate

Calculations for internal pressure 1440 psi @ 120 °F

Nozzle is impact test exempt to -155 °F per UCS-66(b)(3) (coincident ratio = 0.16555).

Nozzle UCS-66 governing thk: 1 in


Nozzle rated MDMT: -155 °F

Limits of reinforcement per UG-40

Parallel to the vessel wall: d = 4.2432 in


Normal to the vessel wall outside: 2.5*(tn - Cn) + te = 2.3438 in
Normal to the vessel wall inside: 2.5*(tn - Cn - C) = 2.1875 in

Nozzle required thickness per UG-27(c)(1)

trn = P*Rn/(Sn*E - 0.6*P)


= 1,440*2.0625/(20,000*1 - 0.6*1,440)
= 0.1552 in

Required thickness tr from UG-37(a)(c)

tr = P*K1*Do/(2*S*E + 0.8*P)
= 1,440*0.9*30/(2*20,000*1 + 0.8*1,440)
= 0.9448 in

25/106
Area required per UG-37(c)

Allowable stresses: Sn = 20,000, Sv = 20,000 psi

fr1 = lesser of 1 or Sn/Sv = 1


fr2 = lesser of 1 or Sn/Sv = 1

A = d*tr*F + 2*tn*tr*F*(1 - fr1)


= 4.2432*0.9448*1 + 2*0.9375*0.9448*1*(1 - 1)
= 4.0089 in2

Area available from FIG. UG-37.1

A1 = larger of the following= 0.4995 in2

= d*(E1*t - F*tr) - 2*tn*(E1*t - F*tr)*(1 - fr1)


= 4.2432*(1*1.0625 - 1*0.9448) - 2*0.9375*(1*1.0625 - 1*0.9448)*(1 - 1)
= 0.4995 in2

= 2*(t + tn)*(E1*t - F*tr) - 2*tn*(E1*t - F*tr)*(1 - fr1)


= 2*(1.0625 + 0.9375)*(1*1.0625 - 1*0.9448) - 2*0.9375*(1*1.0625 - 1*0.9448)*(1 - 1)
= 0.4708 in2

A2 = smaller of the following= 3.667 in2

= 5*(tn - trn)*fr2*t
= 5*(0.9375 - 0.1552)*1*1.0625
= 4.156 in2

= 5*(tn - trn)*fr2*tn
= 5*(0.9375 - 0.1552)*1*0.9375
= 3.667 in2

A3 = smaller of the following= 0.5469 in2

= 5*t*ti*fr2
= 5*1.0625*0.875*1
= 4.6484 in2

= 5*ti*ti*fr2
= 5*0.875*0.875*1
= 3.8281 in2

= 2*h*ti*fr2
= 2*0.3125*0.875*1
= 0.5469 in2

A41 = Leg2*fr2
= 0.3752*1
= 0.1406 in2

26/106
A43 = Leg2*fr2
= 0.28572*1
= 0.0816 in2

Area = A1 + A2 + A3 + A41 + A43


= 0.4995 + 3.667 + 0.5469 + 0.1406 + 0.0816
= 4.9356 in2

As Area >= A the reinforcement is adequate.

UW-16(c) Weld Check

Fillet weld: tmin = lesser of 0.75 or tn or t = 0.75 in


tc(min) = lesser of 0.25 or 0.7*tmin = 0.25 in
tc(actual) = 0.7*Leg = 0.7*0.375 = 0.2625 in

The fillet weld size is satisfactory.

Weld strength calculations are not required for this detail which conforms to Fig. UW-16.1, sketch (c-e).

UG-45 Nozzle Neck Thickness Check

Interpretation VIII-1-83-66 has been applied.

Wall thickness per UG-45(a): tr1 = 0.2177 in (E =1)


Wall thickness per UG-45(b)(1): tr2 = 1.0712 in
Wall thickness per UG-16(b): tr3 = 0.125 in
Standard wall pipe per UG-45(b)(4): tr4 = 0.3075 in
The greater of tr2 or tr3: tr5 = 1.0712 in
The lesser of tr4 or tr5: tr6 = 0.3075 in

Required per UG-45 is the larger of tr1 or tr6 = 0.3075 in

Available nozzle wall thickness new, tn = 1 in

The nozzle neck thickness is adequate.

27/106
N10A 2" 600# RF LWN DRAIN (N10A)

ASME Section VIII Division 1, 2004 Edition, A05 Addenda

tw(lower) = 1.125 in
Leg41 = 0.375 in

Note: round inside edges per UG-76(c)

Located on: 30" OD X 10'-0" LG SHELL


Liquid static head included: 0.4873 psi
Nozzle material specification: SA-105 (II-D p. 14, ln. 6)
Nozzle longitudinal joint efficiency: 1
Flange description: 2 inch Class 600 LWN A105
Bolt Material: SA-193 B7 Bolt <= 2 1/2 (II-D p. 382, ln. 33)
Flange rated MDMT: -22.7°F
(UCS-66(b)(1)(b))
Liquid static head on flange: 0.6822 psi
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAWP: 1454 psi @ 120°F
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAP: 1480 psi @ 70°F
ASME B16.5 flange hydro test: 2225 psi @ 70°F
Nozzle orientation: 180°
Local vessel minimum thickness: 1.125 in
Nozzle center line offset to datum line: 2 in
End of nozzle to shell center: 21 in
Nozzle inside diameter, new: 2 in
Nozzle nominal wall thickness: 0.655 in
Nozzle corrosion allowance: 0.0625 in
Projection available outside vessel, Lpr: 4.75 in
Projection available outside vessel to flange face, Lf: 6 in

28/106
Reinforcement Calculations for Internal Pressure

UG-45 Nozzle
UG-37 Area Calculation Summary Wall
(in2) Thickness
For P = 1440.49 psi @ 120 °F Summary (in)
The nozzle passes
UG-45

A A A
A1 A2 A3 A5 treq tmin
required available welds

This nozzle is exempt from area


0.2515 0.655
calculations per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

Weld Failure Path Analysis Summary


The nozzle is exempt from weld strength
calculations per UW-15(b)(2)

UW-16 Weld Sizing Summary


Required weld Actual weld
Weld description Status
throat size (in) throat size (in)

Nozzle to shell fillet (Leg 41) 0.25 0.2625 weld size is adequate

Calculations for internal pressure 1440.49 psi @ 120 °F

Nozzle is impact test exempt to -155 °F per UCS-66(b)(3) (coincident ratio = 0.13499).

Nozzle UCS-66 governing thk: 0.655 in


Nozzle rated MDMT: -155 °F

Limits of reinforcement per UG-40

Parallel to the vessel wall: (Rn + tn + t )= 2.7175 in


Normal to the vessel wall outside: 2.5*(tn - Cn) + te = 1.4813 in

Nozzle required thickness per UG-27(c)(1)

trn = P*Rn/(Sn*E - 0.6*P)


= 1,440.487*1.0625/(20,000*1 - 0.6*1,440.487)
= 0.08 in

Required thickness tr from UG-37(a)

tr = P*Ro/(S*E + 0.4*P)
= 1,440.487*15/(20,000*1 + 0.4*1,440.487)
= 1.0501 in

This opening does not require reinforcement per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

29/106
UW-16(c) Weld Check

Fillet weld: tmin = lesser of 0.75 or tn or t = 0.5925 in


tc(min) = lesser of 0.25 or 0.7*tmin = 0.25 in
tc(actual) = 0.7*Leg = 0.7*0.375 = 0.2625 in

The fillet weld size is satisfactory.

Weld strength calculations are not required for this detail which conforms to Fig. UW-16.1, sketch (c-e).

UG-45 Nozzle Neck Thickness Check

Wall thickness per UG-45(a): tr1 = 0.1425 in (E =1)


Wall thickness per UG-45(b)(1): tr2 = 1.1126 in
Wall thickness per UG-16(b): tr3 = 0.125 in
Standard wall pipe per UG-45(b)(4): tr4 = 0.2515 in
The greater of tr2 or tr3: tr5 = 1.1126 in
The lesser of tr4 or tr5: tr6 = 0.2515 in

Required per UG-45 is the larger of tr1 or tr6 = 0.2515 in

Available nozzle wall thickness new, tn = 0.655 in

The nozzle neck thickness is adequate.

30/106
N10B 2" 600# RF LWN DRAIN (N10B)

ASME Section VIII Division 1, 2004 Edition, A05 Addenda

tw(lower) = 1.125 in
Leg41 = 0.375 in

Note: round inside edges per UG-76(c)

Located on: 30" OD X 10'-0" LG SHELL


Liquid static head included: 0.4873 psi
Nozzle material specification: SA-105 (II-D p. 14, ln. 6)
Nozzle longitudinal joint efficiency: 1
Flange description: 2 inch Class 600 LWN A105
Bolt Material: SA-193 B7 Bolt <= 2 1/2 (II-D p. 382, ln. 33)
Flange rated MDMT: -22.7°F
(UCS-66(b)(1)(b))
Liquid static head on flange: 0.6822 psi
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAWP: 1454 psi @ 120°F
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAP: 1480 psi @ 70°F
ASME B16.5 flange hydro test: 2225 psi @ 70°F
Nozzle orientation: 180°
Local vessel minimum thickness: 1.125 in
Nozzle center line offset to datum line: 24 in
End of nozzle to shell center: 21 in
Nozzle inside diameter, new: 2 in
Nozzle nominal wall thickness: 0.655 in
Nozzle corrosion allowance: 0.0625 in
Projection available outside vessel, Lpr: 4.75 in
Projection available outside vessel to flange face, Lf: 6 in

31/106
Reinforcement Calculations for Internal Pressure

UG-45 Nozzle
UG-37 Area Calculation Summary Wall
(in2) Thickness
For P = 1440.49 psi @ 120 °F Summary (in)
The nozzle passes
UG-45

A A A
A1 A2 A3 A5 treq tmin
required available welds

This nozzle is exempt from area


0.2515 0.655
calculations per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

Weld Failure Path Analysis Summary


The nozzle is exempt from weld strength
calculations per UW-15(b)(2)

UW-16 Weld Sizing Summary


Required weld Actual weld
Weld description Status
throat size (in) throat size (in)

Nozzle to shell fillet (Leg 41) 0.25 0.2625 weld size is adequate

Calculations for internal pressure 1440.49 psi @ 120 °F

Nozzle is impact test exempt to -155 °F per UCS-66(b)(3) (coincident ratio = 0.13499).

Nozzle UCS-66 governing thk: 0.655 in


Nozzle rated MDMT: -155 °F

Limits of reinforcement per UG-40

Parallel to the vessel wall: (Rn + tn + t )= 2.7175 in


Normal to the vessel wall outside: 2.5*(tn - Cn) + te = 1.4813 in

Nozzle required thickness per UG-27(c)(1)

trn = P*Rn/(Sn*E - 0.6*P)


= 1,440.487*1.0625/(20,000*1 - 0.6*1,440.487)
= 0.08 in

Required thickness tr from UG-37(a)

tr = P*Ro/(S*E + 0.4*P)
= 1,440.487*15/(20,000*1 + 0.4*1,440.487)
= 1.0501 in

This opening does not require reinforcement per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

32/106
UW-16(c) Weld Check

Fillet weld: tmin = lesser of 0.75 or tn or t = 0.5925 in


tc(min) = lesser of 0.25 or 0.7*tmin = 0.25 in
tc(actual) = 0.7*Leg = 0.7*0.375 = 0.2625 in

The fillet weld size is satisfactory.

Weld strength calculations are not required for this detail which conforms to Fig. UW-16.1, sketch (c-e).

UG-45 Nozzle Neck Thickness Check

Wall thickness per UG-45(a): tr1 = 0.1425 in (E =1)


Wall thickness per UG-45(b)(1): tr2 = 1.1126 in
Wall thickness per UG-16(b): tr3 = 0.125 in
Standard wall pipe per UG-45(b)(4): tr4 = 0.2515 in
The greater of tr2 or tr3: tr5 = 1.1126 in
The lesser of tr4 or tr5: tr6 = 0.2515 in

Required per UG-45 is the larger of tr1 or tr6 = 0.2515 in

Available nozzle wall thickness new, tn = 0.655 in

The nozzle neck thickness is adequate.

33/106
N10C 2" 600# RF LWN DRAIN (N10C)

ASME Section VIII Division 1, 2004 Edition, A05 Addenda

tw(lower) = 1.125 in
Leg41 = 0.375 in

Note: round inside edges per UG-76(c)

Located on: 30" OD X 10'-0" LG SHELL


Liquid static head included: 0.4873 psi
Nozzle material specification: SA-105 (II-D p. 14, ln. 6)
Nozzle longitudinal joint efficiency: 1
Flange description: 2 inch Class 600 LWN A105
Bolt Material: SA-193 B7 Bolt <= 2 1/2 (II-D p. 382, ln. 33)
Flange rated MDMT: -22.7°F
(UCS-66(b)(1)(b))
Liquid static head on flange: 0.6822 psi
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAWP: 1454 psi @ 120°F
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAP: 1480 psi @ 70°F
ASME B16.5 flange hydro test: 2225 psi @ 70°F
Nozzle orientation: 180°
Local vessel minimum thickness: 1.125 in
Nozzle center line offset to datum line: 111 in
End of nozzle to shell center: 21 in
Nozzle inside diameter, new: 2 in
Nozzle nominal wall thickness: 0.655 in
Nozzle corrosion allowance: 0.0625 in
Projection available outside vessel, Lpr: 4.75 in
Projection available outside vessel to flange face, Lf: 6 in

34/106
Reinforcement Calculations for Internal Pressure

UG-45 Nozzle
UG-37 Area Calculation Summary Wall
(in2) Thickness
For P = 1440.49 psi @ 120 °F Summary (in)
The nozzle passes
UG-45

A A A
A1 A2 A3 A5 treq tmin
required available welds

This nozzle is exempt from area


0.2515 0.655
calculations per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

Weld Failure Path Analysis Summary


The nozzle is exempt from weld strength
calculations per UW-15(b)(2)

UW-16 Weld Sizing Summary


Required weld Actual weld
Weld description Status
throat size (in) throat size (in)

Nozzle to shell fillet (Leg 41) 0.25 0.2625 weld size is adequate

Calculations for internal pressure 1440.49 psi @ 120 °F

Nozzle is impact test exempt to -155 °F per UCS-66(b)(3) (coincident ratio = 0.13499).

Nozzle UCS-66 governing thk: 0.655 in


Nozzle rated MDMT: -155 °F

Limits of reinforcement per UG-40

Parallel to the vessel wall: (Rn + tn + t )= 2.7175 in


Normal to the vessel wall outside: 2.5*(tn - Cn) + te = 1.4813 in

Nozzle required thickness per UG-27(c)(1)

trn = P*Rn/(Sn*E - 0.6*P)


= 1,440.487*1.0625/(20,000*1 - 0.6*1,440.487)
= 0.08 in

Required thickness tr from UG-37(a)

tr = P*Ro/(S*E + 0.4*P)
= 1,440.487*15/(20,000*1 + 0.4*1,440.487)
= 1.0501 in

This opening does not require reinforcement per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

35/106
UW-16(c) Weld Check

Fillet weld: tmin = lesser of 0.75 or tn or t = 0.5925 in


tc(min) = lesser of 0.25 or 0.7*tmin = 0.25 in
tc(actual) = 0.7*Leg = 0.7*0.375 = 0.2625 in

The fillet weld size is satisfactory.

Weld strength calculations are not required for this detail which conforms to Fig. UW-16.1, sketch (c-e).

UG-45 Nozzle Neck Thickness Check

Wall thickness per UG-45(a): tr1 = 0.1425 in (E =1)


Wall thickness per UG-45(b)(1): tr2 = 1.1126 in
Wall thickness per UG-16(b): tr3 = 0.125 in
Standard wall pipe per UG-45(b)(4): tr4 = 0.2515 in
The greater of tr2 or tr3: tr5 = 1.1126 in
The lesser of tr4 or tr5: tr6 = 0.2515 in

Required per UG-45 is the larger of tr1 or tr6 = 0.2515 in

Available nozzle wall thickness new, tn = 0.655 in

The nozzle neck thickness is adequate.

36/106
N14 6" 600# RF LWN HANDHOLE (N14)

ASME Section VIII Division 1, 2004 Edition, A05 Addenda

tw(lower) = 1.125 in
Leg41 = 0.375 in
Leg43 = 0.375 in
hnew = 0.375 in

Note: round inside edges per UG-76(c)

Located on: 30" OD X 10'-0" LG SHELL


Liquid static head included: 0 psi
Nozzle material specification: SA-105 (II-D p. 14, ln. 6)
Nozzle longitudinal joint efficiency: 1
Flange description: 6 inch Class 600 LWN A105
Bolt Material: SA-193 B7 Bolt <= 2 1/2 (II-D p. 382, ln. 33)
Flange rated MDMT: -22.7°F
(UCS-66(b)(1)(b))
Liquid static head on flange: 0 psi
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAWP: 1454 psi @ 120°F
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAP: 1480 psi @ 70°F
ASME B16.5 flange hydro test: 2225 psi @ 70°F
Nozzle orientation: 90°
Local vessel minimum thickness: 1.125 in
Nozzle center line offset to datum line: 16 in
End of nozzle to shell center: 21 in
Nozzle inside diameter, new: 6 in
Nozzle nominal wall thickness: 1.375 in
Nozzle corrosion allowance: 0.0625 in
Projection available outside vessel, Lpr: 3.87 in
Projection available outside vessel to flange face, Lf: 6 in

37/106
Reinforcement Calculations for Internal Pressure

UG-45
Nozzle Wall
UG-37 Area Calculation Summary (in2) Thickness
For P = 1440 psi @ 120 °F Summary
The opening is adequately reinforced
(in)
The nozzle
passes UG-45

A A A
A1 A2 A3 A5 treq tmin
required available welds

6.4298 6.8296 0.078 5.7481 0.7813 -- 0.2222 0.293 1.375

Weld Failure Path Analysis Summary


The nozzle is exempt from weld strength
calculations per UW-15(b)(1)

UW-16 Weld Sizing Summary


Required weld Actual weld
Weld description Status
throat size (in) throat size (in)

Nozzle to shell fillet (Leg 41) 0.25 0.2625 weld size is adequate

Calculations for internal pressure 1440 psi @ 120 °F

Nozzle impact test exemption temperature from Fig UCS-66 Curve B = 37 °F


Fig UCS-66.1 MDMT reduction = 1.2 °F, (coincident ratio = 0.98802).

Nozzle UCS-66 governing thk: 1.125 in


Nozzle rated MDMT: 35.8 °F

Limits of reinforcement per UG-40

Parallel to the vessel wall: d = 6.125 in


Normal to the vessel wall outside: 2.5*(t - C) = 2.6563 in
Normal to the vessel wall inside: 2.5*(t - C) = 2.6563 in

Nozzle required thickness per UG-27(c)(1)

trn = P*Rn/(Sn*E - 0.6*P)


= 1,440*3.0625/(20,000*1 - 0.6*1,440)
= 0.2305 in

Required thickness tr from UG-37(a)

tr = P*Ro/(S*E + 0.4*P)
= 1,440*15/(20,000*1 + 0.4*1,440)
= 1.0498 in

38/106
Area required per UG-37(c)

Allowable stresses: Sn = 20,000, Sv = 20,000 psi

fr1 = lesser of 1 or Sn/Sv = 1


fr2 = lesser of 1 or Sn/Sv = 1

A = d*tr*F + 2*tn*tr*F*(1 - fr1)


= 6.125*1.0498*1 + 2*1.3125*1.0498*1*(1 - 1)
= 6.4298 in2

Area available from FIG. UG-37.1

A1 = larger of the following= 0.078 in2

= d*(E1*t - F*tr) - 2*tn*(E1*t - F*tr)*(1 - fr1)


= 6.125*(1*1.0625 - 1*1.0498) - 2*1.3125*(1*1.0625 - 1*1.0498)*(1 - 1)
= 0.078 in2

= 2*(t + tn)*(E1*t - F*tr) - 2*tn*(E1*t - F*tr)*(1 - fr1)


= 2*(1.0625 + 1.3125)*(1*1.0625 - 1*1.0498) - 2*1.3125*(1*1.0625 - 1*1.0498)*(1 - 1)
= 0.0605 in2

A2 = smaller of the following= 5.7481 in2

= 5*(tn - trn)*fr2*t
= 5*(1.3125 - 0.2305)*1*1.0625
= 5.7481 in2

= 5*(tn - trn)*fr2*tn
= 5*(1.3125 - 0.2305)*1*1.3125
= 7.1006 in2

A3 = smaller of the following= 0.7813 in2

= 5*t*ti*fr2
= 5*1.0625*1.25*1
= 6.6406 in2

= 5*ti*ti*fr2
= 5*1.25*1.25*1
= 7.8125 in2

= 2*h*ti*fr2
= 2*0.3125*1.25*1
= 0.7813 in2

A41 = Leg2*fr2
= 0.3752*1

39/106
= 0.1406 in2

A43 = Leg2*fr2
= 0.28572*1
= 0.0816 in2

Area = A1 + A2 + A3 + A41 + A43


= 0.078 + 5.7481 + 0.7813 + 0.1406 + 0.0816
= 6.8296 in2

As Area >= A the reinforcement is adequate.

UW-16(c) Weld Check

Fillet weld: tmin = lesser of 0.75 or tn or t = 0.75 in


tc(min) = lesser of 0.25 or 0.7*tmin = 0.25 in
tc(actual) = 0.7*Leg = 0.7*0.375 = 0.2625 in

The fillet weld size is satisfactory.

Weld strength calculations are not required for this detail which conforms to Fig. UW-16.1, sketch (c-e).

UG-45 Nozzle Neck Thickness Check (Access Opening)

Wall thickness req'd per UG-45(a): tr1 = 0.293 in (E =1)


Wall thickness per UG-16(b): tr3 = 0.125 in

Available nozzle wall thickness new, tn = 1.375 in

The nozzle neck thickness is adequate.

40/106
N15 18" 600 RF HBN MANWAY (N15)

ASME Section VIII Division 1, 2004 Edition, A05 Addenda

tw(lower) = 1.125 in
Leg41 = 0.375 in
Leg43 = 0.375 in
hnew = 1.875 in

Note: round inside edges per UG-76(c)

Located on: 30" OD X 10'-0" LG SHELL


Liquid static head included: 0 psi
Nozzle material specification: SA-350 LF2 Cl 1 (II-D p. 14, ln. 11)
Nozzle longitudinal joint efficiency: 1
Flange description: 18 inch Class 600 HB A350 LF2 Cl.1 (Nut Stop)
Bolt Material: SA-193 B7 Bolt <= 2 1/2 (II-D p. 382, ln. 33)
Flange rated MDMT: -55°F
(UG-84 provisions apply)
(Flange impact tested to -55°F (UCS-66(g)))
Liquid static head on flange: 0 psi
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAWP: 1454 psi @ 120°F
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAP: 1480 psi @ 70°F
ASME B16.5 flange hydro test: 2225 psi @ 70°F
Nozzle orientation: 270°
Local vessel minimum thickness: 1.125 in
Nozzle center line offset to datum line: 80 in
End of nozzle to shell center: 23 in
Offset from center, Lo: 0.125 in
Nozzle inside diameter, new: 18 in
Nozzle wall thickness, tn: 2.595 in
Nozzle minimum wall thickness: 2.4075 in
Nozzle corrosion allowance: 0.0625 in
Opening chord length: 18.1261 in
Projection available outside vessel, Lpr: 9.8336 in
Projection available outside vessel to flange face, Lf: 13.3336 in

41/106
Reinforcement Calculations for Internal Pressure

UG-45 Nozzle
UG-37 Area Calculation Summary (in2) Wall
For P = 1440 psi @ 120 °F
Thickness
The opening is adequately reinforced Summary (in)
The nozzle passes
UG-45

A A A
A1 A2 A3 A5 treq tmin
required available welds

9.5141 28.7517 9.7449 9.8308 8.9538 -- 0.2222 0.7445 2.4075

Weld Failure Path Analysis Summary


The nozzle is exempt from weld strength
calculations per UW-15(b)(1)

UW-16 Weld Sizing Summary


Required weld Actual weld
Weld description Status
throat size (in) throat size (in)

Nozzle to shell fillet (Leg 41) 0.25 0.2625 weld size is adequate

Calculations for internal pressure 1440 psi @ 120 °F

Nozzle is impact tested to -55 °F (UCS-66(g)).

Nozzle UCS-66 governing thk: 1.125 in


Nozzle rated MDMT: -55 °F

Limits of reinforcement per UG-40

Parallel to the vessel wall: d = 18.1261 in


Normal to the vessel wall outside: 2.5*(t - C) = 2.6563 in
Normal to the vessel wall inside: 2.5*(t - C) = 2.6563 in

Nozzle required thickness per UG-27(c)(1)

trn = P*Rn/(Sn*E - 0.6*P)


= 1,440*9.0625/(20,000*1 - 0.6*1,440)
= 0.682 in

Required thickness tr from UG-37(a)

tr = P*Ro/(S*E + 0.4*P)
= 1,440*15/(20,000*1 + 0.4*1,440)
= 1.0498 in

Area required per UG-37(c)

42/106
Allowable stresses: Sn = 20,000, Sv = 20,000 psi

fr1 = lesser of 1 or Sn/Sv = 1


fr2 = lesser of 1 or Sn/Sv = 1

A = d*tr*F + 2*tn*tr*F*(1 - fr1)


= 18.1261*1.0498*0.5 + 2*2.5325*1.0498*0.5*(1 - 1)
= 9.5141 in2

Area available from FIG. UG-37.1

A1 = larger of the following= 9.7449 in2

= d*(E1*t - F*tr) - 2*tn*(E1*t - F*tr)*(1 - fr1)


= 18.1261*(1*1.0625 - 0.5*1.0498) - 2*2.5325*(1*1.0625 - 0.5*1.0498)*(1 - 1)
= 9.7449 in2

= 2*(t + tn)*(E1*t - F*tr) - 2*tn*(E1*t - F*tr)*(1 - fr1)


= 2*(1.0625 + 2.5325)*(1*1.0625 - 0.5*1.0498) - 2*2.5325*(1*1.0625 - 0.5*1.0498)*(1 - 1)
= 3.8655 in2

A2 = smaller of the following= 9.8308 in2

= 5*(tn - trn)*fr2*t
= 5*(2.5325 - 0.682)*1*1.0625
= 9.8308 in2

= 5*(tn - trn)*fr2*tn
= 5*(2.5325 - 0.682)*1*2.5325
= 23.432 in2

A3 = smaller of the following= 8.9538 in2

= 5*t*ti*fr2
= 5*1.0625*2.47*1
= 13.1219 in2

= 5*ti*ti*fr2
= 5*2.47*2.47*1
= 30.5045 in2

= 2*h*ti*fr2
= 2*1.8125*2.47*1
= 8.9538 in2

A41 = Leg2*fr2
= 0.3752*1
= 0.1406 in2

43/106
A43 = Leg2*fr2
= 0.28572*1
= 0.0816 in2

Area = A1 + A2 + A3 + A41 + A43


= 9.7449 + 9.8308 + 8.9538 + 0.1406 + 0.0816
= 28.7517 in2

As Area >= A the reinforcement is adequate.

UW-16(c) Weld Check

Fillet weld: tmin = lesser of 0.75 or tn or t = 0.75 in


tc(min) = lesser of 0.25 or 0.7*tmin = 0.25 in
tc(actual) = 0.7*Leg = 0.7*0.375 = 0.2625 in

The fillet weld size is satisfactory.

Weld strength calculations are not required for this detail which conforms to Fig. UW-16.1, sketch (c-e).

UG-45 Nozzle Neck Thickness Check (Access Opening)

Wall thickness req'd per UG-45(a): tr1 = 0.7445 in (E =1)


Wall thickness per UG-16(b): tr3 = 0.125 in

Available nozzle wall thickness new, tn = 2.4075 in

The nozzle neck thickness is adequate.

Check the opening per Appendix 1-7

Area required within 75 percent of the limits of reinforcement


= 2/3 * A = (2/3)*9.5141 = 6.3427 in2

Area that is within 75 percent of the limits of reinforcement is:

A1 = larger of 3.8655 or

= (2*limits - d)*(E1*t - F*tr) - 2*tn*(E1*t - F*tr)*(1 - fr1)


= (2*13.5946 - 18.1261)*(1*1.0625 - 1*1.0498) - 2*2.5325*(1*1.0625 - 1*1.0498)*(1 - 1)
= 4.8724 in2

Area = A1 + A2 + A3 + A41 + A42 + A43 + A5


= 4.8724 + 9.8308 + 8.9538 + 0.1406 + 0 + 0.0816 + 0
= 23.8792 in2

44/106
The area placement requirements of Appendix 1-7 are satisfied.

The opening is not within the size range defined by 1-7(b)(1)(a) and (b) so it is exempt from the requirements of
1-7(b)(2),(3) and (4).

Rn/R ratio does not exceed 0.7 so a U-2(g) analysis is not required per 1-7(b)(1)(c).

Reinforcement check in the plane parallel to the longitudinal axis

Reinforcement Calculations for Internal Pressure

UG-45 Nozzle
UG-37 Area Calculation Summary (in2) Wall
For P = 1440 psi @ 120 °F
Thickness
The opening is adequately reinforced Summary (in)
The nozzle passes
UG-45

A A A
A1 A2 A3 A5 treq tmin
required available welds

19.0271 19.2375 0.2307 9.8308 8.9538 -- 0.2222 0.7445 2.4075

Weld Failure Path Analysis Summary


The nozzle is exempt from weld strength
calculations per UW-15(b)(1)

UW-16 Weld Sizing Summary


Required weld Actual weld
Weld description Status
throat size (in) throat size (in)

Nozzle to shell fillet (Leg 41) 0.25 0.2625 weld size is adequate

Limits of reinforcement per UG-40

Parallel to the vessel wall: d = 18.125 in


Normal to the vessel wall outside: 2.5*(t - C) = 2.6563 in
Normal to the vessel wall inside: 2.5*(t - C) = 2.6563 in

Nozzle required thickness per UG-27(c)(1)

trn = P*Rn/(Sn*E - 0.6*P)


= 1,440*9.0625/(20,000*1 - 0.6*1,440)
= 0.682 in

Required thickness tr from UG-37(a)

tr = P*Ro/(S*E + 0.4*P)
= 1,440*15/(20,000*1 + 0.4*1,440)
= 1.0498 in

45/106
Area required per UG-37(c)

Allowable stresses: Sn = 20,000, Sv = 20,000 psi

fr1 = lesser of 1 or Sn/Sv = 1


fr2 = lesser of 1 or Sn/Sv = 1

A = d*tr*F + 2*tn*tr*F*(1 - fr1)


= 18.125*1.0498*1 + 2*2.5325*1.0498*1*(1 - 1)
= 19.0271 in2

Area available from FIG. UG-37.1

A1 = larger of the following= 0.2307 in2

= d*(E1*t - F*tr) - 2*tn*(E1*t - F*tr)*(1 - fr1)


= 18.125*(1*1.0625 - 1*1.0498) - 2*2.5325*(1*1.0625 - 1*1.0498)*(1 - 1)
= 0.2307 in2

= 2*(t + tn)*(E1*t - F*tr) - 2*tn*(E1*t - F*tr)*(1 - fr1)


= 2*(1.0625 + 2.5325)*(1*1.0625 - 1*1.0498) - 2*2.5325*(1*1.0625 - 1*1.0498)*(1 - 1)
= 0.0915 in2

A2 = smaller of the following= 9.8308 in2

= 5*(tn - trn)*fr2*t
= 5*(2.5325 - 0.682)*1*1.0625
= 9.8308 in2

= 5*(tn - trn)*fr2*tn
= 5*(2.5325 - 0.682)*1*2.5325
= 23.432 in2

A3 = smaller of the following= 8.9538 in2

= 5*t*ti*fr2
= 5*1.0625*2.47*1
= 13.1219 in2

= 5*ti*ti*fr2
= 5*2.47*2.47*1
= 30.5045 in2

= 2*h*ti*fr2
= 2*1.8125*2.47*1
= 8.9538 in2

A41 = Leg2*fr2
= 0.3752*1

46/106
= 0.1406 in2

A43 = Leg2*fr2
= 0.28572*1
= 0.0816 in2

Area = A1 + A2 + A3 + A41 + A43


= 0.2307 + 9.8308 + 8.9538 + 0.1406 + 0.0816
= 19.2375 in2

As Area >= A the reinforcement is adequate.

UG-45 Nozzle Neck Thickness Check (Access Opening)

Wall thickness req'd per UG-45(a): tr1 = 0.7445 in (E =1)


Wall thickness per UG-16(b): tr3 = 0.125 in

Available nozzle wall thickness new, tn = 2.4075 in

The nozzle neck thickness is adequate.

Check the opening per Appendix 1-7

Area required within 75 percent of the limits of reinforcement


= 2/3 * A = (2/3)*19.0271 = 12.6847 in2

Area that is within 75 percent of the limits of reinforcement is:

A1 = larger of 0.0915 or

= (2*limits - d)*(E1*t - F*tr) - 2*tn*(E1*t - F*tr)*(1 - fr1)


= (2*13.5938 - 18.125)*(1*1.0625 - 1*1.0498) - 2*2.5325*(1*1.0625 - 1*1.0498)*(1 - 1)
= 0.1154 in2

Area = A1 + A2 + A3 + A41 + A42 + A43 + A5


= 0.1154 + 9.8308 + 8.9538 + 0.1406 + 0 + 0.0816 + 0
= 19.1222 in2

The area placement requirements of Appendix 1-7 are satisfied.

The opening is not within the size range defined by 1-7(b)(1)(a) and (b) so it is exempt from the requirements of
1-7(b)(2),(3) and (4).

Rn/R ratio does not exceed 0.7 so a U-2(g) analysis is not required per 1-7(b)(1)(c).

47/106
N2 4" 600# RF LWN GAS OUTLET (N2)

ASME Section VIII Division 1, 2004 Edition, A05 Addenda

tw(lower) = 1.125 in
Leg41 = 0.375 in
Leg43 = 0.375 in
hnew = 0.375 in

Note: round inside edges per UG-76(c)

Located on: 30" OD X 10'-0" LG SHELL


Liquid static head included: 0 psi
Nozzle material specification: SA-105 (II-D p. 14, ln. 6)
Nozzle longitudinal joint efficiency: 1
Flange description: 4 inch Class 600 LWN A105
Bolt Material: SA-193 B7 Bolt <= 2 1/2 (II-D p. 382, ln. 33)
Flange rated MDMT: -22.7°F
(UCS-66(b)(1)(b))
Liquid static head on flange: 0 psi
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAWP: 1454 psi @ 120°F
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAP: 1480 psi @ 70°F
ASME B16.5 flange hydro test: 2225 psi @ 70°F
Nozzle orientation: 0°
Local vessel minimum thickness: 1.125 in
Nozzle center line offset to datum line: 7 in
End of nozzle to shell center: 22 in
Nozzle inside diameter, new: 4 in
Nozzle nominal wall thickness: 1 in
Nozzle corrosion allowance: 0.0625 in
Projection available outside vessel, Lpr: 5.25 in
Projection available outside vessel to flange face, Lf: 7 in

48/106
Reinforcement Calculations for Internal Pressure

UG-45
Nozzle Wall
UG-37 Area Calculation Summary (in2) Thickness
For P = 1440 psi @ 120 °F Summary
The opening is adequately reinforced
(in)
The nozzle
passes UG-45

A A A
A1 A2 A3 A5 treq tmin
required available welds

4.3303 4.4886 0.0525 3.667 0.5469 -- 0.2222 0.3075 1

Weld Failure Path Analysis Summary


The nozzle is exempt from weld strength
calculations per UW-15(b)(1)

UW-16 Weld Sizing Summary


Required weld Actual weld
Weld description Status
throat size (in) throat size (in)

Nozzle to shell fillet (Leg 41) 0.25 0.2625 weld size is adequate

Calculations for internal pressure 1440 psi @ 120 °F

Nozzle is impact test exempt to -155 °F per UCS-66(b)(3) (coincident ratio = 0.16555).

Nozzle UCS-66 governing thk: 1 in


Nozzle rated MDMT: -155 °F

Limits of reinforcement per UG-40

Parallel to the vessel wall: d = 4.125 in


Normal to the vessel wall outside: 2.5*(tn - Cn) + te = 2.3438 in
Normal to the vessel wall inside: 2.5*(tn - Cn - C) = 2.1875 in

Nozzle required thickness per UG-27(c)(1)

trn = P*Rn/(Sn*E - 0.6*P)


= 1,440*2.0625/(20,000*1 - 0.6*1,440)
= 0.1552 in

Required thickness tr from UG-37(a)

tr = P*Ro/(S*E + 0.4*P)
= 1,440*15/(20,000*1 + 0.4*1,440)
= 1.0498 in

49/106
Area required per UG-37(c)

Allowable stresses: Sn = 20,000, Sv = 20,000 psi

fr1 = lesser of 1 or Sn/Sv = 1


fr2 = lesser of 1 or Sn/Sv = 1

A = d*tr*F + 2*tn*tr*F*(1 - fr1)


= 4.125*1.0498*1 + 2*0.9375*1.0498*1*(1 - 1)
= 4.3303 in2

Area available from FIG. UG-37.1

A1 = larger of the following= 0.0525 in2

= d*(E1*t - F*tr) - 2*tn*(E1*t - F*tr)*(1 - fr1)


= 4.125*(1*1.0625 - 1*1.0498) - 2*0.9375*(1*1.0625 - 1*1.0498)*(1 - 1)
= 0.0525 in2

= 2*(t + tn)*(E1*t - F*tr) - 2*tn*(E1*t - F*tr)*(1 - fr1)


= 2*(1.0625 + 0.9375)*(1*1.0625 - 1*1.0498) - 2*0.9375*(1*1.0625 - 1*1.0498)*(1 - 1)
= 0.0509 in2

A2 = smaller of the following= 3.667 in2

= 5*(tn - trn)*fr2*t
= 5*(0.9375 - 0.1552)*1*1.0625
= 4.156 in2

= 5*(tn - trn)*fr2*tn
= 5*(0.9375 - 0.1552)*1*0.9375
= 3.667 in2

A3 = smaller of the following= 0.5469 in2

= 5*t*ti*fr2
= 5*1.0625*0.875*1
= 4.6484 in2

= 5*ti*ti*fr2
= 5*0.875*0.875*1
= 3.8281 in2

= 2*h*ti*fr2
= 2*0.3125*0.875*1
= 0.5469 in2

A41 = Leg2*fr2
= 0.3752*1
= 0.1406 in2

50/106
A43 = Leg2*fr2
= 0.28572*1
= 0.0816 in2

Area = A1 + A2 + A3 + A41 + A43


= 0.0525 + 3.667 + 0.5469 + 0.1406 + 0.0816
= 4.4886 in2

As Area >= A the reinforcement is adequate.

UW-16(c) Weld Check

Fillet weld: tmin = lesser of 0.75 or tn or t = 0.75 in


tc(min) = lesser of 0.25 or 0.7*tmin = 0.25 in
tc(actual) = 0.7*Leg = 0.7*0.375 = 0.2625 in

The fillet weld size is satisfactory.

Weld strength calculations are not required for this detail which conforms to Fig. UW-16.1, sketch (c-e).

UG-45 Nozzle Neck Thickness Check

Wall thickness per UG-45(a): tr1 = 0.2177 in (E =1)


Wall thickness per UG-45(b)(1): tr2 = 1.1123 in
Wall thickness per UG-16(b): tr3 = 0.125 in
Standard wall pipe per UG-45(b)(4): tr4 = 0.3075 in
The greater of tr2 or tr3: tr5 = 1.1123 in
The lesser of tr4 or tr5: tr6 = 0.3075 in

Required per UG-45 is the larger of tr1 or tr6 = 0.3075 in

Available nozzle wall thickness new, tn = 1 in

The nozzle neck thickness is adequate.

51/106
N3 2" 600# RF LWN OIL OUT (N3)

ASME Section VIII Division 1, 2004 Edition, A05 Addenda

tw(lower) = 1.125 in
Leg41 = 0.375 in
Leg43 = 0.375 in
hnew = 0.375 in

Note: round inside edges per UG-76(c)

Located on: 30" OD X 10'-0" LG SHELL


Liquid static head included: 0.4873 psi
Nozzle material specification: SA-105 (II-D p. 14, ln. 6)
Nozzle longitudinal joint efficiency: 1
Flange description: 2 inch Class 600 LWN A105
Bolt Material: SA-193 B7 Bolt <= 2 1/2 (II-D p. 382, ln. 33)
Flange rated MDMT: -22.7°F
(UCS-66(b)(1)(b))
Liquid static head on flange: 0.6822 psi
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAWP: 1454 psi @ 120°F
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAP: 1480 psi @ 70°F
ASME B16.5 flange hydro test: 2225 psi @ 70°F
Nozzle orientation: 180°
Local vessel minimum thickness: 1.125 in
Nozzle center line offset to datum line: 43 in
End of nozzle to shell center: 21 in
Nozzle inside diameter, new: 2 in
Nozzle nominal wall thickness: 0.655 in
Nozzle corrosion allowance: 0.0625 in
Projection available outside vessel, Lpr: 4.75 in
Projection available outside vessel to flange face, Lf: 6 in

52/106
Reinforcement Calculations for Internal Pressure

UG-45 Nozzle
UG-37 Area Calculation Summary Wall
(in2) Thickness
For P = 1440.49 psi @ 120 °F Summary (in)
The nozzle passes
UG-45

A A A
A1 A2 A3 A5 treq tmin
required available welds

This nozzle is exempt from area


0.2515 0.655
calculations per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

Weld Failure Path Analysis Summary


The nozzle is exempt from weld strength
calculations per UW-15(b)(2)

UW-16 Weld Sizing Summary


Required weld Actual weld
Weld description Status
throat size (in) throat size (in)

Nozzle to shell fillet (Leg 41) 0.25 0.2625 weld size is adequate

Calculations for internal pressure 1440.49 psi @ 120 °F

Nozzle is impact test exempt to -155 °F per UCS-66(b)(3) (coincident ratio = 0.13499).

Nozzle UCS-66 governing thk: 0.655 in


Nozzle rated MDMT: -155 °F

Limits of reinforcement per UG-40

Parallel to the vessel wall: (Rn + tn + t )= 2.7175 in


Normal to the vessel wall outside: 2.5*(tn - Cn) + te = 1.4813 in
Normal to the vessel wall inside: 2.5*(tn - Cn - C) = 1.325 in

Nozzle required thickness per UG-27(c)(1)

trn = P*Rn/(Sn*E - 0.6*P)


= 1,440.487*1.0625/(20,000*1 - 0.6*1,440.487)
= 0.08 in

Required thickness tr from UG-37(a)

tr = P*Ro/(S*E + 0.4*P)
= 1,440.487*15/(20,000*1 + 0.4*1,440.487)
= 1.0501 in

53/106
This opening does not require reinforcement per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

UW-16(c) Weld Check

Fillet weld: tmin = lesser of 0.75 or tn or t = 0.5925 in


tc(min) = lesser of 0.25 or 0.7*tmin = 0.25 in
tc(actual) = 0.7*Leg = 0.7*0.375 = 0.2625 in

The fillet weld size is satisfactory.

Weld strength calculations are not required for this detail which conforms to Fig. UW-16.1, sketch (c-e).

UG-45 Nozzle Neck Thickness Check

Wall thickness per UG-45(a): tr1 = 0.1425 in (E =1)


Wall thickness per UG-45(b)(1): tr2 = 1.1126 in
Wall thickness per UG-16(b): tr3 = 0.125 in
Standard wall pipe per UG-45(b)(4): tr4 = 0.2515 in
The greater of tr2 or tr3: tr5 = 1.1126 in
The lesser of tr4 or tr5: tr6 = 0.2515 in

Required per UG-45 is the larger of tr1 or tr6 = 0.2515 in

Available nozzle wall thickness new, tn = 0.655 in

The nozzle neck thickness is adequate.

54/106
N4 2" 600# RF LWN WATER OUT (N4)

ASME Section VIII Division 1, 2004 Edition, A05 Addenda

tw(lower) = 1.125 in
Leg41 = 0.375 in
Leg43 = 0.375 in
hnew = 0.375 in

Note: round inside edges per UG-76(c)

Located on: 30" OD X 10'-0" LG SHELL


Liquid static head included: 0.4873 psi
Nozzle material specification: SA-105 (II-D p. 14, ln. 6)
Nozzle longitudinal joint efficiency: 1
Flange description: 2 inch Class 600 LWN A105
Bolt Material: SA-193 B7 Bolt <= 2 1/2 (II-D p. 382, ln. 33)
Flange rated MDMT: -22.7°F
(UCS-66(b)(1)(b))
Liquid static head on flange: 0.6822 psi
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAWP: 1454 psi @ 120°F
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAP: 1480 psi @ 70°F
ASME B16.5 flange hydro test: 2225 psi @ 70°F
Nozzle orientation: 180°
Local vessel minimum thickness: 1.125 in
Nozzle center line offset to datum line: 11 in
End of nozzle to shell center: 21 in
Nozzle inside diameter, new: 2 in
Nozzle nominal wall thickness: 0.655 in
Nozzle corrosion allowance: 0.0625 in
Projection available outside vessel, Lpr: 4.75 in
Projection available outside vessel to flange face, Lf: 6 in

55/106
Reinforcement Calculations for Internal Pressure

UG-45 Nozzle
UG-37 Area Calculation Summary Wall
(in2) Thickness
For P = 1440.49 psi @ 120 °F Summary (in)
The nozzle passes
UG-45

A A A
A1 A2 A3 A5 treq tmin
required available welds

This nozzle is exempt from area


0.2515 0.655
calculations per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

Weld Failure Path Analysis Summary


The nozzle is exempt from weld strength
calculations per UW-15(b)(2)

UW-16 Weld Sizing Summary


Required weld Actual weld
Weld description Status
throat size (in) throat size (in)

Nozzle to shell fillet (Leg 41) 0.25 0.2625 weld size is adequate

Calculations for internal pressure 1440.49 psi @ 120 °F

Nozzle is impact test exempt to -155 °F per UCS-66(b)(3) (coincident ratio = 0.13499).

Nozzle UCS-66 governing thk: 0.655 in


Nozzle rated MDMT: -155 °F

Limits of reinforcement per UG-40

Parallel to the vessel wall: (Rn + tn + t )= 2.7175 in


Normal to the vessel wall outside: 2.5*(tn - Cn) + te = 1.4813 in
Normal to the vessel wall inside: 2.5*(tn - Cn - C) = 1.325 in

Nozzle required thickness per UG-27(c)(1)

trn = P*Rn/(Sn*E - 0.6*P)


= 1,440.487*1.0625/(20,000*1 - 0.6*1,440.487)
= 0.08 in

Required thickness tr from UG-37(a)

tr = P*Ro/(S*E + 0.4*P)
= 1,440.487*15/(20,000*1 + 0.4*1,440.487)
= 1.0501 in

56/106
This opening does not require reinforcement per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

UW-16(c) Weld Check

Fillet weld: tmin = lesser of 0.75 or tn or t = 0.5925 in


tc(min) = lesser of 0.25 or 0.7*tmin = 0.25 in
tc(actual) = 0.7*Leg = 0.7*0.375 = 0.2625 in

The fillet weld size is satisfactory.

Weld strength calculations are not required for this detail which conforms to Fig. UW-16.1, sketch (c-e).

UG-45 Nozzle Neck Thickness Check

Wall thickness per UG-45(a): tr1 = 0.1425 in (E =1)


Wall thickness per UG-45(b)(1): tr2 = 1.1126 in
Wall thickness per UG-16(b): tr3 = 0.125 in
Standard wall pipe per UG-45(b)(4): tr4 = 0.2515 in
The greater of tr2 or tr3: tr5 = 1.1126 in
The lesser of tr4 or tr5: tr6 = 0.2515 in

Required per UG-45 is the larger of tr1 or tr6 = 0.2515 in

Available nozzle wall thickness new, tn = 0.655 in

The nozzle neck thickness is adequate.

57/106
N5A 2" 600# RF LWN OIL LVL CONTROL (N5A)

ASME Section VIII Division 1, 2004 Edition, A05 Addenda

tw(lower) = 1.125 in
Leg41 = 0.375 in
Leg43 = 0.375 in
hnew = 0.375 in

Note: round inside edges per UG-76(c)

Located on: 30" OD X 10'-0" LG SHELL


Liquid static head included: 0 psi
Nozzle material specification: SA-105 (II-D p. 14, ln. 6)
Nozzle longitudinal joint efficiency: 1
Flange description: 2 inch Class 600 LWN A105
Bolt Material: SA-193 B7 Bolt <= 2 1/2 (II-D p. 382, ln. 33)
Flange rated MDMT: -22.7°F
(UCS-66(b)(1)(b))
Liquid static head on flange: 0 psi
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAWP: 1454 psi @ 120°F
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAP: 1480 psi @ 70°F
ASME B16.5 flange hydro test: 2225 psi @ 70°F
Nozzle orientation: 90°
Local vessel minimum thickness: 1.125 in
Nozzle center line offset to datum line: 43 in
End of nozzle to shell center: 19.5185 in
Offset from center, Lo: -6.5 in
Nozzle inside diameter, new: 2 in
Nozzle nominal wall thickness: 0.655 in
Nozzle corrosion allowance: 0.0625 in
Opening chord length: 2.3808 in
Projection available outside vessel, Lpr: 4.0725 in
Projection available outside vessel to flange face, Lf: 5.3225 in

58/106
Reinforcement Calculations for Internal Pressure

UG-45 Nozzle
UG-37 Area Calculation Summary (in2) Wall
For P = 1440 psi @ 120 °F
Thickness
The opening is adequately reinforced Summary (in)
The nozzle passes
UG-45

A A A
A1 A2 A3 A5 treq tmin
required available welds

1.2496 3.8513 1.7795 1.5183 0.3313 -- 0.2222 0.2515 0.655

Weld Failure Path Analysis Summary


The nozzle is exempt from weld strength
calculations per UW-15(b)(1)

UW-16 Weld Sizing Summary


Required weld Actual weld
Weld description Status
throat size (in) throat size (in)

Nozzle to shell fillet (Leg 41) 0.25 0.2625 weld size is adequate

Calculations for internal pressure 1440 psi @ 120 °F

Nozzle is impact test exempt to -155 °F per UCS-66(b)(3) (coincident ratio = 0.13494).

Nozzle UCS-66 governing thk: 0.655 in


Nozzle rated MDMT: -155 °F

Limits of reinforcement per UG-40

Parallel to the vessel wall: (Rn + tn + t )= 2.8454 in


Normal to the vessel wall outside: 2.5*(tn - Cn) + te = 1.4813 in
Normal to the vessel wall inside: 2.5*(tn - Cn - C) = 1.325 in

Nozzle required thickness per UG-27(c)(1)

trn = P*Rn/(Sn*E - 0.6*P)


= 1,440*1.0625/(20,000*1 - 0.6*1,440)
= 0.08 in

Required thickness tr from UG-37(a)

tr = P*Ro/(S*E + 0.4*P)
= 1,440*15/(20,000*1 + 0.4*1,440)
= 1.0498 in

Area required per UG-37(c)

59/106
Allowable stresses: Sn = 20,000, Sv = 20,000 psi

fr1 = lesser of 1 or Sn/Sv = 1


fr2 = lesser of 1 or Sn/Sv = 1

A = d*tr*F + 2*tn*tr*F*(1 - fr1)


= 2.3808*1.0498*0.5 + 2*0.5925*1.0498*0.5*(1 - 1)
= 1.2496 in2

Area available from FIG. UG-37.1

A1 = larger of the following= 1.7795 in2

= d*(E1*t - F*tr) - 2*tn*(E1*t - F*tr)*(1 - fr1)


= 2.3808*(1*1.0625 - 0.5*1.0498) - 2*0.5925*(1*1.0625 - 0.5*1.0498)*(1 - 1)
= 1.28 in2

= 2*(t + tn)*(E1*t - F*tr) - 2*tn*(E1*t - F*tr)*(1 - fr1)


= 2*(1.0625 + 0.5925)*(1*1.0625 - 0.5*1.0498) - 2*0.5925*(1*1.0625 - 0.5*1.0498)*(1 - 1)
= 1.7795 in2

A2 = smaller of the following= 1.5183 in2

= 5*(tn - trn)*fr2*t
= 5*(0.5925 - 0.08)*1*1.0625
= 2.7227 in2

= 5*(tn - trn)*fr2*tn
= 5*(0.5925 - 0.08)*1*0.5925
= 1.5183 in2

A3 = smaller of the following= 0.3313 in2

= 5*t*ti*fr2
= 5*1.0625*0.53*1
= 2.8156 in2

= 5*ti*ti*fr2
= 5*0.53*0.53*1
= 1.4045 in2

= 2*h*ti*fr2
= 2*0.3125*0.53*1
= 0.3313 in2

A41 = Leg2*fr2
= 0.3752*1
= 0.1406 in2

60/106
A43 = Leg2*fr2
= 0.28572*1
= 0.0816 in2

Area = A1 + A2 + A3 + A41 + A43


= 1.7795 + 1.5183 + 0.3313 + 0.1406 + 0.0816
= 3.8513 in2

As Area >= A the reinforcement is adequate.

UW-16(c) Weld Check

Fillet weld: tmin = lesser of 0.75 or tn or t = 0.5925 in


tc(min) = lesser of 0.25 or 0.7*tmin = 0.25 in
tc(actual) = 0.7*Leg = 0.7*0.375 = 0.2625 in

The fillet weld size is satisfactory.

Weld strength calculations are not required for this detail which conforms to Fig. UW-16.1, sketch (c-e).

UG-45 Nozzle Neck Thickness Check

Wall thickness per UG-45(a): tr1 = 0.1425 in (E =1)


Wall thickness per UG-45(b)(1): tr2 = 1.1123 in
Wall thickness per UG-16(b): tr3 = 0.125 in
Standard wall pipe per UG-45(b)(4): tr4 = 0.2515 in
The greater of tr2 or tr3: tr5 = 1.1123 in
The lesser of tr4 or tr5: tr6 = 0.2515 in

61/106
Required per UG-45 is the larger of tr1 or tr6 = 0.2515 in

Available nozzle wall thickness new, tn = 0.655 in

The nozzle neck thickness is adequate.

Reinforcement check in the plane parallel to the longitudinal axis

Reinforcement Calculations for Internal Pressure

UG-45 Nozzle
UG-37 Area Calculation Summary Wall
(in2) Thickness
For P = 1440 psi @ 120 °F Summary (in)
The nozzle passes
UG-45

A A A
A1 A2 A3 A5 treq tmin
required available welds

This nozzle is exempt from area


0.2515 0.655
calculations per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

Weld Failure Path Analysis Summary


The nozzle is exempt from weld strength
calculations per UW-15(b)(2)

UW-16 Weld Sizing Summary


Required weld Actual weld
Weld description Status
throat size (in) throat size (in)

Nozzle to shell fillet (Leg 41) 0.25 0.2625 weld size is adequate

Limits of reinforcement per UG-40

Parallel to the vessel wall: (Rn + tn + t )= 2.7175 in


Normal to the vessel wall outside: 2.5*(tn - Cn) + te = 1.4813 in
Normal to the vessel wall inside: 2.5*(tn - Cn - C) = 1.325 in

Nozzle required thickness per UG-27(c)(1)

trn = P*Rn/(Sn*E - 0.6*P)


= 1,440*1.0625/(20,000*1 - 0.6*1,440)
= 0.08 in

Required thickness tr from UG-37(a)

tr = P*Ro/(S*E + 0.4*P)
= 1,440*15/(20,000*1 + 0.4*1,440)
= 1.0498 in

This opening does not require reinforcement per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

62/106
UG-45 Nozzle Neck Thickness Check

Wall thickness per UG-45(a): tr1 = 0.1425 in (E =1)


Wall thickness per UG-45(b)(1): tr2 = 1.1123 in
Wall thickness per UG-16(b): tr3 = 0.125 in
Standard wall pipe per UG-45(b)(4): tr4 = 0.2515 in
The greater of tr2 or tr3: tr5 = 1.1123 in
The lesser of tr4 or tr5: tr6 = 0.2515 in

Required per UG-45 is the larger of tr1 or tr6 = 0.2515 in

Available nozzle wall thickness new, tn = 0.655 in

The nozzle neck thickness is adequate.

63/106
N5B 2" 600# RF LWN OIL LVL CONTROL (N5B)

ASME Section VIII Division 1, 2004 Edition, A05 Addenda

tw(lower) = 1.125 in
Leg41 = 0.375 in
Leg43 = 0.375 in
hnew = 0.375 in

Note: round inside edges per UG-76(c)

Located on: 30" OD X 10'-0" LG SHELL


Liquid static head included: 0.2437 psi
Nozzle material specification: SA-105 (II-D p. 14, ln. 6)
Nozzle longitudinal joint efficiency: 1
Flange description: 2 inch Class 600 LWN A105
Bolt Material: SA-193 B7 Bolt <= 2 1/2 (II-D p. 382, ln. 33)
Flange rated MDMT: -22.7°F
(UCS-66(b)(1)(b))
Liquid static head on flange: 0.2437 psi
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAWP: 1454 psi @ 120°F
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAP: 1480 psi @ 70°F
ASME B16.5 flange hydro test: 2225 psi @ 70°F
Nozzle orientation: 90°
Local vessel minimum thickness: 1.125 in
Nozzle center line offset to datum line: 43 in
End of nozzle to shell center: 19.5 in
Offset from center, Lo: 7.5 in
Nozzle inside diameter, new: 2 in
Nozzle nominal wall thickness: 0.655 in
Nozzle corrosion allowance: 0.0625 in
Opening chord length: 2.4887 in
Projection available outside vessel, Lpr: 4.4357 in
Projection available outside vessel to flange face, Lf: 5.6857 in

64/106
Reinforcement Calculations for Internal Pressure

UG-45 Nozzle
UG-37 Area Calculation Summary (in2) Wall
For P = 1440.24 psi @ 120 °F
Thickness
The opening is adequately reinforced Summary (in)
The nozzle passes
UG-45

A A A
A1 A2 A3 A5 treq tmin
required available welds

1.3065 3.851 1.7792 1.5183 0.3313 -- 0.2222 0.2515 0.655

Weld Failure Path Analysis Summary


The nozzle is exempt from weld strength
calculations per UW-15(b)(1)

UW-16 Weld Sizing Summary


Required weld Actual weld
Weld description Status
throat size (in) throat size (in)

Nozzle to shell fillet (Leg 41) 0.25 0.2625 weld size is adequate

Calculations for internal pressure 1440.24 psi @ 120 °F

Nozzle is impact test exempt to -155 °F per UCS-66(b)(3) (coincident ratio = 0.13497).

Nozzle UCS-66 governing thk: 0.655 in


Nozzle rated MDMT: -155 °F

Limits of reinforcement per UG-40

Parallel to the vessel wall: (Rn + tn + t )= 2.8994 in


Normal to the vessel wall outside: 2.5*(tn - Cn) + te = 1.4813 in
Normal to the vessel wall inside: 2.5*(tn - Cn - C) = 1.325 in

Nozzle required thickness per UG-27(c)(1)

trn = P*Rn/(Sn*E - 0.6*P)


= 1,440.244*1.0625/(20,000*1 - 0.6*1,440.244)
= 0.08 in

Required thickness tr from UG-37(a)

tr = P*Ro/(S*E + 0.4*P)
= 1,440.244*15/(20,000*1 + 0.4*1,440.244)
= 1.0499 in

Area required per UG-37(c)

65/106
Allowable stresses: Sn = 20,000, Sv = 20,000 psi

fr1 = lesser of 1 or Sn/Sv = 1


fr2 = lesser of 1 or Sn/Sv = 1

A = d*tr*F + 2*tn*tr*F*(1 - fr1)


= 2.4887*1.0499*0.5 + 2*0.5925*1.0499*0.5*(1 - 1)
= 1.3065 in2

Area available from FIG. UG-37.1

A1 = larger of the following= 1.7792 in2

= d*(E1*t - F*tr) - 2*tn*(E1*t - F*tr)*(1 - fr1)


= 2.4887*(1*1.0625 - 0.5*1.0499) - 2*0.5925*(1*1.0625 - 0.5*1.0499)*(1 - 1)
= 1.3378 in2

= 2*(t + tn)*(E1*t - F*tr) - 2*tn*(E1*t - F*tr)*(1 - fr1)


= 2*(1.0625 + 0.5925)*(1*1.0625 - 0.5*1.0499) - 2*0.5925*(1*1.0625 - 0.5*1.0499)*(1 - 1)
= 1.7792 in2

A2 = smaller of the following= 1.5183 in2

= 5*(tn - trn)*fr2*t
= 5*(0.5925 - 0.08)*1*1.0625
= 2.7227 in2

= 5*(tn - trn)*fr2*tn
= 5*(0.5925 - 0.08)*1*0.5925
= 1.5183 in2

A3 = smaller of the following= 0.3313 in2

= 5*t*ti*fr2
= 5*1.0625*0.53*1
= 2.8156 in2

= 5*ti*ti*fr2
= 5*0.53*0.53*1
= 1.4045 in2

= 2*h*ti*fr2
= 2*0.3125*0.53*1
= 0.3313 in2

A41 = Leg2*fr2
= 0.3752*1
= 0.1406 in2

66/106
A43 = Leg2*fr2
= 0.28572*1
= 0.0816 in2

Area = A1 + A2 + A3 + A41 + A43


= 1.7792 + 1.5183 + 0.3313 + 0.1406 + 0.0816
= 3.851 in2

As Area >= A the reinforcement is adequate.

UW-16(c) Weld Check

Fillet weld: tmin = lesser of 0.75 or tn or t = 0.5925 in


tc(min) = lesser of 0.25 or 0.7*tmin = 0.25 in
tc(actual) = 0.7*Leg = 0.7*0.375 = 0.2625 in

The fillet weld size is satisfactory.

Weld strength calculations are not required for this detail which conforms to Fig. UW-16.1, sketch (c-e).

UG-45 Nozzle Neck Thickness Check

Wall thickness per UG-45(a): tr1 = 0.1425 in (E =1)


Wall thickness per UG-45(b)(1): tr2 = 1.1124 in
Wall thickness per UG-16(b): tr3 = 0.125 in
Standard wall pipe per UG-45(b)(4): tr4 = 0.2515 in
The greater of tr2 or tr3: tr5 = 1.1124 in
The lesser of tr4 or tr5: tr6 = 0.2515 in

67/106
Required per UG-45 is the larger of tr1 or tr6 = 0.2515 in

Available nozzle wall thickness new, tn = 0.655 in

The nozzle neck thickness is adequate.

Reinforcement check in the plane parallel to the longitudinal axis

Reinforcement Calculations for Internal Pressure

UG-45 Nozzle
UG-37 Area Calculation Summary Wall
(in2) Thickness
For P = 1440.24 psi @ 120 °F Summary (in)
The nozzle passes
UG-45

A A A
A1 A2 A3 A5 treq tmin
required available welds

This nozzle is exempt from area


0.2515 0.655
calculations per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

Weld Failure Path Analysis Summary


The nozzle is exempt from weld strength
calculations per UW-15(b)(2)

UW-16 Weld Sizing Summary


Required weld Actual weld
Weld description Status
throat size (in) throat size (in)

Nozzle to shell fillet (Leg 41) 0.25 0.2625 weld size is adequate

Limits of reinforcement per UG-40

Parallel to the vessel wall: (Rn + tn + t )= 2.7175 in


Normal to the vessel wall outside: 2.5*(tn - Cn) + te = 1.4813 in
Normal to the vessel wall inside: 2.5*(tn - Cn - C) = 1.325 in

Nozzle required thickness per UG-27(c)(1)

trn = P*Rn/(Sn*E - 0.6*P)


= 1,440.244*1.0625/(20,000*1 - 0.6*1,440.244)
= 0.08 in

Required thickness tr from UG-37(a)

tr = P*Ro/(S*E + 0.4*P)
= 1,440.244*15/(20,000*1 + 0.4*1,440.244)
= 1.0499 in

This opening does not require reinforcement per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

68/106
UG-45 Nozzle Neck Thickness Check

Wall thickness per UG-45(a): tr1 = 0.1425 in (E =1)


Wall thickness per UG-45(b)(1): tr2 = 1.1124 in
Wall thickness per UG-16(b): tr3 = 0.125 in
Standard wall pipe per UG-45(b)(4): tr4 = 0.2515 in
The greater of tr2 or tr3: tr5 = 1.1124 in
The lesser of tr4 or tr5: tr6 = 0.2515 in

Required per UG-45 is the larger of tr1 or tr6 = 0.2515 in

Available nozzle wall thickness new, tn = 0.655 in

The nozzle neck thickness is adequate.

69/106
N6A 2" 600# RF LWN WTR LVL CONTROL (N6A)

ASME Section VIII Division 1, 2004 Edition, A05 Addenda

tw(lower) = 1.125 in
Leg41 = 0.375 in
Leg43 = 0.375 in
hnew = 0.375 in

Note: round inside edges per UG-76(c)

Located on: 30" OD X 10'-0" LG SHELL


Liquid static head included: 0 psi
Nozzle material specification: SA-105 (II-D p. 14, ln. 6)
Nozzle longitudinal joint efficiency: 1
Flange description: 2 inch Class 600 LWN A105
Bolt Material: SA-193 B7 Bolt <= 2 1/2 (II-D p. 382, ln. 33)
Flange rated MDMT: -22.7°F
(UCS-66(b)(1)(b))
Liquid static head on flange: 0 psi
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAWP: 1454 psi @ 120°F
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAP: 1480 psi @ 70°F
ASME B16.5 flange hydro test: 2225 psi @ 70°F
Nozzle orientation: 90°
Local vessel minimum thickness: 1.125 in
Nozzle center line offset to datum line: 2 in
End of nozzle to shell center: 19.9396 in
Offset from center, Lo: -3 in
Nozzle inside diameter, new: 2 in
Nozzle nominal wall thickness: 0.655 in
Nozzle corrosion allowance: 0.0625 in
Opening chord length: 2.1725 in
Projection available outside vessel, Lpr: 3.75 in
Projection available outside vessel to flange face, Lf: 5 in

70/106
Reinforcement Calculations for Internal Pressure

UG-45 Nozzle
UG-37 Area Calculation Summary Wall
(in2) Thickness
For P = 1440 psi @ 120 °F Summary (in)
The nozzle passes
UG-45

A A A
A1 A2 A3 A5 treq tmin
required available welds

This nozzle is exempt from area


0.2515 0.655
calculations per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

Weld Failure Path Analysis Summary


The nozzle is exempt from weld strength
calculations per UW-15(b)(2)

UW-16 Weld Sizing Summary


Required weld Actual weld
Weld description Status
throat size (in) throat size (in)

Nozzle to shell fillet (Leg 41) 0.25 0.2625 weld size is adequate

Calculations for internal pressure 1440 psi @ 120 °F

Nozzle is impact test exempt to -155 °F per UCS-66(b)(3) (coincident ratio = 0.13494).

Nozzle UCS-66 governing thk: 0.655 in


Nozzle rated MDMT: -155 °F

Limits of reinforcement per UG-40

Parallel to the vessel wall: (Rn + tn + t )= 2.7413 in


Normal to the vessel wall outside: 2.5*(tn - Cn) + te = 1.4813 in
Normal to the vessel wall inside: 2.5*(tn - Cn - C) = 1.325 in

Nozzle required thickness per UG-27(c)(1)

trn = P*Rn/(Sn*E - 0.6*P)


= 1,440*1.0625/(20,000*1 - 0.6*1,440)
= 0.08 in

Required thickness tr from UG-37(a)

tr = P*Ro/(S*E + 0.4*P)
= 1,440*15/(20,000*1 + 0.4*1,440)
= 1.0498 in

71/106
This opening does not require reinforcement per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

UW-16(c) Weld Check

Fillet weld: tmin = lesser of 0.75 or tn or t = 0.5925 in


tc(min) = lesser of 0.25 or 0.7*tmin = 0.25 in
tc(actual) = 0.7*Leg = 0.7*0.375 = 0.2625 in

The fillet weld size is satisfactory.

Weld strength calculations are not required for this detail which conforms to Fig. UW-16.1, sketch (c-e).

UG-45 Nozzle Neck Thickness Check

Wall thickness per UG-45(a): tr1 = 0.1425 in (E =1)


Wall thickness per UG-45(b)(1): tr2 = 1.1123 in
Wall thickness per UG-16(b): tr3 = 0.125 in
Standard wall pipe per UG-45(b)(4): tr4 = 0.2515 in
The greater of tr2 or tr3: tr5 = 1.1123 in
The lesser of tr4 or tr5: tr6 = 0.2515 in

72/106
Required per UG-45 is the larger of tr1 or tr6 = 0.2515 in

Available nozzle wall thickness new, tn = 0.655 in

The nozzle neck thickness is adequate.

Reinforcement check in the plane parallel to the longitudinal axis

Reinforcement Calculations for Internal Pressure

UG-45 Nozzle
UG-37 Area Calculation Summary Wall
(in2) Thickness
For P = 1440 psi @ 120 °F Summary (in)
The nozzle passes
UG-45

A A A
A1 A2 A3 A5 treq tmin
required available welds

This nozzle is exempt from area


0.2515 0.655
calculations per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

Weld Failure Path Analysis Summary


The nozzle is exempt from weld strength
calculations per UW-15(b)(2)

UW-16 Weld Sizing Summary


Required weld Actual weld
Weld description Status
throat size (in) throat size (in)

Nozzle to shell fillet (Leg 41) 0.25 0.2625 weld size is adequate

Limits of reinforcement per UG-40

Parallel to the vessel wall: (Rn + tn + t )= 2.7175 in


Normal to the vessel wall outside: 2.5*(tn - Cn) + te = 1.4813 in
Normal to the vessel wall inside: 2.5*(tn - Cn - C) = 1.325 in

Nozzle required thickness per UG-27(c)(1)

trn = P*Rn/(Sn*E - 0.6*P)


= 1,440*1.0625/(20,000*1 - 0.6*1,440)
= 0.08 in

Required thickness tr from UG-37(a)

tr = P*Ro/(S*E + 0.4*P)
= 1,440*15/(20,000*1 + 0.4*1,440)
= 1.0498 in

This opening does not require reinforcement per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

73/106
UG-45 Nozzle Neck Thickness Check

Wall thickness per UG-45(a): tr1 = 0.1425 in (E =1)


Wall thickness per UG-45(b)(1): tr2 = 1.1123 in
Wall thickness per UG-16(b): tr3 = 0.125 in
Standard wall pipe per UG-45(b)(4): tr4 = 0.2515 in
The greater of tr2 or tr3: tr5 = 1.1123 in
The lesser of tr4 or tr5: tr6 = 0.2515 in

Required per UG-45 is the larger of tr1 or tr6 = 0.2515 in

Available nozzle wall thickness new, tn = 0.655 in

The nozzle neck thickness is adequate.

74/106
N6B 2" 600# RF LWN WTR LVL CONTROL (N6B)

ASME Section VIII Division 1, 2004 Edition, A05 Addenda

tw(lower) = 1.125 in
Leg41 = 0.375 in
Leg43 = 0.375 in
hnew = 0.375 in

Note: round inside edges per UG-76(c)

Located on: 30" OD X 10'-0" LG SHELL


Liquid static head included: 0.3574 psi
Nozzle material specification: SA-105 (II-D p. 14, ln. 6) (normalized)
Nozzle longitudinal joint efficiency: 1
Flange description: 2 inch Class 600 LWN A105
Bolt Material: SA-193 B7 Bolt <= 2 1/2 (II-D p. 382, ln. 33)
Flange rated MDMT: -22.7°F
(UCS-66(b)(1)(b))
Liquid static head on flange: 0.3574 psi
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAWP: 1454 psi @ 120°F
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAP: 1480 psi @ 70°F
ASME B16.5 flange hydro test: 2225 psi @ 70°F
Nozzle orientation: 90°
Local vessel minimum thickness: 1.125 in
Nozzle center line offset to datum line: 2 in
End of nozzle to shell center: 19.5 in
Offset from center, Lo: 11 in
Nozzle inside diameter, new: 2 in
Nozzle nominal wall thickness: 0.655 in
Nozzle corrosion allowance: 0.0625 in
Opening chord length: 3.3032 in
Projection available outside vessel, Lpr: 6.5167 in
Projection available outside vessel to flange face, Lf: 7.7667 in

75/106
Reinforcement Calculations for Internal Pressure

UG-45 Nozzle
UG-37 Area Calculation Summary (in2) Wall
For P = 1440.36 psi @ 120 °F
Thickness
The opening is adequately reinforced Summary (in)
The nozzle passes
UG-45

A A A
A1 A2 A3 A5 treq tmin
required available welds

1.7342 3.8509 1.7791 1.5183 0.3313 -- 0.2222 0.2515 0.655

Weld Failure Path Analysis Summary


The nozzle is exempt from weld strength
calculations per UW-15(b)(1)

UW-16 Weld Sizing Summary


Required weld Actual weld
Weld description Status
throat size (in) throat size (in)

Nozzle to shell fillet (Leg 41) 0.25 0.2625 weld size is adequate

Calculations for internal pressure 1440.36 psi @ 120 °F

Nozzle is impact test exempt to -155 °F per UCS-66(b)(3) (coincident ratio = 0.13498).

Nozzle UCS-66 governing thk: 0.655 in


Nozzle rated MDMT: -155 °F

Limits of reinforcement per UG-40

Parallel to the vessel wall: (Rn + tn + t )= 3.3066 in


Normal to the vessel wall outside: 2.5*(tn - Cn) + te = 1.4813 in
Normal to the vessel wall inside: 2.5*(tn - Cn - C) = 1.325 in

Nozzle required thickness per UG-27(c)(1)

trn = P*Rn/(Sn*E - 0.6*P)


= 1,440.357*1.0625/(20,000*1 - 0.6*1,440.357)
= 0.08 in

Required thickness tr from UG-37(a)

tr = P*Ro/(S*E + 0.4*P)
= 1,440.357*15/(20,000*1 + 0.4*1,440.357)
= 1.05 in

Area required per UG-37(c)

76/106
Allowable stresses: Sn = 20,000, Sv = 20,000 psi

fr1 = lesser of 1 or Sn/Sv = 1


fr2 = lesser of 1 or Sn/Sv = 1

A = d*tr*F + 2*tn*tr*F*(1 - fr1)


= 3.3032*1.05*0.5 + 2*0.5925*1.05*0.5*(1 - 1)
= 1.7342 in2

Area available from FIG. UG-37.1

A1 = larger of the following= 1.7791 in2

= d*(E1*t - F*tr) - 2*tn*(E1*t - F*tr)*(1 - fr1)


= 3.3032*(1*1.0625 - 0.5*1.05) - 2*0.5925*(1*1.0625 - 0.5*1.05)*(1 - 1)
= 1.7754 in2

= 2*(t + tn)*(E1*t - F*tr) - 2*tn*(E1*t - F*tr)*(1 - fr1)


= 2*(1.0625 + 0.5925)*(1*1.0625 - 0.5*1.05) - 2*0.5925*(1*1.0625 - 0.5*1.05)*(1 - 1)
= 1.7791 in2

A2 = smaller of the following= 1.5183 in2

= 5*(tn - trn)*fr2*t
= 5*(0.5925 - 0.08)*1*1.0625
= 2.7227 in2

= 5*(tn - trn)*fr2*tn
= 5*(0.5925 - 0.08)*1*0.5925
= 1.5183 in2

A3 = smaller of the following= 0.3313 in2

= 5*t*ti*fr2
= 5*1.0625*0.53*1
= 2.8156 in2

= 5*ti*ti*fr2
= 5*0.53*0.53*1
= 1.4045 in2

= 2*h*ti*fr2
= 2*0.3125*0.53*1
= 0.3313 in2

A41 = Leg2*fr2
= 0.3752*1
= 0.1406 in2

77/106
A43 = Leg2*fr2
= 0.28572*1
= 0.0816 in2

Area = A1 + A2 + A3 + A41 + A43


= 1.7791 + 1.5183 + 0.3313 + 0.1406 + 0.0816
= 3.8509 in2

As Area >= A the reinforcement is adequate.

UW-16(c) Weld Check

Fillet weld: tmin = lesser of 0.75 or tn or t = 0.5925 in


tc(min) = lesser of 0.25 or 0.7*tmin = 0.25 in
tc(actual) = 0.7*Leg = 0.7*0.375 = 0.2625 in

The fillet weld size is satisfactory.

Weld strength calculations are not required for this detail which conforms to Fig. UW-16.1, sketch (c-e).

UG-45 Nozzle Neck Thickness Check

Wall thickness per UG-45(a): tr1 = 0.1425 in (E =1)


Wall thickness per UG-45(b)(1): tr2 = 1.1125 in
Wall thickness per UG-16(b): tr3 = 0.125 in
Standard wall pipe per UG-45(b)(4): tr4 = 0.2515 in
The greater of tr2 or tr3: tr5 = 1.1125 in
The lesser of tr4 or tr5: tr6 = 0.2515 in

78/106
Required per UG-45 is the larger of tr1 or tr6 = 0.2515 in

Available nozzle wall thickness new, tn = 0.655 in

The nozzle neck thickness is adequate.

Reinforcement check in the plane parallel to the longitudinal axis

Reinforcement Calculations for Internal Pressure

UG-45 Nozzle
UG-37 Area Calculation Summary Wall
(in2) Thickness
For P = 1440.36 psi @ 120 °F Summary (in)
The nozzle passes
UG-45

A A A
A1 A2 A3 A5 treq tmin
required available welds

This nozzle is exempt from area


0.2515 0.655
calculations per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

Weld Failure Path Analysis Summary


The nozzle is exempt from weld strength
calculations per UW-15(b)(2)

UW-16 Weld Sizing Summary


Required weld Actual weld
Weld description Status
throat size (in) throat size (in)

Nozzle to shell fillet (Leg 41) 0.25 0.2625 weld size is adequate

Limits of reinforcement per UG-40

Parallel to the vessel wall: (Rn + tn + t )= 2.7175 in


Normal to the vessel wall outside: 2.5*(tn - Cn) + te = 1.4813 in
Normal to the vessel wall inside: 2.5*(tn - Cn - C) = 1.325 in

Nozzle required thickness per UG-27(c)(1)

trn = P*Rn/(Sn*E - 0.6*P)


= 1,440.357*1.0625/(20,000*1 - 0.6*1,440.357)
= 0.08 in

Required thickness tr from UG-37(a)

tr = P*Ro/(S*E + 0.4*P)
= 1,440.357*15/(20,000*1 + 0.4*1,440.357)
= 1.05 in

This opening does not require reinforcement per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

79/106
UG-45 Nozzle Neck Thickness Check

Wall thickness per UG-45(a): tr1 = 0.1425 in (E =1)


Wall thickness per UG-45(b)(1): tr2 = 1.1125 in
Wall thickness per UG-16(b): tr3 = 0.125 in
Standard wall pipe per UG-45(b)(4): tr4 = 0.2515 in
The greater of tr2 or tr3: tr5 = 1.1125 in
The lesser of tr4 or tr5: tr6 = 0.2515 in

Required per UG-45 is the larger of tr1 or tr6 = 0.2515 in

Available nozzle wall thickness new, tn = 0.655 in

The nozzle neck thickness is adequate.

80/106
N7A 2" 600# RF LWN LSL/LSL BRIDLE (N7A)

ASME Section VIII Division 1, 2004 Edition, A05 Addenda

tw(lower) = 1.125 in
Leg41 = 0.375 in
Leg43 = 0.375 in
hnew = 0.375 in

Note: round inside edges per UG-76(c)

Located on: 30" OD X 10'-0" LG SHELL


Liquid static head included: 0 psi
Nozzle material specification: SA-105 (II-D p. 14, ln. 6)
Nozzle longitudinal joint efficiency: 1
Flange description: 2 inch Class 600 LWN A105
Bolt Material: SA-193 B7 Bolt <= 2 1/2 (II-D p. 382, ln. 33)
Flange rated MDMT: -22.7°F
(UCS-66(b)(1)(b))
Liquid static head on flange: 0 psi
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAWP: 1454 psi @ 120°F
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAP: 1480 psi @ 70°F
ASME B16.5 flange hydro test: 2225 psi @ 70°F
Nozzle orientation: 0°
Local vessel minimum thickness: 1.125 in
Nozzle center line offset to datum line: 33 in
End of nozzle to shell center: 21 in
Nozzle inside diameter, new: 2 in
Nozzle nominal wall thickness: 0.655 in
Nozzle corrosion allowance: 0.0625 in
Projection available outside vessel, Lpr: 4.75 in
Projection available outside vessel to flange face, Lf: 6 in

81/106
Reinforcement Calculations for Internal Pressure

UG-45 Nozzle
UG-37 Area Calculation Summary Wall
(in2) Thickness
For P = 1440 psi @ 120 °F Summary (in)
The nozzle passes
UG-45

A A A
A1 A2 A3 A5 treq tmin
required available welds

This nozzle is exempt from area


0.2515 0.655
calculations per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

Weld Failure Path Analysis Summary


The nozzle is exempt from weld strength
calculations per UW-15(b)(2)

UW-16 Weld Sizing Summary


Required weld Actual weld
Weld description Status
throat size (in) throat size (in)

Nozzle to shell fillet (Leg 41) 0.25 0.2625 weld size is adequate

Calculations for internal pressure 1440 psi @ 120 °F

Nozzle is impact test exempt to -155 °F per UCS-66(b)(3) (coincident ratio = 0.13494).

Nozzle UCS-66 governing thk: 0.655 in


Nozzle rated MDMT: -155 °F

Limits of reinforcement per UG-40

Parallel to the vessel wall: (Rn + tn + t )= 2.7175 in


Normal to the vessel wall outside: 2.5*(tn - Cn) + te = 1.4813 in
Normal to the vessel wall inside: 2.5*(tn - Cn - C) = 1.325 in

Nozzle required thickness per UG-27(c)(1)

trn = P*Rn/(Sn*E - 0.6*P)


= 1,440*1.0625/(20,000*1 - 0.6*1,440)
= 0.08 in

Required thickness tr from UG-37(a)

tr = P*Ro/(S*E + 0.4*P)
= 1,440*15/(20,000*1 + 0.4*1,440)
= 1.0498 in

82/106
This opening does not require reinforcement per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

UW-16(c) Weld Check

Fillet weld: tmin = lesser of 0.75 or tn or t = 0.5925 in


tc(min) = lesser of 0.25 or 0.7*tmin = 0.25 in
tc(actual) = 0.7*Leg = 0.7*0.375 = 0.2625 in

The fillet weld size is satisfactory.

Weld strength calculations are not required for this detail which conforms to Fig. UW-16.1, sketch (c-e).

UG-45 Nozzle Neck Thickness Check

Wall thickness per UG-45(a): tr1 = 0.1425 in (E =1)


Wall thickness per UG-45(b)(1): tr2 = 1.1123 in
Wall thickness per UG-16(b): tr3 = 0.125 in
Standard wall pipe per UG-45(b)(4): tr4 = 0.2515 in
The greater of tr2 or tr3: tr5 = 1.1123 in
The lesser of tr4 or tr5: tr6 = 0.2515 in

Required per UG-45 is the larger of tr1 or tr6 = 0.2515 in

Available nozzle wall thickness new, tn = 0.655 in

The nozzle neck thickness is adequate.

83/106
N7B 2" 600# RF LWN LSL/LSL BRIDLE (N7B)

ASME Section VIII Division 1, 2004 Edition, A05 Addenda

tw(lower) = 1.125 in
Leg41 = 0.375 in
Leg43 = 0.375 in
hnew = 0.375 in

Note: round inside edges per UG-76(c)

Located on: 30" OD X 10'-0" LG SHELL


Liquid static head included: 0.4873 psi
Nozzle material specification: SA-105 (II-D p. 14, ln. 6)
Nozzle longitudinal joint efficiency: 1
Flange description: 2 inch Class 600 LWN A105
Bolt Material: SA-193 B7 Bolt <= 2 1/2 (II-D p. 382, ln. 33)
Flange rated MDMT: -22.7°F
(UCS-66(b)(1)(b))
Liquid static head on flange: 0.6822 psi
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAWP: 1454 psi @ 120°F
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAP: 1480 psi @ 70°F
ASME B16.5 flange hydro test: 2225 psi @ 70°F
Nozzle orientation: 180°
Local vessel minimum thickness: 1.125 in
Nozzle center line offset to datum line: 32 in
End of nozzle to shell center: 21 in
Nozzle inside diameter, new: 2 in
Nozzle nominal wall thickness: 0.655 in
Nozzle corrosion allowance: 0.0625 in
Projection available outside vessel, Lpr: 4.75 in
Projection available outside vessel to flange face, Lf: 6 in

84/106
Reinforcement Calculations for Internal Pressure

UG-45 Nozzle
UG-37 Area Calculation Summary Wall
(in2) Thickness
For P = 1440.49 psi @ 120 °F Summary (in)
The nozzle passes
UG-45

A A A
A1 A2 A3 A5 treq tmin
required available welds

This nozzle is exempt from area


0.2515 0.655
calculations per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

Weld Failure Path Analysis Summary


The nozzle is exempt from weld strength
calculations per UW-15(b)(2)

UW-16 Weld Sizing Summary


Required weld Actual weld
Weld description Status
throat size (in) throat size (in)

Nozzle to shell fillet (Leg 41) 0.25 0.2625 weld size is adequate

Calculations for internal pressure 1440.49 psi @ 120 °F

Nozzle is impact test exempt to -155 °F per UCS-66(b)(3) (coincident ratio = 0.13499).

Nozzle UCS-66 governing thk: 0.655 in


Nozzle rated MDMT: -155 °F

Limits of reinforcement per UG-40

Parallel to the vessel wall: (Rn + tn + t )= 2.7175 in


Normal to the vessel wall outside: 2.5*(tn - Cn) + te = 1.4813 in
Normal to the vessel wall inside: 2.5*(tn - Cn - C) = 1.325 in

Nozzle required thickness per UG-27(c)(1)

trn = P*Rn/(Sn*E - 0.6*P)


= 1,440.487*1.0625/(20,000*1 - 0.6*1,440.487)
= 0.08 in

Required thickness tr from UG-37(a)

tr = P*Ro/(S*E + 0.4*P)
= 1,440.487*15/(20,000*1 + 0.4*1,440.487)
= 1.0501 in

85/106
This opening does not require reinforcement per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

UW-16(c) Weld Check

Fillet weld: tmin = lesser of 0.75 or tn or t = 0.5925 in


tc(min) = lesser of 0.25 or 0.7*tmin = 0.25 in
tc(actual) = 0.7*Leg = 0.7*0.375 = 0.2625 in

The fillet weld size is satisfactory.

Weld strength calculations are not required for this detail which conforms to Fig. UW-16.1, sketch (c-e).

UG-45 Nozzle Neck Thickness Check

Wall thickness per UG-45(a): tr1 = 0.1425 in (E =1)


Wall thickness per UG-45(b)(1): tr2 = 1.1126 in
Wall thickness per UG-16(b): tr3 = 0.125 in
Standard wall pipe per UG-45(b)(4): tr4 = 0.2515 in
The greater of tr2 or tr3: tr5 = 1.1126 in
The lesser of tr4 or tr5: tr6 = 0.2515 in

Required per UG-45 is the larger of tr1 or tr6 = 0.2515 in

Available nozzle wall thickness new, tn = 0.655 in

The nozzle neck thickness is adequate.

86/106
N8A 2" 600# RF LWN WATER LSL/LG (N8A)

ASME Section VIII Division 1, 2004 Edition, A05 Addenda

tw(lower) = 1.125 in
Leg41 = 0.375 in
Leg43 = 0.375 in
hnew = 0.375 in

Note: round inside edges per UG-76(c)

Located on: 30" OD 2:1 RIGHT HEAD


Liquid static head included: 0 psi
Nozzle material specification: SA-105 (II-D p. 14, ln. 6)
Nozzle longitudinal joint efficiency: 1
Flange description: 2 inch Class 600 LWN A105
Bolt Material: SA-193 B7 Bolt <= 2 1/2 (II-D p. 382, ln. 33)
Flange rated MDMT: -22.7°F
(UCS-66(b)(1)(b))
Liquid static head on flange: 0 psi
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAWP: 1454 psi @ 120°F
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAP: 1480 psi @ 70°F
ASME B16.5 flange hydro test: 2225 psi @ 70°F
Nozzle orientation: 0°
Calculated as hillside: yes
User input vessel thickness: 1.125 in
End of nozzle to datum line: -18 in
Nozzle inside diameter, new: 2 in
Nozzle nominal wall thickness: 0.655 in
Nozzle corrosion allowance: 0.0625 in
Opening chord length: 2.1846 in
Projection available outside vessel, Lpr: 4.0332 in
Projection available outside vessel to flange face, Lf: 5.2832 in
Distance to head center, R: 6 in

87/106
Reinforcement Calculations for Internal Pressure

UG-45 Nozzle
UG-37 Area Calculation Summary Wall
(in2) Thickness
For P = 1440 psi @ 120 °F Summary (in)
The nozzle passes
UG-45

A A A
A1 A2 A3 A5 treq tmin
required available welds

This nozzle is exempt from area


0.2515 0.655
calculations per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

Weld Failure Path Analysis Summary


The nozzle is exempt from weld strength
calculations per UW-15(b)(2)

UW-16 Weld Sizing Summary


Required weld Actual weld
Weld description Status
throat size (in) throat size (in)

Nozzle to shell fillet (Leg 41) 0.25 0.2625 weld size is adequate

Calculations for internal pressure 1440 psi @ 120 °F

Nozzle is impact test exempt to -155 °F per UCS-66(b)(3) (coincident ratio = 0.13494).

Nozzle UCS-66 governing thk: 0.655 in


Nozzle rated MDMT: -155 °F

Limits of reinforcement per UG-40

Parallel to the vessel wall: (Rn + tn + t )= 2.7473 in


Normal to the vessel wall outside: 2.5*(tn - Cn) + te = 1.4813 in
Normal to the vessel wall inside: 2.5*(tn - Cn - C) = 1.325 in

Nozzle required thickness per UG-27(c)(1)

trn = P*Rn/(Sn*E - 0.6*P)


= 1,440*1.0625/(20,000*1 - 0.6*1,440)
= 0.08 in

Required thickness tr from UG-37(a)(c)

tr = P*K1*Do/(2*S*E + 0.8*P)
= 1,440*0.9*30/(2*20,000*1 + 0.8*1,440)
= 0.9448 in

88/106
This opening does not require reinforcement per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

UW-16(c) Weld Check

Fillet weld: tmin = lesser of 0.75 or tn or t = 0.5925 in


tc(min) = lesser of 0.25 or 0.7*tmin = 0.25 in
tc(actual) = 0.7*Leg = 0.7*0.375 = 0.2625 in

The fillet weld size is satisfactory.

Weld strength calculations are not required for this detail which conforms to Fig. UW-16.1, sketch (c-e).

UG-45 Nozzle Neck Thickness Check

Interpretation VIII-1-83-66 has been applied.

Wall thickness per UG-45(a): tr1 = 0.1425 in (E =1)


Wall thickness per UG-45(b)(1): tr2 = 1.0712 in
Wall thickness per UG-16(b): tr3 = 0.125 in
Standard wall pipe per UG-45(b)(4): tr4 = 0.2515 in
The greater of tr2 or tr3: tr5 = 1.0712 in
The lesser of tr4 or tr5: tr6 = 0.2515 in

Required per UG-45 is the larger of tr1 or tr6 = 0.2515 in

Available nozzle wall thickness new, tn = 0.655 in

The nozzle neck thickness is adequate.

89/106
N8B 2" 600# RF LWN WATER LSL/LG (N8B)

ASME Section VIII Division 1, 2004 Edition, A05 Addenda

tw(lower) = 1.125 in
Leg41 = 0.375 in
Leg43 = 0.375 in
hnew = 0.375 in

Note: round inside edges per UG-76(c)

Located on: 30" OD 2:1 RIGHT HEAD


Liquid static head included: 0.3249 psi
Nozzle material specification: SA-105 (II-D p. 14, ln. 6)
Nozzle longitudinal joint efficiency: 1
Flange description: 2 inch Class 600 LWN A105
Bolt Material: SA-193 B7 Bolt <= 2 1/2 (II-D p. 382, ln. 33)
Flange rated MDMT: -22.7°F
(UCS-66(b)(1)(b))
Liquid static head on flange: 0.3249 psi
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAWP: 1454 psi @ 120°F
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAP: 1480 psi @ 70°F
ASME B16.5 flange hydro test: 2225 psi @ 70°F
Nozzle orientation: 180°
Calculated as hillside: yes
User input vessel thickness: 1.125 in
End of nozzle to datum line: -18 in
Nozzle inside diameter, new: 2 in
Nozzle nominal wall thickness: 0.655 in
Nozzle corrosion allowance: 0.0625 in
Opening chord length: 2.3706 in
Projection available outside vessel, Lpr: 5.0504 in
Projection available outside vessel to flange face, Lf: 6.3004 in
Distance to head center, R: 10 in

90/106
Reinforcement Calculations for Internal Pressure

UG-45 Nozzle
UG-37 Area Calculation Summary Wall
(in2) Thickness
For P = 1440.33 psi @ 120 °F Summary (in)
The nozzle passes
UG-45

A A A
A1 A2 A3 A5 treq tmin
required available welds

This nozzle is exempt from area


0.2515 0.655
calculations per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

Weld Failure Path Analysis Summary


The nozzle is exempt from weld strength
calculations per UW-15(b)(2)

UW-16 Weld Sizing Summary


Required weld Actual weld
Weld description Status
throat size (in) throat size (in)

Nozzle to shell fillet (Leg 41) 0.25 0.2625 weld size is adequate

Calculations for internal pressure 1440.33 psi @ 120 °F

Nozzle is impact test exempt to -155 °F per UCS-66(b)(3) (coincident ratio = 0.13498).

Nozzle UCS-66 governing thk: 0.655 in


Nozzle rated MDMT: -155 °F

Limits of reinforcement per UG-40

Parallel to the vessel wall: (Rn + tn + t )= 2.8403 in


Normal to the vessel wall outside: 2.5*(tn - Cn) + te = 1.4813 in
Normal to the vessel wall inside: 2.5*(tn - Cn - C) = 1.325 in

Nozzle required thickness per UG-27(c)(1)

trn = P*Rn/(Sn*E - 0.6*P)


= 1,440.325*1.0625/(20,000*1 - 0.6*1,440.325)
= 0.08 in

Required thickness tr from UG-37(a)

tr = P*Do*K / (2*S*E + 2*P*(K - 0.1))


= 1,440.33*30*0.994061 / (2*20,000*1 + 2*1,440.33*(0.994061 - 0.1))
= 1.0089"

This opening does not require reinforcement per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

91/106
UW-16(c) Weld Check

Fillet weld: tmin = lesser of 0.75 or tn or t = 0.5925 in


tc(min) = lesser of 0.25 or 0.7*tmin = 0.25 in
tc(actual) = 0.7*Leg = 0.7*0.375 = 0.2625 in

The fillet weld size is satisfactory.

Weld strength calculations are not required for this detail which conforms to Fig. UW-16.1, sketch (c-e).

UG-45 Nozzle Neck Thickness Check

Interpretation VIII-1-83-66 has been applied.

Wall thickness per UG-45(a): tr1 = 0.1425 in (E =1)


Wall thickness per UG-45(b)(1): tr2 = 1.0714 in
Wall thickness per UG-16(b): tr3 = 0.125 in
Standard wall pipe per UG-45(b)(4): tr4 = 0.2515 in
The greater of tr2 or tr3: tr5 = 1.0714 in
The lesser of tr4 or tr5: tr6 = 0.2515 in

Required per UG-45 is the larger of tr1 or tr6 = 0.2515 in

Available nozzle wall thickness new, tn = 0.655 in

The nozzle neck thickness is adequate.

92/106
N9A 2" 600# RF LWN RELIEF VALVE (N9A)

ASME Section VIII Division 1, 2004 Edition, A05 Addenda

tw(lower) = 1.125 in
Leg41 = 0.375 in
Leg43 = 0.375 in
hnew = 0.375 in

Note: round inside edges per UG-76(c)

Located on: 30" OD X 10'-0" LG SHELL


Liquid static head included: 0 psi
Nozzle material specification: SA-105 (II-D p. 14, ln. 6)
Nozzle longitudinal joint efficiency: 1
Flange description: 2 inch Class 600 LWN A105
Bolt Material: SA-193 B7 Bolt <= 2 1/2 (II-D p. 382, ln. 33)
Flange rated MDMT: -22.7°F
(UCS-66(b)(1)(b))
Liquid static head on flange: 0 psi
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAWP: 1454 psi @ 120°F
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAP: 1480 psi @ 70°F
ASME B16.5 flange hydro test: 2225 psi @ 70°F
Nozzle orientation: 0°
Local vessel minimum thickness: 1.125 in
Nozzle center line offset to datum line: 43 in
End of nozzle to shell center: 21 in
Nozzle inside diameter, new: 2 in
Nozzle nominal wall thickness: 0.655 in
Nozzle corrosion allowance: 0.0625 in
Projection available outside vessel, Lpr: 4.75 in
Projection available outside vessel to flange face, Lf: 6 in

93/106
Reinforcement Calculations for Internal Pressure

UG-45 Nozzle
UG-37 Area Calculation Summary Wall
(in2) Thickness
For P = 1440 psi @ 120 °F Summary (in)
The nozzle passes
UG-45

A A A
A1 A2 A3 A5 treq tmin
required available welds

This nozzle is exempt from area


0.2515 0.655
calculations per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

Weld Failure Path Analysis Summary


The nozzle is exempt from weld strength
calculations per UW-15(b)(2)

UW-16 Weld Sizing Summary


Required weld Actual weld
Weld description Status
throat size (in) throat size (in)

Nozzle to shell fillet (Leg 41) 0.25 0.2625 weld size is adequate

Calculations for internal pressure 1440 psi @ 120 °F

Nozzle is impact test exempt to -155 °F per UCS-66(b)(3) (coincident ratio = 0.13494).

Nozzle UCS-66 governing thk: 0.655 in


Nozzle rated MDMT: -155 °F

Limits of reinforcement per UG-40

Parallel to the vessel wall: (Rn + tn + t )= 2.7175 in


Normal to the vessel wall outside: 2.5*(tn - Cn) + te = 1.4813 in
Normal to the vessel wall inside: 2.5*(tn - Cn - C) = 1.325 in

Nozzle required thickness per UG-27(c)(1)

trn = P*Rn/(Sn*E - 0.6*P)


= 1,440*1.0625/(20,000*1 - 0.6*1,440)
= 0.08 in

Required thickness tr from UG-37(a)

tr = P*Ro/(S*E + 0.4*P)
= 1,440*15/(20,000*1 + 0.4*1,440)
= 1.0498 in

94/106
This opening does not require reinforcement per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

UW-16(c) Weld Check

Fillet weld: tmin = lesser of 0.75 or tn or t = 0.5925 in


tc(min) = lesser of 0.25 or 0.7*tmin = 0.25 in
tc(actual) = 0.7*Leg = 0.7*0.375 = 0.2625 in

The fillet weld size is satisfactory.

Weld strength calculations are not required for this detail which conforms to Fig. UW-16.1, sketch (c-e).

UG-45 Nozzle Neck Thickness Check

Wall thickness per UG-45(a): tr1 = 0.1425 in (E =1)


Wall thickness per UG-45(b)(1): tr2 = 1.1123 in
Wall thickness per UG-16(b): tr3 = 0.125 in
Standard wall pipe per UG-45(b)(4): tr4 = 0.2515 in
The greater of tr2 or tr3: tr5 = 1.1123 in
The lesser of tr4 or tr5: tr6 = 0.2515 in

Required per UG-45 is the larger of tr1 or tr6 = 0.2515 in

Available nozzle wall thickness new, tn = 0.655 in

The nozzle neck thickness is adequate.

95/106
N9B 2" 600# RF LWN RELIEF VALVE (N9B)

ASME Section VIII Division 1, 2004 Edition, A05 Addenda

tw(lower) = 1.125 in
Leg41 = 0.375 in
Leg43 = 0.375 in
hnew = 0.375 in

Note: round inside edges per UG-76(c)

Located on: 30" OD X 10'-0" LG SHELL


Liquid static head included: 0 psi
Nozzle material specification: SA-105 (II-D p. 14, ln. 6)
Nozzle longitudinal joint efficiency: 1
Flange description: 2 inch Class 600 LWN A105
Bolt Material: SA-193 B7 Bolt <= 2 1/2 (II-D p. 382, ln. 33)
Flange rated MDMT: -22.7°F
(UCS-66(b)(1)(b))
Liquid static head on flange: 0 psi
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAWP: 1454 psi @ 120°F
ASME B16.5 flange rating MAP: 1480 psi @ 70°F
ASME B16.5 flange hydro test: 2225 psi @ 70°F
Nozzle orientation: 0°
Local vessel minimum thickness: 1.125 in
Nozzle center line offset to datum line: 111 in
End of nozzle to shell center: 21 in
Nozzle inside diameter, new: 2 in
Nozzle nominal wall thickness: 0.655 in
Nozzle corrosion allowance: 0.0625 in
Projection available outside vessel, Lpr: 4.75 in
Projection available outside vessel to flange face, Lf: 6 in

96/106
Reinforcement Calculations for Internal Pressure

UG-45 Nozzle
UG-37 Area Calculation Summary Wall
(in2) Thickness
For P = 1440 psi @ 120 °F Summary (in)
The nozzle passes
UG-45

A A A
A1 A2 A3 A5 treq tmin
required available welds

This nozzle is exempt from area


0.2515 0.655
calculations per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

Weld Failure Path Analysis Summary


The nozzle is exempt from weld strength
calculations per UW-15(b)(2)

UW-16 Weld Sizing Summary


Required weld Actual weld
Weld description Status
throat size (in) throat size (in)

Nozzle to shell fillet (Leg 41) 0.25 0.2625 weld size is adequate

Calculations for internal pressure 1440 psi @ 120 °F

Nozzle is impact test exempt to -155 °F per UCS-66(b)(3) (coincident ratio = 0.13494).

Nozzle UCS-66 governing thk: 0.655 in


Nozzle rated MDMT: -155 °F

Limits of reinforcement per UG-40

Parallel to the vessel wall: (Rn + tn + t )= 2.7175 in


Normal to the vessel wall outside: 2.5*(tn - Cn) + te = 1.4813 in
Normal to the vessel wall inside: 2.5*(tn - Cn - C) = 1.325 in

Nozzle required thickness per UG-27(c)(1)

trn = P*Rn/(Sn*E - 0.6*P)


= 1,440*1.0625/(20,000*1 - 0.6*1,440)
= 0.08 in

Required thickness tr from UG-37(a)

tr = P*Ro/(S*E + 0.4*P)
= 1,440*15/(20,000*1 + 0.4*1,440)
= 1.0498 in

97/106
This opening does not require reinforcement per UG-36(c)(3)(a)

UW-16(c) Weld Check

Fillet weld: tmin = lesser of 0.75 or tn or t = 0.5925 in


tc(min) = lesser of 0.25 or 0.7*tmin = 0.25 in
tc(actual) = 0.7*Leg = 0.7*0.375 = 0.2625 in

The fillet weld size is satisfactory.

Weld strength calculations are not required for this detail which conforms to Fig. UW-16.1, sketch (c-e).

UG-45 Nozzle Neck Thickness Check

Wall thickness per UG-45(a): tr1 = 0.1425 in (E =1)


Wall thickness per UG-45(b)(1): tr2 = 1.1123 in
Wall thickness per UG-16(b): tr3 = 0.125 in
Standard wall pipe per UG-45(b)(4): tr4 = 0.2515 in
The greater of tr2 or tr3: tr5 = 1.1123 in
The lesser of tr4 or tr5: tr6 = 0.2515 in

Required per UG-45 is the larger of tr1 or tr6 = 0.2515 in

Available nozzle wall thickness new, tn = 0.655 in

The nozzle neck thickness is adequate.

98/106
SADDLE

Saddle material: SA-516-70


Saddle construction is: Web at edge of rib
Saddle allowable stress: Ss = 20,000psi
Saddle yield stress: Sy = 38,000psi
Saddle distance to datum: 18.5 in
Tangent to tangent length: L = 124 in
Saddle separation: Ls = 77 in
Vessel radius: R = 15 in
Tangent distance left: Al = 23.5 in
Tangent distance right: Ar = 23.5 in
Saddle height: Hs = 39 in
Saddle contact angle: θ = 120 °
Web plate thickness: ts = 0.375 in
Base plate length: E = 26 in
Base plate width: F= 4 in
Base plate thickness: tb = 0.375 in
Number of stiffener ribs: n= 2
Largest stiffener rib spacing: di = 25.625in
Stiffener rib thickness: tw = 0.375 in
Saddle width: B= 4 in
Anchor bolt size & type: 0.75 inch coarse threaded
Anchor bolt material: SA-307
Anchor bolt allowable shear: 15,000psi
Anchor bolt corrosion allowance: 0 in
Anchor bolts per saddle: 2
Base coefficient of friction: µ = 0.45

Weight on left saddle: operating corr =4,053 lb, test new =4,988 lb
Weight on right saddle: operating corr =3,755 lb, test new =4,689 lb
Weight of saddle pair =212 lb

99/106
Notes:
(1) Saddle calculations are based on the method presented in "Stresses in Large Cylindrical Pressure Vessels on
Two Saddle Supports" by L.P. Zick.

Bending + pressure Bending + pressure at


between saddles the saddle
Vessel
Load
condition (psi) (psi)

S1 allow S1 allow S2 allow S2 allow


(+) (+) (-) (-) (+) (+) (-) (-)

Weight Operating 9,480 20,000 33 17,341 9,730 20,000 282 17,341

Weight Test 11,590 34,200 38 17,341 11,883 34,200 331 17,341

Stress
Tangential Circumferential over Splitting
Load
Vessel shear (psi) stress (psi) saddle (psi)
condition (psi)
S4 allow
S3 allow S5 allow S6 allow
(horns) (+/-)
Weight Operating 181 16,000 -378 30,000 439 18,540 440 13,333

Weight Test 210 27,360 -419 34,200 497 34,200 541 34,200

Load Case 1: Weight ,Operating

Longitudinal stress between saddles (Weight ,Operating, left saddle loading and geometry govern)

S1 = +- 3*K1*Q*(L/12) / (π*R2*t)
= 3*0.1813*4,053*(124/12) / (π*14.46882*1.0625)
= 33 psi

Sp = P*R/(2*t)
= 1,440.45*13.9375/(2*1.0625)
= 9,448 psi

Maximum tensile stress S1t = S1 + Sp = 9,480 psi


Maximum compressive stress (shut down) S1c = S1 = 33 psi

Tensile stress is acceptable (<=1*S*E = 20,000 psi)


Compressive stress is acceptable (<=1*Sc = 17,341 psi)

Longitudinal stress at the left saddle (Weight ,Operating)

Le = 2*(Left head depth)/3 + L + 2*(Right head depth)/3


= 2*8.0625/3 + 124 + 2*8.0625/3
= 134.75 in

w = Wt/Le = 7,808/134.75 = 57.94 lb/in

Bending moment at the left saddle:

100/106
Mq = w*(2*H*Al/3 + Al2/2 - (R2 - H2)/4)
= 57.94*(2*8.0625*23.5/3 + 23.52/2 - (152 - 8.06252)/4)
= 21,001.3 lb-in

S2 = +- Mq*K1'/ (π*R2*t)
= 21,001.3*9.3799/ (π*14.46882*1.0625)
= 282 psi

Sp = P*R/(2*t)
= 1,440.45*13.9375/(2*1.0625)
= 9,448 psi

Maximum tensile stress S2t = S2 + Sp = 9,730 psi


Maximum compressive stress (shut down) S2c = S2 = 282 psi

Tensile stress is acceptable (<=1*S = 20,000 psi)


Compressive stress is acceptable (<=1*Sc = 17,341 psi)

Tangential shear stress in the shell (left saddle, Weight ,Operating)

Qshear = Q - w*(a + 2*H/3)


= 4,053 - 57.94*(23.5 + 2*8.0625/3)
= 2,379.86 lbf

S3 = K2.2*Qshear/(R*t)
= 1.1707*2,379.86/(14.4688*1.0625)
= 181 psi

Tangential shear stress is acceptable (<= 0.8*S = 16,000 psi)

Circumferential stress at the left saddle horns (Weight ,Operating)

S4 = -Q/(4*t*(b+1.56*Sqr(Ro*t))) - 3*K3*Q/(2*t2)
= -4,053/(4*1.0625*(4+1.56*Sqr(15*1.0625))) - 3*0.0529*4,053/(2*1.06252)
= -378 psi

Circumferential stress at saddle horns is acceptable (<=1.5*Sa = 30,000 psi)

Ring compression in shell over left saddle (Weight ,Operating)

S5 = K5*Q/((t)*(ts + 1.56*Sqr(Ro*tc)))
= 0.7603*4,053/((1.0625)*(0.375 + 1.56*Sqr(15*1.0625)))
= 439 psi

Ring compression in shell is acceptable (<= 0.5*Sy = 18,540 psi)

Saddle splitting load (left, Weight ,Operating)

Area resisting splitting force = Web area + wear plate area

Ae = Heff*ts + tp*Wp
= 5*0.375 + 0*0
= 1.875 in2

S6 = K8*Q / Ae
= 0.2035*4,053 / 1.875
= 440 psi

101/106
Stress in saddle is acceptable (<= (2/3)*Ss = 13,333 psi)

Load Case 2: Weight ,Test

Longitudinal stress between saddles (Weight ,Test, left saddle loading and geometry govern)

S1 = +- 3*K1*Q*(L/12) / (π*R2*t)
= 3*0.1813*4,988*(124/12) / (π*14.43752*1.125)
= 38 psi

Sp = P*R/(2*t)
= 1,873.29*13.875/(2*1.125)
= 11,552 psi

Maximum tensile stress S1t = S1 + Sp = 11,590 psi


Maximum compressive stress (shut down) S1c = S1 = 38 psi

Tensile stress is acceptable (<= 0.9*Sy = 34,200 psi)


Compressive stress is acceptable (<=1*Sc = 17,341 psi)

Longitudinal stress at the left saddle (Weight ,Test)

Le = 2*(Left head depth)/3 + L + 2*(Right head depth)/3


= 2*8.0625/3 + 124 + 2*8.0625/3
= 134.75 in

w = Wt/Le = 9,677/134.75 = 71.81 lb/in

Bending moment at the left saddle:

Mq = w*(2*H*Al/3 + Al2/2 - (R2 - H2)/4)


= 71.81*(2*8.0625*23.5/3 + 23.52/2 - (152 - 8.06252)/4)
= 26,028.3 lb-in

S2 = +- Mq*K1'/ (π*R2*t)
= 26,028.3*9.3799/ (π*14.43752*1.125)
= 331 psi

Sp = P*R/(2*t)
= 1,873.29*13.875/(2*1.125)
= 11,552 psi

Maximum tensile stress S2t = S2 + Sp = 11,883 psi


Maximum compressive stress (shut down) S2c = S2 = 331 psi

Tensile stress is acceptable (<= 0.9*Sy = 34,200 psi)


Compressive stress is acceptable (<=1*Sc = 17,341 psi)

Tangential shear stress in the shell (left saddle, Weight ,Test)

Qshear = Q - w*(a + 2*H/3)


= 4,988 - 71.81*(23.5 + 2*8.0625/3)
= 2,914.36 lbf

S3 = K2.2*Qshear/(R*t)
= 1.1707*2,914.36/(14.4375*1.125)

102/106
= 210 psi

Tangential shear stress is acceptable (<= 0.8*(0.9*Sy) = 27,360 psi)

Circumferential stress at the left saddle horns (Weight ,Test)

S4 = -Q/(4*t*(b+1.56*Sqr(Ro*t))) - 3*K3*Q/(2*t2)
= -4,988/(4*1.125*(4+1.56*Sqr(15*1.125))) - 3*0.0529*4,988/(2*1.1252)
= -419 psi

Circumferential stress at saddle horns is acceptable (<= 0.9*Sy = 34,200 psi)

Ring compression in shell over left saddle (Weight ,Test)

S5 = K5*Q/((t)*(ts + 1.56*Sqr(Ro*tc)))
= 0.7603*4,988/((1.125)*(0.375 + 1.56*Sqr(15*1.125)))
= 497 psi

Ring compression in shell is acceptable (<= 0.9*Sy = 34,200 psi)

Saddle splitting load (left, Weight ,Test)

Area resisting splitting force = Web area + wear plate area

Ae = Heff*ts + tp*Wp
= 5*0.375 + 0*0
= 1.875 in2

S6 = K8*Q / Ae
= 0.2035*4,988 / 1.875
= 541 psi

Stress in saddle is acceptable (<= 0.9*Sy = 34,200 psi)

Shear stress in anchor bolting, one end slotted

Maximum seismic or wind base shear = 0 lbf

Thermal expansion base shear = W*µ = 4,159 * 0.45= 1,871.55 lbf

Corroded root area for a 0.75 inch coarse threaded bolt = 0.302 in2 ( 2 per saddle )

Bolt shear stress = 1,871.55/(0.302*2) = 3,099 psi

Anchor bolt stress is acceptable (<= 15,000 psi)

Web plate buckling check (Escoe pg 251)

Allowable compressive stress Sc is the lesser of 20,000 or 7,185 psi: (7,185)

Sc = Ki*π2*E/(12*(1 - 0.32)*(di/tw)2)
= 1.28*π2*29E+06/(12*(1 - 0.32)*(25.625/0.375)2)
= 7,185 psi

Allowable compressive load on the saddle

be = di*ts/(di*ts + 2*tw*(b - 1))

103/106
= 25.625*0.375/(25.625*0.375 + 2*0.375*(4 - 1))
= 0.8103

Fb = n*(As + 2*be*tw)*Sc
= 2*(1.3594 + 2*0.8103*0.375)*7,185
= 28,266.53 lbf

Saddle loading of 5,094 lbf is <= Fb; satisfactory.

Primary bending + axial stress in the saddle due to end loads (assumes one saddle slotted)
σb = V * (Hs - xo)* y / I + Q / A
= 0 * (39 - 12.4049)* 2.877 / 8.8 + 4,053 / 12.4615
= 325 psi

The primary bending + axial stress in the saddle <= 20,000 psi; satisfactory.

Secondary bending + axial stress in the saddle due to end loads (includes thermal expansion, assumes one
saddle slotted)
σb = V * (Hs - xo)* y / I + Q / A
= 1,871.55 * (39 - 12.4049)* 2.877 / 8.8 + 4,053 / 12.4615
= 16,595 psi

The secondary bending + axial stress in the saddle < 2*Sy= 76,000 psi; satisfactory.

Saddle base plate thickness check (Roark sixth edition, Table 26, case 7a)

where a = 25.625, b = 3.625 in

tb = (β1*q*b2/(1.5*Sa))0.5
= (3*49*3.6252/(1.5*20,000))0.5
= 0.2537 in

The base plate thickness of 0.375 in is adequate.

Foundation bearing check

Sf = Qmax / (F*E)
= 5,094 / (4*26)
= 49 psi

Concrete bearing stress < 750 psi ; satisfactory.

104/106
Liquid Level bounded by 30" OD 2:1 RIGHT HEAD

Location from Center Line 0.0000"

Operating Liquid Specific Gravity 0.9000


Test liquid specific gravity 1.0000

105/106
VANE MEX

Distance from bottom of bed to datum: 54.00"


Bed depth: 8.00"
Bed diameter: 27.25"
Bed density: 10.00 lb/ft3
Liquid holdup: 0.00% of dry weight

Estimated bed weight, Empty: 27.00 lb


Estimated bed weight, Operating 27.00 lb

Included in vessel lift weight: No


Present when vessel is empty: Yes
Present during hydrotest: Yes

106/106
S/N 06-524
S/N 06-525
S/O 511716
S/O 521197
Standard Welding Procedures with Supporting PQR's
Stainless Steel
Case Gauges

ITH
NOW W

PPerLfoUrmSan!ce

BULLETIN SS-1
2

Introduction
Ashcroft® Stainless Steel Case Pressure Gauges

For demanding applications where We offer our stainless steel case standard with a 3/2/3% ASME Grade B
corrosion resistance and reliable opera- pressure gauges in a selection of accu- accuracy.
tion are critical, look to Ashcroft® stain- racies, materials and sizes to meet the Dial size — Available in 21⁄2˝ through 6˝
less steel case pressure gauges to fulfill wide-ranging requirements of the indus- and 40mm through 100mm dial sizes,
your requirements. These designs per- trial marketplace. When selecting an Ashcroft selection of stainless steel
form well in many applications where Ashcroft stainless steel case gauge, gauge case sizes is unsurpassed.
vibration, pulsation and mechanical consider the following: Connections — 1⁄8 NPT, 1⁄4 NPT,
1
shock are present. Offered in stainless Process media — Ashcroft stainless ⁄2 NPT, JIS, BSP, and automotive
steel, including a stainless steel case, steel case gauges are available in a connections available.
bourdon tube, socket and movement, broad range of bourdon tube and sock- Mounting requirements — Ashcroft
these gauges meet the needs of many et materials to suit your product needs. stainless steel case gauges are avail-
corrosive environments. Pressure gauge range — A wide able for stem, surface or flush mounting.
Stainless steel gauges ensure long selection of ranges from vacuum
service life in the harshest, most through 15,000 psi (up to 30,000 psi on Dresser Instrument offers two series
demanding environments. Applications 41⁄2˝ and 6˝ 1009) including compound of Ashcroft gauges — Type 1008 and
where Ashcroft stainless steel case and metric ranges are available. 1009 to meet your stainless steel case
gauges are typically used for their last- Operating environment — All Ashcroft requirements.
ing performance include process and stainless steel case gauges have a 304
chemical plants, petrochemical refiner- series stainless steel case and ring and
ies, pharmaceutical, food and beverage are available hermetically sealed or
processing, and pulp and paper mills. weatherproof. They are also available
Ashcroft stainless steel case gauges liquid filled with a built-in throttle plug to
will perform well: help protect the gauge against pressure
surges or spikes.
• In applications where vibration, pulsa- Accuracy requirements — Ashcroft
tion and mechanical shock are major Type 1009 gauges come standard with
factors. 1% full scale ASME Grade 1A accuracy.
• In corrosive environments when a Ashcroft Type 1008 gauges come
stainless steel case and ring are
required.

CONTENTS
Page
2&3 Introduction
4&5 Features & Benefits
6&7 Other Stainless Steel Case Gauges
Warranty and Movement
8&9 Specification Matrix
10 & 11 Product Selection and
Media Application
12 & 13 1008 Range Tables
14 1009 Range Tables
15 Options
16 How to Order
17 1008 General Dimensions
18 & 19 1009 General Dimensions
3

Introduction
Ashcroft Stainless Steel Case Pressure Gauges
®
4
4

Features & Benefits


Ashcroft® Stainless Steel Case 1008 Pressure Gauges

Type 1008 Stainless Steel Case • Because weld nuts are standard on all Features of the 40mm and 50mm
Gauge — 63mm and 100mm back-connect gauges, you will enjoy 1008 gauges include:
Case Sizes the flexibility to panel mount any back- • Stainless steel case and ring for maxi-
These stainless steel case gauges connect gauge. mum resistance to corrosion.
offer reliable performance under the • The date of manufacture is coded on • 316 stainless steel bourdon tube and
most demanding applications where the socket of each gauge for quality socket for maximum resistance to
vibration and pulsation dominate the assurance.* corrosion.
operating conditions. They are offered • We ship all gauges in a unique car- • Available with front flange or U-clamp
in a selection of metric case sizes in ton-within-carton package, so your for panel mounting.
stem, surface or panel mounting to gauges arrive in good condition. • Available with PLUS!™ or liquid fill in
meet a variety of requirements. • These Ashcroft gauges are made in lower or back connections for better
63mm and 100mm Type 1008 pres- the USA — for the best availability and performance and longer gauge life in
sure gauge ranges, with the patented quality! Need it now? Ashcroft Gold pulsating and vibrating applications.
PowerFlex™ movement, are designed Service offers 2-5 day shipment. • Ranges from vacuum through
for maximum life under pulsating ser- 40mm and 50mm Case Sizes 15,000 psi, including compound.
vice conditions. The 40mm and 50mm sizes of our Type
The 63mm and 100mm sizes of our 1008 gauges share some of their own Type 1009 Stainless Steel Case
Type 1008 gauges share some unique unique features. These gauges bring all Gauge —21⁄2˝ and 31⁄2˝ Case Sizes
features that offer benefits not available stainless steel construction (case, ring, The Type 1009 Duralife® gauge in
elsewhere. bourdon tube and socket) to the 21⁄2˝ and 31⁄2˝ case sizes represents
• Because the socket of the 1008S is requirement for smaller dial diameters. another technological breakthrough in
welded to the case, the gauge is gauge manufacture. Duralife® 1009
stronger and more durable, with less gauges provide significant features and
risk of liquid-filled gauges leaking. And benefits for many applications and are
because there are no screws needed offered in stem, surface or panel mount
to hold the system in place, we elimi- configurations.
nate leak paths when the gauge is The combination of features in the
liquid filled. 1009 Ashcroft Duralife® gauge reflects
• The patented PowerFlex™ movement the finest in gauge technology for
offers superior shock, vibration and
pulsation performance.
• True Zero™ indication with no stop pin
– a unique safety benefit.

Type 1008 shown

*Excludes 1008A
5
5

Features & Benefits


Ashcroft Stainless Steel-Case 1009 Pressure Gauges
®

vibration, shock and pulsation applica- • The patented PowerFlex™ movement • Type 1009S Duralife® gauges are all-
tions. Pressure ranges from vacuum offers superior shock, vibration and stainless steel construction for maxi-
through 15,000 psi, including com- pulsation performance, resulting in mum resistance to corrosion.
pound, are available. Metric ranges are outstanding durability. • Because these gauges are fully
also offered. All 21⁄2˝ and 31⁄2˝ Duralife® • The True Zero™ indication with no recalibratable, there is no need to pur-
gauges are manufactured to ASME stop pin is a unique safety benefit. chase a new gauge if recalibration is
Grade 1A accuracy of 1% over the • With weld nuts standard on all back- needed — this benefit includes zero
entire dial arc. They offer zero and span connect gauges, you have the flexi- and span adjustments. (Consult
adjustments and can be recalibrated in bility to panel mount any back- ASME B40.1 for gauge life and
the field. connect gauge. recalibration.)
The 21⁄2˝ and 31⁄2˝ Type 1009 Duralife® • An optional external adjust or Easy • Five-Year Warranty gives you the best
gauges share some unique features that Zero™ feature on the 31⁄2˝ 1009 is total value.
offer benefits not available elsewhere. offered on both dry and liquid filled • Ashcroft Duralife® gauges are made
• Because the socket is welded to the versions. Adjustment tolerances are in the USA — for the best availability
case, the gauge is stronger and more ±5% of full scale range. and quality!
durable, with less risk of liquid-filled • Each gauge is date coded on the 41⁄2˝ & 6˝ Case Sizes
leaking since there are no screws socket for quality assurance. The 41⁄2˝ and 6˝ sizes of our Type
needed to hold the system in place. • We ship all gauges in a unique 1009 gauges share some of their own
Potential leak paths are eliminated. carton-within-carton package, so your unique features. Built for long life and
gauges arrive in good condition — far sustained accuracy under the most
fewer gauges are received out of cali- adverse operating conditions, these
bration with our “leading-edge” pack- gauges are available with many fea-
aging method. tures that offer benefits you won’t find
elsewhere:
• Stainless steel case and ring for
maximum resistance to corrosion.
• Adjustable micrometer pointer for field
recalibration.
• Rotary geared movement for field
linearity adjustment.
• Variety of bourdon tube materials to
meet many different application
requirements.
• Available liquid filled in lower or back
connections for better performance
and longer gauge life in pulsating and
vibrating applications.
• Pressure ranges from vacuum
through 30,000 psi.

Type 1009 shown


6

Other Stainless Steel Case Gauges


Ashcroft® Stainless Steel Case Pressure Gauges

PLUS!™ Performance Hydraulic Gauges Refrigeration Gauges Liquid-Filled Gauges


An exclusive, new, option- These gauges are espe- Available with 63mm and Constant lubrication of the
al feature provides virtually cially suitable for applications 100mm Type 1008 gauges movement minimizes wear
liquid-filled performance in a on hydraulic presses, pumps and 21⁄2" through 6" Type on all moving gauge parts.
dry gauge. and systems using high- 1009 gauges, these Ashcroft The liquid fill, usually glyc-
The Ashcroft PLUS!™ fea- pressure hydraulic fluids. gauges have corresponding erin or silicone, acts as a
ture is a patent-pending 41⁄2˝ and 6˝ Type 1009 temperature scales for refrig- dampening agent for the
design incorporated into the gauges for this application erants 11, 12, 22, 114, 123, bourdon tube and move-
industry-standard Ashcroft are offered with a throttle 134A, 500, 502 and ammo- ment, thus reducing gauge
pressure gauge. plug and slotted link to pro- nia. To meet the stringent pointer flutter. Under
Historically, pulsation and tect the movement and sys- requirements of an ammonia adverse environmental con-
vibration have reduced tem of the gauge from refrigeration system, a ditions, corrosive elements
gauge life and made gauges severe pressure spikes and gauge with a stainless steel may attack internal parts
difficult to read. surges. A liquid-filled gauge tube and socket is recom- and shorten gauge service
Customers have had no is also available to help pro- mended. Both 41⁄2˝ and 6˝ life. Liquid filling a gauge
alternative to liquid-filled tect internal moving parts of Type 1009 gauges can be helps prevent corrosive
gauges to solve vibration and the gauge. furnished with a stainless effects caused by adverse
pulsation problems, until now! The 63mm and 100mm steel tube and a steel or environments. All liquid-filled
Advantages Versus Type 1008 gauges and 21⁄2˝ stainless steel socket. gauges 30 psi and above
Liquid-Filled Gauges and 31⁄2˝ Type 1009 gauges Ashcroft stainless steel are fitted with throttle plugs
• Saves money employing the unique Power case refrigeration gauges to provide additional
- Lower purchase price Flex™ movement and a throt- come equipped with all the dampening.
versus liquid-filled gauges tle plug are ideally suited for features made available on Ashcroft stainless steel
- Eliminates costly specialty hydraulic applications where the standard product. case gauges with dial sizes
fills severe service is a considera- Receiver Gauges from 40mm through 100mm
- Allows easy standardiza- tion. Available in dry PLUS!™ Used in conjunction with and 21⁄2˝ through 6˝ are avail-
tion to reduce misapplica- or liquid-filled versions, these pneumatic transmitters, able liquid filled or field liquid
tions gauges will meet your severe Ashcroft® receiver gauges fillable. Simply specify XLJ to
• Reduces possibility of leaks application needs. indicate pressure, tempera- order a stainless steel-case
• Lighter weight…easier to ture, flow or any information gauge that can be filled in
handle that can be transmitted by the field. Gauge accuracy on
• Eliminates liquid-fill lines… proportional variations in air liquid filled Type 1009
easier to read pressure. gauges with 21⁄2˝, 31⁄2˝ or
• Easy recalibration For information concern- 100mm dial size is up to
• Wider ambient temperature ing other receiver gauges 1.5% full scale.
range than glycerin offered, consult Customer
• Eliminates disposal and Service, Stratford, CT.
environmental issues
Advantages Versus
Dry Gauges
• Steady pointer…same as
liquid-filled gauges
• 100% longer life gauges…
reduces gauge usage 50%!
7

Warranty &
Movement
Duralife® 21⁄2,̋ 31⁄2,̋ 100mm
Type 1009 gauges

Panel Gauges The patented pressure system con-


Ashcroft stainless steel case sists of a PowerFlex™ movement and
panel mounted gauges with unitized bourdon tube assembly that
back connections are avail- provides increased gauge life and sta-
able with a three hole front bility. This truly unique design has a
flange or a U-clamp. Gener- stainless steel movement suspended
ally, a front flange is used between the bourdon tube and socket
when there is limited access with a link wire. This spring suspension
to the back of the panel. significantly reduces the level of forces
A U-clamp is the most com- transmitted to the precision moving
mon method of panel parts, greatly extending the wear life in
mounting when there is applications where vibration and pulsa-
access to the back of the tion are constant factors. Since the
panel. Ashcroft back con- system is welded to the case, there are
nect stainless steel gauges no screws to loosen under conditions of
are available for panel pulsation and vibration.
mounting with dial sizes from
40mm through 100mm and
21⁄2˝ thru 6˝. The back con-
nect 21⁄2˝ and 31⁄2˝ Duralife
1009 gauges and the 63mm
and 100mm 1008 gauges
come standard with weld
nuts on the back of the case.
This feature allows for easy
conversion to panel mount-
ing with either a U-clamp or
front flange. The 21⁄2˝ and
31⁄2˝ 1009 lower connect
gauges are also available for
wall mounting with an avail-
able back flange.

Duralife C tube with Helical tube with


PowerFlex™ movement PowerFlex™ movement
furnished with ranges to furnished with ranges
600 psi. from 800 psi and above.

All 21⁄2˝, 31⁄2˝ and 100mm Type 1009


Duralife gauges come standard with a
limited five year warranty. For a copy of
our warranty call or write:

Dresser Instrument
Dresser, Inc.
250 East Main Street
Stratford, CT 06614-5145
203-378-8281

Ask for Customer Service


8

Specification Matrix
Ashcroft® Stainless Steel Case Pressure Gauges

Specifications Type 1008, 40mm Type 1008, 50mm Type 1008A, 63-100mm Type 1008S

Accuracy 3-2-3% ASME Grade B 3-2-3% ASME Grade B 3-2-3% ASME Grade B 3-2-3% AS

Case Style Open Front Open Front Open

Case Material 304 Stainless Steel 304 Stainless Steel 304 Stain

Dial Size (Code) 40mm (40) 50mm (50) 63mm (63), 100mm (10) 63mm (63),

Dial Material & Color Aluminum, white background w/black markings

Ring Type 304 Stainless Steel Push-In 304 Stainless Steel Crimped 304 Stainless

Bourdon Tube (Code) 316 Stainless Steel (S) Bronze (A) 316 Stainle

Socket Material 316 Stainless Steel Brass (socket O ring standard) 316 SS, Socke

Range Limits Vac/15,000 psi-(40mm) Vac/15,000 psi-(50mm) Vac/6000 psi Vac/15

Connection Size (Code) 1


⁄8 NPT (01) ⁄8 NPT (01) 1⁄4 NPT (02)
1 1
⁄4 NPT (02) ⁄4 NPT (02),
1

Connection Location Lower (L), Back (B) Lower (L), Back (B) Lower (L)

Mounting Stem, Flush Stem, Flush Stem,


Brass (PowerFlex™) 300 Series SS
Movement 300 Series SS (conventional) with polyester segment with polyest
Pointer Nonadjustable (Aluminum) Nonadjustable (Aluminum) Nonadjustable

Window Glass Polycarbonate Polycar

Warranty One Year One Year One


Options Code

PLUS!™ Performance (LL) N/A N/A Avai

Glycerin Fill (L) Standard Standard Stan

Silicone Fill (GV) N/A Available Avai

Halocarbon Fill (GX) N/A N/A Avai

Weatherproof, hermetic seal (LJ) Available Available Avai

U-Clamp (UC) Available Available Avai

Front Flange Ring (FF) Available Available Avai

Retrofit Flange (RF) N/A Available Avai

Back Flange (FW) N/A N/A N/

Wall Mounting Bracket (BF) N/A N/A N/

Acrylic Window (PD) N/A N/A N/

Polycarbonate Window (PD) Standard on liquid filled gauge Standard Stan

Shatterproof Glass (SG) Available N/A N/


9

, 63-100mm Type 1009, 21⁄2"-31⁄2" Type 1009, 100mm (XMG) Type 1009, 41⁄2" Type 1009, 6"

ME Grade B 1% ASME Grade A 1% ASME Grade A 1% ASME Grade A 1% ASME Grade A

Front Open Front Open Front Open Front Open Front

nless Steel 304 Stainless Steel 304 Stainless Steel 304 Stainless Steel 304 Stainless Steel

100mm (10) 21⁄2" (25), 31⁄2" (35) 100mm (10) 41⁄2" (45) 6" (60)
Aluminum, white background
Brushed Aluminum, w/black markings w/black markings Brushed Aluminum, w/black markings

Steel Crimped 304 Stainless Steel Bayonet 304 Stainless Steel Bayonet 304 Stainless Steel Bayonet 304 Stainless Steel Bayonet

ss Steel (S) 316 Stainless Steel 316 Stainless Steel (SW) Bronze Tube, Brass Socket (A) 4130 Alloy Steel Tube & Socket (B)

316 SS Tube, Steel Socket (R) 316 SS Tube & Socket (S)

Monel Tube & Socket (P)


Bronze, Socket Weld to Case (AW)
et Weld to Case 316 SS, Socket Weld to Case (SW) 316 SS, Socket Welded to Case

000 psi Vac/15,000 psi Vac/15,000 psi Vac/30,000 psi Vac/30,000 psi

⁄2 NPT (04)*
1
⁄4 NPT (02), 1⁄2 NPT (04)*
1 1
⁄2 NPT (04) ⁄4 NPT (02), 1⁄2 NPT (04)
1 1
⁄4 NPT (02), 1⁄2 NPT (04)

), Back (B) Lower (L), Back (B) Lower (L) Lower (L), Back (B) Lower (L), Back (B)

Flush Stem, Surface, Flush Stem, Surface Stem, Surface, Flush Stem, Surface, Flush
S (PowerFlex™)
ter segment 300 Series SS (PowerFlex ) ™ 300 Series SS (PowerFlex )
™ 400 Series SS (Conventional) 400 Series SS (Conventional)

e (Aluminum) Adjustable (Aluminum) Micrometer Adjustable (Aluminum) Micrometer Adjustable (Aluminum) Micrometer Adjustable (Aluminum)

rbonate Polycarbonate Shatterproof Glass Glass Glass

Year Five Years Five Years One Year One Year

lable Available Available Available Available

ndard Standard Standard Standard Standard

lable Available Available Available Available

lable Available Available Available Available

lable Available Available Available Available

lable Available Available Available Available

lable Available Available Available Available


1
lable Available (3 ⁄2˝) N/A Available N/A

/A Available Available N/A N/A

/A N/A N/A Available Available

/A N/A N/A Available Available

ndard Standard Available N/A N/A

/A Available Standard Available Available


1
* 3 ⁄ ˝ or 100mm lower only.
2
10

Product Selection Information


Ashcroft® Stainless Steel Case Pressure Gauges

Pressure Relief Case


Disk

Power Flex™ Movement


Ring

Bourdon Tube

Socket Dial Pointer

Gasket
(21⁄2˝ 1009SW Shown ) Window

Consult ASME B40.1 for guidance in (that are not liquid filled) can withstand weatherproof or liquid fillable. Specify
gauge selection continuous ambient temperatures as the XLJ variation. With the exception of
high as 250°F. Liquid-filled gauges can 40mm and 50mm 1008 gauges, all dry
WARNING: To prevent misapplication, withstand ambient temperatures up to stainless steel gauges come standard
pressure gauges should be selected 200°F. Accuracy will be affected by with a vented pressure relief disc.These
considering media and ambient operat- approximately 1.5% per 100°F. gauges with the vented plug are not
ing conditions. Improper application can Gauges with welded joints will with- weatherproof or hermetically sealed. If
be detrimental to the gauge, causing stand 750°F (450°F with silver brazed a weatherproof or hermetically sealed
failure and possible personal injury or joints) for short times without rupture, gauge is required, specify the XLJ vari-
property damage. The information con- although other parts of the gauge will ation and your gauge will be shipped
tained in this catalog is offered as a be destroyed and calibration will be lost. with a solid nonventing plug.
guide to assist in making the proper Proper selection of the bourdon sys- Rings:
selection of a pressure gauge. Addition- tem material is dependent on the The ring, which retains the window, is
al information is available from Dresser process fluid to which the system will be push-in, crimped or bayonet (cam)
Instrument Division or www.ashcroft.com. subjected. If the correct material is not depending on the type number.
Pressure Ranges: available, the use of a diaphragm seal Movements:
As recommended by ASME B40.1, may be necessary to protect the sys- Movements are designed and materials
select a gauge with a full scale pressure tem from the process fluid. Liquid filled of construction selected to reduce fric-
range of approximately twice the nor- gauges with throttle plugs are recom- tion and extend wear life.
mal operating pressure. The maximum mended for the discharge side of posi- Dials:
operating pressure should not exceed tive displacement pumps. Dials are uniformly graduated and have
approximately 75% of the full scale Pressure Elements: highly legible black markings. All 1009
range. Failure to select a gauge range Available in a wide variety of materials, gauges, with the exception of 1009 XMG,
within these criteria may ultimately re- including: phosphor bronze, alloy steel, have a brushed aluminum dial with
sult in fatigue failure of the bourdon tube. 316 stainless steel and K Monel. black markings. Type 1008 gauges
Operating Conditions: Cases: have a white dial with black markings.
The operating conditions to which a Ashcroft stainless steel case gauges Windows:
gauge will be subjected must be con- have 304 stainless steel cases. The Depending on the size and type,
sidered. If the gauge will be subjected 21⁄2˝, 31⁄2˝, 100mm 1009 and the 63mm Ashcroft stainless steel case gauges are
to severe vibration or pressure pulsa- and 100mm 1008 are field convertible. available with polycarbonate, acrylic,
tion, liquid filling the gauge will be nec- These gauges can be converted to her- shatterproof glass or glass windows.
essary to obtain normal product life. metically sealed, weatherproof or liquid Pointers:
Other than discoloration of the dial filled by changing the fill plug and Depending on the type, Ashcroft stain-
and hardening of the gasketing that adding a throttle plug. The 40mm and less steel gauges are available with
may occur as ambient temperatures 50mm 1008 gauges can be furnished adjustable or fixed pointers.
exceed 150°F, stainless steel gauges from the factory hermetically sealed,
11

Media Application Table


Ashcroft Stainless Steel Case Pressure Gauges
®

The media being measured must be assumes the media temperature is other conditions beyond our control.
compatible with the wetted parts of the below 200°F. PLUS! option, throttling Consult Stratford, CT Customer Service
pressure instrument. To use the chart devices and/or a liquid-filled instrument for specific applications and for any
below, locate the media whose pressure are recommended in applications with media not listed. More complete corro-
is to be measured and select a suitable pulsation or vibration. These recommen- sion guide available on our website at
material from those available. Diaphragm dations are only a guide, as service life is www.ashcroft.com in the Application
seal information is contained in Bulletin dependent on temperature, concentra- Data Section.
DS-1. This is a simplified chart and tions, catalysts that may be added, or

Pressure Instrument Pressure Instrument Pressure Instrument


Material Material Material
Media Media Media

Diaphragm seals*
Diaphragm seals*

Diaphragm seals*
Application Application Application

Brass or bronze
Brass or bronze

Brass or bronze
Stainless steel
Stainless steel

Stainless steel
Monel
Monel

Monel
Steel
Steel

Steel
Acetone • • • Crude Oil (Sour) • Oxalic Acid •
Acetic Acid <40% • Crude Oil (Sweet) • • Oxygen (Gas)❷ • •
Acetic Anhydride • Ethyl Acetate • Palmitic Acid >99% •
Acetylene (Dry) • • Ethylene Oxide >99% • • • Phosphoric Acid <80% •
Acrolein 100% • Ferric Chloride <40% • Picric Acid <10% •
Air • • • • Ferric Sulfate <10% • Propane (Dry) • • •
Alcohol, Ethyl • • • Ferrous Chloride <30% • Sea Water (Flowing) •
Alum. Chloride >10% • Ferrous Sulfate <50% • Silver Nitrate <70% •
Alum. Sulfate 10-50% • Fluorine Gas (Dry) • Sodium Bicarbonate <20% • •
Ammonia Gas (Dry) • • Formaldehyde <95% • Sodium Bisulfate <30% •
Ammonium Chloride <40% • Formic Acid • Sodium Carbonate <40% • •
Ammonium Nitrate <50% • Freons • • Sodium Chromate <60% • • • •
Ammonium Sulfate <60% • Furfural <10% • Sodium Cyanide • •
Aniline>99% • Gasoline • Sodium Hydroxide < 40% •
Argon • • • • Glycerin >99% • • • • Sodium Hypochlorite <25% •
Beer • Hydrobromic Acid • Sodium Phosphate, Tri <60% • • •
Benzidine >99% • Hydrochloric Acid • Sodium Silicate <50% • • •
Benzene <50% • • Hydrofluoric Acid • Sodium Sulfide <50% •
Benzoic Acid <70% • Hydrofluosilic Acid • Stannous Chloride <10% •
Boric Acid <25% • Hydrogen ❶ • • Steam (Use siphon) • • • •
Bromine (Dry) • Hydrogen Peroxide <50% • Stearic Acid •
Butane • • • • Kerosene • • • • Sulfur Dioxide (Dry) >99% •
Butyric Acid <10% • Lactic Acid <70% • Sulfur Trioxide (Dry) >99% •
Calcium Chloride <80% • Magnesium Chloride <40% • Sulfuric Acid •
Calcium Hydroxide <50% • Mercuric Chloride <60% • Tannic Acid <80% • • •
Carbon Dioxide • • • • Mercury >99% • Tartaric Acid <50% • •
Carbon Monoxide >99% • • • • Milk • Tin Chloride (ous) <10% •
Chlorine (Dry) • Naphtha >99% • • • • Toluene >99% • • • •
Chlorine (Moist) • Naphthalene >99% • • Turpentine >98% • • • •
Chloroform (Dry) • • Nickel Chloride >99% • Water (Tap) • • •
Chromic Acid • Nitric Acid <95% • Whiskey •
Citric Acid 10-50% • Nitrogen • • • • Zinc Chloride <25% •
Corn Oil • Oleic Acid • Zinc Sulphate <40% •

❶ Over 1000 psi – entire system must be 316 stainless steel. Any standard Bourdon tube material may be used in conjunction with a diaphragm
Applicable only to hydrogen.
*
seal, but the gauge selection should take into consideration the corrosive environment
❷ Monel and 316 stainless steel are acceptable for oxygen service, provided the in which it is to operate. For diaphragm seals see Bulletin DS-1.
instrument has been cleaned for oxygen service and is free from oil.
12

Range Tables
Ashcroft® 1008 Stainless Steel Case, Dual and Single Scale
40mm, and 50mm Pressure Gauges

Standard Single Scale Ranges Metric & psi Dual Scale Ranges*
Pressure – Single Scale psi Pressure – Dual Scale
Range Figure interval Minor graduation Range Figure interval Minor graduation
0/15 3 0.5 (outer scale is psi) kg/cm2 psi kg/cm2 psi
0/30 5 0.5 0/1 kg/cm2-15 psi 0.2 3 0.02 0.5
0/60 10 1
0/2 kg/cm2-30 psi 0.5 5 0.05 0.5
0/100 20 2
0/160 20 2 0/4 kg/cm2-60 psi 1 10 0.1 1
0/200 40 5 0/7 kg/cm2-100 psi 1 20 0.2 2
0/300 50 5 0/11 kg/cm2-160 psi 2 20 0.2 2
0/400 50 5 0/14 kg/cm2-200 psi 2 40 0.5 5
0/600 100 10 0/21 kg/cm2-300 psi 5 50 0.5 5
0/800 200 20
0/1000 200 20 0/28 kg/cm2-400 psi 5 50 0.5 5
0/1500 300 50 0/42 kg/cm2-600 psi 10 100 1 10
0/2000 400 50 0/50 kg/cm2-800 psi 10 200 1 20
0/3000 500 50 0/70 kg/cm2-1000 psi 10 200 2 20
0/5000 1000 100 0/105 kg/cm2-1500 psi 20 300 2 50
0/6000 1000 100
0/7500 1000 100 0/140 kg/cm2-2000 psi 20 400 2 50
0/10,000 2000 200 0/210 kg/cm2-3000 psi 50 500 5 50
0/15,000 3000 500 0/350 kg/cm2-5000 psi 50 1000 10 100
Compound – Single Scale 0/420 kg/cm2-6000 psi 100 1000 10 100
Figure interval Minor graduation 0/500 kg/cm2-7500 psi 100 1000 10 100
Range 0/700 kg/cm2-10,000 psi 100 2000 20 200
in. Hg psi in. Hg psi
0/1050 kg/cm2-15,000 psi 200 3000 20 500
30˝ Hg/15 psi 5 3 1 0.5
30˝ Hg/30 psi 10 5 1 0.5 Figure interval Minor graduation
Range
30˝ Hg/60 psi 10 10 2 1 bar psi bar psi
30˝ Hg/100 psi 30 20 5 2
0/1 bar-15 psi 0.2 3 0.02 0.5
30˝ Hg/150 psi 30 30 15 5
30˝ Hg/300 psi 30 50 30 5 0/2 bar-30 psi 0.5 5 0.05 0.5
0/4 bar-60 psi 1 10 0.1 1
Vacuum – Single Scale
0/7 bar-100 psi 1 20 0.2 2
Range Figure interval Minor graduation
0/10 bar-160 psi 2 20 0.2 2
30/0 in Hg 5 in. 0.5 in. 0/14 bar-200 psi 2 40 0.5 5
Metric Single Scale Ranges 0/20 bar-300 psi 5 50 0.5 5
0/27 bar-400 psi 5 50 0.5 5
Pressure – Single Scale kg/cm2, bar, kPa
0/40 bar-600 psi 10 100 1 10
Range Figure Minor Range Figure Minor 0/55 bar-800 psi 10 200 1 20
kg/cm2 bar interval grads. kPa interval grads. 0/70 bar-1000 psi 10 200 2 20
0-1 0-1 0.2 0.02 0-100 20 2 0/100 bar-1500 psi 20 300 2 50
0-2 0-2 0.2 0.02 0-160 20 2 0/140 bar-2000 psi 20 400 2 50
0-2.5 0-2.5 0.5 0.05 0-250 50 5 0/200 bar-3000 psi 50 500 5 50
0-4 0-4 0.5 0.05 0-400 50 5
0-6 0-6 1 0.1 0-600 100 10 0/340 bar-5000 psi 50 1000 10 100
0-10 0-10 2 0.2 0-1000 200 20 0/400 bar-6000 psi 100 1000 10 100
0-16 0-16 2 0.2 0-1600 200 20 0/500 bar-7500 psi 100 1000 10 100
0-25 0-25 5 0.5 0-2500 500 50 0/700 bar-10,000 psi 100 2000 20 200
0-40 0-40 5 0.5 0-4000 500 50 0/1000 bar-15,000 psi 200 3000 20 500
0-60 0-60 10 1 0-6000 1000 100
0-100 0-100 20 2 0-10,000 2000 200 Figure interval Minor graduation
Range
0-160 0-160 20 2 0-16,000 2000 200 kPa psi kPa psi
0-250 0-250 50 5 0-25,000 5000 500
0-400 0-400 50 5 0-40,000 5000 500 0/100 kPa-15 psi 20 3 2 0.5
0-600 0-600 100 10 0-60,000 10,000 1000 0/200 kPa-30 psi 50 5 5 0.5
0-1000 0-1000 200 20 0-100,000 20,000 2000 0/400 kPa-60 psi 100 10 10 1
0-1600 0-1600 200 20 0-160,000 20,000 2000 0/700 kPa-100 psi 100 20 20 2
Compound – Single Scale kg/cm2, bar, kPa 0/1000 kPa-160 psi 200 20 20 2
0/1400 kPa-200 psi 200 40 50 5
Range Figure Minor Range Figure Minor
interval grads. kPa interval grads. 0/2000 kPa-300 psi 500 50 50 5
kg/cm2 bar
0/2700 kPa-400 psi 500 50 50 5
–1/0/1 –1/0/1 0.2 0.02 –100/100 20 2 0/4000 kPa-600 psi 1000 100 100 10
–1/0/1.5 –1/0/3 0.5 0.05 –100/150 50 5
–1/0/3 –1/0/3 0.5 0.05 –100/300 50 5 0/5500 kPa-800 psi 1000 200 100 20
–1/0/5 –1/0/5 1 0.1 –100/500 100 10 0/7000 kPa-1000 psi 1000 200 200 20
–1/0/9 –1/0/9 2 0.2 –100/900 200 20 0/10,000 kPa-1500 psi 2000 300 200 50
–1/0/15 –1/0/15 3 0.5 –100/1500 300 50 0/14,000 kPa-2000 psi 2000 400 200 50
–1/0/24 –1/0/24 5 0.5 –100/2400 500 50 0/20,000 kPa-3000 psi 5000 500 500 50
Vacuum – Single Scale kg/cm2, bar, kPa 0/34,000 kPa-5000 psi 5000 1000 1000 100
Range Figure Minor Range Figure Minor 0/40,000 kPa-6000 psi 10,000 1000 1000 100
kg/cm2 bar interval grads. kPa interval grads. 0/50,000 kPa-7500 psi 10,000 1000 1000 100
0/70,000 kPa-10,000 psi 10,000 2000 2000 200
-1/0 -1/0 0.2 0.02 -100/0 20 2
0/100,000 kPa-15,000 psi 20,000 3000 2000 500

*Inner scale is dominant


13

Range Tables
Ashcroft 1008 Stainless Steel Case, Dual and Single Scale
®

63mm and 100mm Pressure Gauges

Metric & psi Dual Scale Ranges* Standard Single Scale Ranges
Pressure Pressure Compound
Units of Measurement Figure Minor Units Figure Minor Figure interval
Units
inner psi outer kg/cm2 outer bar outer kPa interval graduation psi intterval graduation in. Hg psi
0/15 1 1 100 1 0.2 0/15 3 0.5 30˝ Hg/15 psi 5 3
0/30 2 2 200 5 0.5 0/30 5 0.5 30˝ Hg/30 psi 10 5
0/60 4 4 400 5 1 0/60 10 1 30˝ Hg/60 psi 10 10
0/100 7 7 700 20 2 0/100 20 2 30˝ Hg/100 psi 30 10
0/160 11 10 1100 20 2 0/160 20 2 30˝ Hg/150 psi 30 20
0/200 14 14 1400 20 2 0/200 40 5 30˝ Hg/300 psi 30 50
0/300 21 20 2000 30 5 0/300 50 5
0/400 28 27 2800 50 10 0/400 50 5
0/600 42 42 4000 100 10 0/600 100 10
0/800 50 50 5500 100 20 0/800 100 10
0/1000 70 70 7000 100 10 0/1000 200 10
0/1500 105 100 10,000 200 20 0/1500 200 20
0/2000 140 140 14,000 200 20 0/2000 400 20
0/3000 210 200 20,000 300 50 0/3000 500 50
0/5000 350 320 34.000 500 50 0/5000 1000 100
0/6000 420 400 40,000 1000 100 0/6000 1000 100
0/7500 520 520 50,000 1000 100 0/7500 1000 100
0/10,000 700 700 70,000 1000 100 0/10,000 2000 100
0/15,000 1050 1050 100,000 2000 200 0/15,000 2000 200
*Inner scale is dominant Vacuum
Units Figure Minor
in. Hg int. grad.
30/0 5 in. 0.5 in.

Metric Single Scale Ranges


Pressure
Units of Measurement Unit of measure
Figure Minor Figure Minor
kg/cm2 bar interval graduation kPa interval graduation
0/1 0/1 0.1 0.01 0/100 10 1
0/1.6 0/1.6 0.2 0.02 0/160 20 2
0/2.5 0/2.5 0.5 0.05 0/250 50 5
0/4 0/4 0.5 0.05 0/400 50 10
0/6 0/6 0.5 0.1 0/600 50 10
0/10 0/10 1 0.1 0/1000 100 10
0/16 0/16 2 0.2 0/1600 200 20
0/25 0/25 5 1 0/2500 500 50
0/40 0/40 5 1 0/4000 500 100
0/60 0/60 5 1 0/6000 500 100
0/100 0/100 20 2 0/10,000 1000 100
0/160 0/160 20 2 0/16,000 2000 200
0/250 0/250 50 5 0/25,000 5000 500
0/400 0/400 50 10 0/40,000 5000 1000
0/600 0/600 50 10 0/60,000 5000 500
0/1000 0/1000 100 10 0/100,000 10,000 1000
0/1600 0/1600 200 20 0/160,000 20,000 2000
Vacuum
–1/0 –1/0 0.1 0.01 –100/0 10 1
Compound
–1/0/1.5 –1/0/1.5 0.2 0.02 –100/0/150 50 5
–1/0/3 –1/0/3 0.5 0.05 –100/0/300 50 5
–1/0/5 –1/0/5 0.5 0.1 –100/0/500 50 10
–1/0/9 –1/0/9 1 0.1 –100/0/900 100 10
–1/0/15 –1/0/15 2 0.2 –100/0/1500 200 20
–1/0/24 –1/0/24 5 0.5 –100/0/2400 500 50
14

Range Tables
Ashcroft® 1009 Stainless Steel Case
21⁄2˝, 31⁄2˝, 41⁄2˝, 6˝ and 100mm Pressure Gauges

Standard Ranges
Pressure Compound
psi Figure interval Minor graduation Figure interval Minor graduation
0/15 1 0.2 Range
in. Hg psi in. Hg psi
0/30 5 0.5
30˝ Hg/15 psi 5 3 1 0.5
0/60 5 1
0/100 10 1 30˝ Hg/30 psi 10 5 1 1
0/160 20 2 30˝ Hg/60 psi 10 10 2 1
0/200 20 2 30˝ Hg/100 psi 10 10 2 1
0/300 30 5 30˝ Hg/150 psi 10 20 5 2
0/400 50 5
30˝ Hg/300 psi 30 25 5 5
0/600 50 10
0/800 100 10 Vacuum
0/1000 100 10 Range Figure interval Minor graduation
0/1500 200 20 30/0 in. Hg 5 in. 0.5 in.
0/2000 200 20
0/3000 300 50
0/5000 500 50
0/6000 1000 100
0/7500 1000 100
0/10,000 1000 100
0/15,000 2000 200
0/20,000 2000 200
0/30,000 3000 500

Metric Ranges
Pressure
kg/cm2 psi
(kilograms per Figure Minor kPa Figure Minor outer scale of
sq. centimeter) bar interval graduation (kilopascal) interval graduation dual range*
0/1 0/1 0.1 0.01 0/100 10 1 0/14
0/1.6 0/1.6 0.2 0.02 0/160 20 2 0/22
0/2.5 0/2.5 0.5 0.05 0/250 50 5 0/35
0/4 0/4 0.5 0.05 0/400 50 5 0/55
0/6 0/6 0.5 0.1 0/600 50 10 0/85
0/10 0/10 1 0.1 0/1000 100 10 0/140
0/16 0/16 2 0.2 0/1600 200 20 0/220
0/25 0/25 5 0.5 0/2500 500 50 0/350
0/40 0/40 5 0.5 0/4000 500 50 0/550
0/60 0/60 5 1 0/6000 500 100 0/850
0/100 0/100 10 1 0/10,000 1000 100 0/1400
0/160 0/160 20 2 0/16,000 2000 200 0/2200
0/250 0/250 50 5 0/25,000 5000 200 0/3500
0/400 0/400 50 5 0/40,000 5000 500 0/5500
0/600 0/600 50 10 0/60,000 5,000 500 0/8500
0/1000 0/1000 100 10 0/100,000 10,000 1000 0/14,000
0/1600 0/1600 200 20 0/160,000 20,000 2000 0/22,000
Vacuum
–1/0 –1/0 0.1 0.01 –100/0 10 1 30˝ Hg
Compound
–1/0/1.5 –1/0/1.5 0.05 0.05 –100/0/150 50 5 30˝ Hg/0/20
–1/0/3 –1/0/3 0.05 0.05 –100/0/300 50 5 30˝ Hg/0/40
–1/0/5 –1/0/5 0.5 0.1 –100/0/500 50 10 30˝ Hg/0/70
–1/0/9 –1/0/9 1 0.1 –100/0/900 100 10 30˝ Hg/0/125
–1/0/15 –1/0/15 2 0.2 –100/0/1500 200 20 30˝ Hg/0/215
–1/0/24 –1/0/24 5 0.2 –100/0/2400 500 20 30˝ Hg/0/340
*Inner scale is dominant
15

Options
Ashcroft Stainless Steel Case Pressure Gauges
®

Case and ring options Code Comments


Hermetically Sealed or Weatherproof Liquid-Fillable Case LJ Gauge furnished dry or for liquid filling. Includes a solid fill plug and throttle plug for
ranges 30 psi and above.
U-Clamp UC Used for panel mounting back-connect gauges.
Front Flange FF Includes 3 holes for panel mounting gauges (back-connect only).
Wall Mounting Bracket BF Available on 41⁄2˝ 1009 lower or back-connect.˝
Back Flange for Wall Mounting FW Available on 21⁄2˝ and 31⁄2˝ 1009 lower or back-connect.
Retrofit Flange RF Available on 63mm and 100mm 1008 back-connect gauges for panel mounting. (Includes U-clamp.)
Metric Gauge MG Available on 31⁄2˝ 1009 with 1⁄2 NPT lower connection. Gauge supplied with micrometer pointer,
white dial and safety glass.
Bourdon tube and system assembly options
SS Throttle Plug – (restrictor) Push-in Design TU SS push-in type with a 0.013" orifice for 21⁄2˝, 31⁄2˝, 100mm 1009, 63mm, 100mm 1008. Throttle
plug standard on all 21⁄2˝, 31⁄2˝ 1009, 40mm thru 100mm 1008 liquid filled gauges 30 psi-1000 psi
SS Throttle Plug (restrictor) Helical Design TS Standard on all 21⁄2˝, 31⁄2˝, 100mm 1009s, 40mm, thru 100mm 1008 liquid filled gauges with ranges
of 1500 psi and above. 41⁄2˝, 6˝ 1009 furnished with thread-in design with a .031˝ orifice.
Liquid Filled Gauge Without Throttle Plug WP Required when the process may clog a throttle plug on the gauge.
Cleaning for Gaseous Oxygen 6B If gauge is liquid filled specify Halocarbon as the fill or utilize PLUS! Performance (LL).
Liquid filling options
Silicone Fill GV Not available on 40mm and 50mm 1008 gauges.
Halocarbon Fill GX Not available on 40mm and 50mm 1008. For oxidizing media. Examples; chlorine, oxygen, nitric
acid and sulfuric acid.
Pointer options
Red Set-Hand (Single) SH Available on 1009 only. Single stationary set-hand used to indicate a specific pressure.
Red Set-Hand (Double) SJ Available on 1009 only. Double stationary set-hand used to indicate 2 specific pressures.
Red Set-Hand (Adjustable) EU Available on 1009 only.
Maximum Pointer EP Available on 41⁄2˝ and 6˝ 1009 only. Externally reset by a knob on outside of an acrylic window.
Minimum Pointer EQ Available on 41⁄2˝ and 6˝ 1009 only. Externally reset by a knob on outside of an acrylic window.
Window options
Polycarbonate Window PD Ambient temperature limits –50/270°F. 40mm, 50mm 1008 and 100mm 1009 only.
XPD standard on 21⁄2˝, 31⁄2˝ 1009 and 63mm and 100mm 1008.
Acrylic Window PD 41⁄2˝ and 6˝ 1009 only. Ambient temperature limits –50/180°F.
Shatterproof Glass SG Not available on 63mm, 100mm 1008. Ambient temperature limits –50/200°F.
External Zero Adjustable Pointer (Easy Zero™) EA Available in 31⁄2˝ 1009 with 1⁄4 NPT only. Dry or liquid filled.
Marking and tagging options
Dial Marking DA Service marking printed on dial.
Paper Tagging of Carton and Gauge NN Tag is bonded to gauge case and carton.
Stainless Steel Tagging of Gauge Case NH 300 series stainless steel tag is wired to gauge case.
Calibration options
Accuracy 0.5% full scale AN 41⁄2˝ and 6˝ 1009 only.
Test and certificate options
Certificate of Conformance CD-1 Conformance to specifications and/or drawings.
Individual Certified Calibration Chart CD-4
Special connection options
1
⁄8 NPT 01 Available on 21⁄2˝, 31⁄2˝ 1009SW.
SAE 7⁄16˝ and 20 straight thread RW Not available on 40mm, 50mm 1008
. 7⁄16˝ and 20 UNF-3A 37° Flare EJ Not available on 40mm, 50mm 1008
1
⁄4˝ straight JIS, BSP KJ Not available on 40mm, 50mm 1008
1
⁄4˝ tapered JIS, BSP KA Not available on 40mm, 50mm 1008
3
⁄8˝ straight JIS, BSP KP 31⁄2,̋ 100mm 1009SW lower connection only
1
⁄2˝ straight JIS, BSP KN 31⁄2,̋ 100mm 1009SW lower connection only
3
⁄8˝ tapered JIS, BSP KR 31⁄2,̋ 100mm 1009SW lower connection only
1
⁄2˝ tapered JIS, BSP KQ 31⁄2,̋ 100mm 1009SW lower connection only
G 1⁄4˝ DIN 13 Not available on 40mm, 50mm 1008
16

How to Order
Ashcroft® Stainless Steel Case Pressure

Table A – Case selection and mounting


Case: Finish & Ring: Style,
Dial Size Ordering Case Material Finish & Mounting/Connection
Code Type Material
21⁄2˝, 31⁄2˝ (25) (35) 1009 Polished 304 SS Bayonet, Lock ring Stem – Lower or back
100mm (10) 1009 Polished 304 SS Polished 304 SS Surface – Lower or back: specify (XFW) back flange
Flush – Back: specify front flange (FF) or U-clamp (UC)
41⁄2˝, 6˝ (45) (60) 1009 Polished 304 SS Bayonet, Lock ring Stem – Lower or back
Polished 304 SS Surface –Lower or back, wall mount bracket (BF)
Flush – Back: specify front flange (FF) or U-clamp (UC)
40mm, 50mm (40) (50) 1008 Polished 304 SS Push-In, Polished Stem – Lower or back
304 SS Flush – Back: specify front flange (FF) or U-clamp (UC)
63mm 100mm (63) (10) 1008 304 SS Crimped 304 SS Stem – Lower or back
Flush – Back: specify front flange (FF), U-clamp (UC) or
retrofit flange (RF)
Table B – System, connection and location
Dial Size Case Type Tube and Tube and Socket Material NPT Conn. Range Selection
Socket Code Conn. Location Limits (psi)
and Code and Code
(21⁄2˝, 31⁄2˝ (AW) Welded 316 SS tube, bronze socket (02) 1⁄4 std. Vac/1000
100mm) (SW) Welded 316 SS tube and socket (04) 1⁄2 opt.(1) Vac/15,000
(A) Grade A phosphor bronze tube, brass tip
Vac/1000
1009 silver brazed brass socket
(02) 1⁄4 std. (L) lower
(41⁄2˝, 6˝) (B) 4130 alloy steel tube, 1019 steel socket Vac/5000
(04) 1⁄2 opt. (B) back
(R) 316 SS tube, 1019 steel socket Vac/20,000
(S) 316 SS tube and socket Vac/20,000
(01) 1⁄8 std., 40mm(2)
(40/50mm) (S) 316 SS tube and socket Vac/15,000
(02) 1⁄4 std., 50mm
1008 (A) Phosphor bronze tube, brass socket, soldered (02) 1⁄4 std. Vac/6000
(63/100mm) 1
(02) ⁄4 std.
(S) Welded 316 SS tube and socket Vac/15,000
(04) 1⁄2 opt.(1)
NOTES:
(1) 31⁄2˝/100mm 1009SW, 100mm 1008S lower connect only
(2) Not available with 1⁄4 NPT

To order an Ashcroft Stainless Steel Case Pressure Gauge (sample coding shown)
Select: 25 1009 SWL 02L XGV 160 psi
1. Dial size – 21⁄2˝
2. Case type – 1009
3. Bourdon tube and socket 316SS
4. Connection – 1⁄4 NPT Lower
5. Optional features – Silicone filled
6. Pressure range (see range tables on pages 12 through 14)
17

Dimensions
Ashcroft Stainless Steel Case Pressure Gauges
®

Case Type 1008 – 40mm & 50mm Case Type 1008 – 63mm & 100mm
B
HH B
B S
/ (3)
18

S S
H

C C C C
A
A A

14 / NPT G
I G
9/16-(14) #8 - 32 THD I I
ACROSS 2 PLACES 9 16/ (14) ACROSS FLATS 9/16 (14)

FLATS H ACROSS FLATS


7/16
/ NPT
14
(11)
D
40/50mm lower and back connection 63/100mm 1008A/AL back connection 63/100mm1008A/AL lower connection
B
S B
111/32 FF
HH B (34) S
/
18 1 / NPT
S (25)
14
(3)

C M
/ (6)
14 PANEL
A CUTOUT
C C
± 1/32
A
DD
A
G-1
14 / NPT
I
/ NPT
14 HH I 7/16 (11)
/ (14)
9 16
13/8
#8 - 32 THD I DD1 ACROSS FLATS
/
1 16 1/4 (35)
ACROSS FLATS 2 PLACES 7 16/ (11) ACROSS FLATS (2) TO (6) #8-32 LOCKWASHER
/
15 32
(12) CUST. PANEL NUT 3/8 (10) HEX

63/100mm 1008S/SL lower connection 63/100mm 1008S/SL back connection 63/100mm 1008A/AL back connection (XUC) U-clamp

3X 5/32 (4) HOLES B


3X 5/32 (4) HOLES B
111/32 #6 FILISTER HEAD S H B
#6 FILISTER HEAD S I 9/16 (14)
(34) SCREWS & NUTS S H
SCREWS & NUTS ACROSS FLATS
HH
14 / NPT

M
M PANEL
PANEL M
C CUTOUT C-1 PANEL
C CUTOUT
C-1
C-1 ± 1/32 C CUTOUT
±1/32 ± 1/32
E E
A A DD
A

/ NPT
14 / NPT
14

1/16 1/4
1/16 1/4 I 9/16 (14) #8-32 LOCKWASHER
(2) TO (6) I 7/16 (11) (2) TO (6) DD1 NUT 3/8 (10) HEX
ACROSS FLATS CUST. PANEL ACROSS FLATS /
1 16 1/4
CUST. PANEL (2) TO (6)
CUST. PANEL

63/100mm 1008S/SL back connection (XFF) Front Flange 63/100mm 1008A/AL back connection (XFF) Front Flange 63/100mm 1008A/AL back connection (XRF) Retrofit Front Flange

Case Type 1008S – 100mm with 1⁄2 NPT


B B B
111/32 111/32 S
S I 7/16 (11) S (34) I 7/16 (11)
(34)
ACROSS FLATS ACROSS FLATS
HH HH

/ NPT
14 / NPT
14

M M
PANEL PANEL C
C-1
C CUTOUT C CUTOUT
± 1/32 ± 1/32

DD DD
A A

DD1 DD1 I 5/8 (16)


#8-32 LOCKWASHER #8-32 LOCKWASHER
1/16 1/4 1/16 1/4 ACROSS / NPT
12
(2) TO (6) NUT 3/8 (10) HEX (2) TO (6) NUT 3/8 (10) HEX FLATS
CUST. PANEL CUST. PANEL

D
63/100mm 1008S/SL back connection (XRF) Retrofit Front Flange 63/100mm 1008S back connection (XUC) U-clamp 100mm 1008S/SL lower connection

Gauge Weight
Size A A-1 B C C-1
D DD DD1 E FF G G-1 H HH I J L S M Dry LF
(40) (41) (25) (42) (10) (43) (20) (14) (8) .08kg .10kg
11⁄2 15⁄8 31
⁄32 121⁄32 3
⁄8 111⁄16 25
⁄32 9
⁄16 5
⁄16 .17# .22#
(50) (52) (29) (53) (10) (48) (24) (14) (10) .12kg .17kg
2 21⁄16 11⁄8 23⁄32 3
⁄8 17⁄8 15
⁄16 9
⁄16 3
⁄8 .26# .37#
(63) (63) (31) (69) (86) (19) (29) (73) (79) (46) (55) (64) (23) (49) (11) (4) (71) (64) (6) .11kg .21kg
21⁄2 21⁄2 17⁄32 223⁄32 33⁄8 3
⁄4 11⁄8 27⁄8 31⁄8 113⁄16 25⁄32 21⁄2 29⁄32 115⁄16 7⁄16 5
⁄32 23⁄16 217⁄32 1⁄4 .25# .47#
(100) (100) (94) (31) (106) (133) (22) (29) (106) (116) (46) (86) (81) (86) (76) (11) (6) (97) (101) (6) .18kg .42kg
31⁄2 315⁄16 323⁄32 17⁄32 45⁄32 57⁄32 7⁄8 11⁄8 43⁄16 49⁄16 113⁄16 33⁄8 33⁄16 33⁄8 3 7
⁄16 1
⁄4 33⁄16 331⁄32 1⁄4 .40# .94#
(100) (100) (39) (106) (94) (92) (16) (6) .23kg .45kg
1
⁄2 NPT 315⁄16 117⁄32 45⁄32 311⁄16 35⁄8 5
⁄8 1
⁄4 .50# .97#
Note: Dimensions in brackets ( ) are millimeters.
18

Dimensions
Ashcroft® Stainless Steel Case Pressure Gauges

Case Type 1009 – 21⁄2 & 31⁄2,


B B
S 17/16 FF
B S
(35) 13/8
S (35)

C / NPT
14
M
/ (6)
14
PANEL
A C C CUTOUT
± 1/32
A
DD
A
G
I
7/16 (11)
I 7/16 (11)
ACROSS FLATS HH 13/8 ACROSS FLATS
I 7/16 (11) / NPT (02L)
14
/
1 16 1/4 (35)
ACROSS FLATS (2) TO (6)
/ NPT (02L)
14 /
7 16
8-32 LOCKWASHER
(11) CUST. PANEL
/ NPT (01L)
18
NUT 3/8 (10) HEX

21⁄2˝ & 31⁄2˝ 1009 lower connected 21⁄2˝ & 31⁄2˝ 1009 back connected 21⁄2˝ & 31⁄2˝ 1009 back connected (XUC)

3X L ON EQUALLY 3X L ON EQUALLY
3X L ON EQUALLY B
SPACED ON A E BC B SPACED ON A E BC SPACED ON A E BC B H
S 13/8
S S
(35)

/ NPT
14

M
C PANEL C
C-1 C
C-1 CUTOUT
± 1/32 C-1

G
14 / NPT (02L)
I I 7/16 (11)
/ (11)
7 16 I 7/16 (11)
J ACROSS FLATS
J ACROSS FLATS J
ACROSS FLATS 1/16 1/4

/ NPT (02L)
14 (2) TO (6) CUST. PANEL
D
21⁄2˝ & 31⁄2˝ 1009 lower connected (XFW) 21⁄2˝ & 31⁄2˝ 1009 back connected (XFF) 21⁄2˝ & 31⁄2˝ back connected (XFW)

Case Type 1009 – 100mm


3X L ON EQUALLY
SPACED ON A E BC B
B
S
S

C
C
A
C-1

G G
I 5/8 (16)
I / (16)
58 ACROSS FLATS
ACROSS FLATS J
7/16
1
/ NPT (04L)
12 /2 NPT (04L) (11)
D

100mm 1009 lower connected (XFW) 100mm 1009 lower connection

Gauge Weight
Size A B C C-1 D DD E FF G H HH I J L M S Dry LF
21⁄2 221⁄32 13⁄16 27⁄8 311⁄16 3
⁄4 11⁄8 31⁄8 111⁄16 29⁄16 13⁄32 21⁄16 7⁄16 1⁄16 5
⁄32 211⁄16 3
⁄8 .26# .50#
(63) (67) (30) (73) (94) (19) (29) (79) (43) (65) (28) (52) (11) (2) (4) (68) (10) .12kg .32kg
31⁄2 319⁄32 19⁄32 331⁄32 57⁄32 7
⁄8 11⁄32 49⁄16 129⁄32 3 3 213⁄32 7⁄16 5
⁄32 7
⁄32 321⁄32 15
⁄32 .44# .88#
(100) (91) (33) (100) (133) (22) (26.4) (106) (48) (76) (76) (61) (11) (4) (6) (93) (12) .20kg .40kg
319⁄32 119⁄32 331⁄32 57⁄32 7
⁄8 49⁄16 311⁄16 5⁄8 5
⁄32 7
⁄32 15
⁄32 .50# .97#
(100) (91) (40) (100) (133) (22) (116) (94) (16) (4) (6) (12) .23kg .45kg

Note: Dimensions in brackets ( ) are millimeters.


19

Dimensions
Ashcroft Stainless Steel Case Pressure Gauges
®

Case Type 1009 – 41⁄2 & 6


PRESSURE RELIEF PLUG
B (DRY GAUGES 41/2˝)
#10-32 THD.
FF /
3 8 HEXNUTS B TOP FILL PLUG
S S (LIQUID FILLED GAUGES
HH B HH
41/2˝ AND 6˝)
GG
U

5/8 WRENCH
NUTS NOT C-1
FLATS
FURNISHED C
C BY DRESSER C
A
DD
M 15/8 (41)
#10-32 UNF-3
THD. F PANEL A
F
CUTOUT
± 1/32
G
/ DIA
78
H I / (0.8)
1 32
119/32
/
1 16 1/4 /
1 16 /
14 5/8 (16) (40)
(2) TO (6)
ZZ (2) TO (6) ZZ ACROSS FLATS
CUST. PANEL / or / NPT
14 12 CUST. PANEL / or 1/2 NPT
14 14 / or 1/2 NPT D
41⁄2˝ & 6˝ 1009 back connected, wall mounting bracket (XBF) 41⁄2˝ & 6˝ 1009 back connected U-clamp (XUC) 41⁄2˝ 1009 lower or back connected

PRESSURE RELIEF PLUG PRESSURE RELIEF PLUG


B (DRY GAUGES 41/2˝) (DRY GAUGES 41/2˝)
PRESSURE RELIEF PLUG TOP FILL PLUG TOP FILL PLUG
J B B
3X L ON EQUALLY (DRY GAUGES 41/2˝) (LIQUID FILLED GAUGES (LIQUID FILLED GAUGES
SPACED ON A E BC S TOP FILL PLUG S S
41/2˝ AND 6˝) / (0.8)
1 32 41/2˝ AND 6˝) / (0.8)
1 32
(LIQUID FILLED GAUGES
41/2˝ AND 6˝)

M I 5/8 (16)
C-1 PANEL C ACROSS C
FLATS
CUTOUT
± 1/32
C A
F A A

G
119/32 (40) I 5/8 (16)
/ or 1/2 NPT
14 / or 1/2 NPT
14
ACROSS FLATS
/
1 16 1/4 H
(2) TO (6) I 5/8 (16)
ACROSS FLATS / or 1/2 NPT (-02L)
14 D
CUST. PANEL
41⁄2˝ & 6˝ 1009 back connected, front flange (XFF) 6˝ 1009 back connected 6˝ 1009 lower connected

STD. Gauge Weight


Size A B C D F G I S Dry LF
41⁄2 423⁄32 21⁄16 53⁄32 15⁄16 15⁄8 315⁄16 5⁄8 15
⁄32 1.75# 2.40#
(100) (120) (52) (129) (24) (41) (100) (16) (12) .79kg 1.1kg
6 65⁄16 2 621⁄32 27⁄32 15⁄8 413⁄16 5⁄8 13
⁄32 2.25# 4.12#
(160) (160) (51) (169) (22) (41) (122) (16) (10) 1kg 1.85k

XFF Gauge Weight


Size A B C C-1 E I J L M S Dry LF
41⁄2 423⁄32 21⁄16 53⁄32 69⁄32 511⁄16 5⁄8 5
⁄32 7
⁄32 415⁄16 15⁄32 1.75# 2.40#
(100) (120) (52) (129) (160) (144) (16) (4) (6) (125) (12) .79kg 1.1kg
6 65⁄16 2 621⁄32 75⁄8 71⁄32 5
⁄8 1
⁄16 1
⁄4 67⁄16 13⁄32 2.25# 4.12#
(160) (160) (51) (169) (194) (179) (16) (2) (6) (163) (10) 1kg 1.85k

XBF Gauge Weight


Size A B C F GG HH U ZZ Dry LF
41⁄2 423⁄32 21⁄16 53⁄32 15⁄8 3
⁄16 3 17⁄16 17⁄16 1.75# 2.40#
(100) (120) (52) (129) (41) (5) (76) (37) (37) .79kg 1.1kg
6 65⁄16 2 621⁄32 15⁄8 3
⁄16 41⁄2 17⁄16 17⁄16 2.25# 4.12#
(160) (160) (51) (169) (41) (5) (114) (37) (37) 1kg 1.85k

XUC Gauge Weight


Size A B C DD F FF H HH I M S ZZ Dry LF
41⁄2 423⁄32 21⁄16 53⁄32 1 15⁄8 25⁄16 15⁄8 3 5
⁄8 413⁄16 15⁄32 39⁄32 1.75# 2.40#
(100) (120) (52) (129) (25) (41) (59) (41) (76) (16) (122) (12) (83) .79kg 1.1kg
6 65⁄16 2 621⁄32 1 15⁄8 25⁄8 15⁄8 41⁄2 5
⁄8 67⁄16 13⁄32 33⁄16 2.25# 4.12#
(160) (160) (51) (169) (25) (41) (67) (41) (114) (16) (163) (10) (81) 1kg 1.85k
Note: Dimensions in brackets ( ) are millimeters.
Instrument Division Sales and Customer Service Locations
U.S. & International U.S. Sales Offices International Operations Korea
Headquarters Dresser International, S.A
Chicago, Illinois Brazil #2015 Kuk Dong Bldg.
Stratford, Connecticut Midwest Region Dresser Industria e 60-1, 3-KA, Choongmu-Ro,
250 E. Main Street 400 W. Lake Street Comercio Ltda. Chung-ku, Seoul, Korea 100-705
Stratford, CT 06614-5145 Suite 318 Rua Senador Vergueiro #433 Tel: 82-2-2274-0792
Tel: (203) 378-8281 Roselle, IL 60172-3573 09521-320 Sao Caetano do Sul Fax: 82-2-2274-0794
Fax: (203) 385-0357 Tel: (630) 980-9030 Sao Paulo, Brazil E-Mail: dkisjlee@chollian.net
Fax: (630) 980-9440 Tel: 55-11-4224-7400
U.S. Operations Fax: 55-11-4224-7477 Mexico
Houston, Texas E-Mail: Dresser Instruments S.A. De C.V.
Industrial Instrument Southwest Region vendas.instrumentos@dresser.com Mexico Operations
Operations 605 Bel Air Blvd. Henry Ford No. 114
Stratford, Connecticut Suite 10 Brazil (Jacarei) Esq. Foulton Fracc.
250 E. Main Street Mobile, AL 36606 Dresser Industria e Comercio Ltda. Industrial San Nicolas
Stratford, CT 06614-5145 Tel: (251) 473-1692 Divisao Masoneilan 54030 Tlalnepantla,
Tel: (203) 378-8281 Fax: (251) 473-1782 Rua Particular– Estrada Edo De Mexico
Fax: (203) 381-9042 Velha Rio De Janeiro – Tel: (52)55-53-10-72-17
Mobile, Alabama Sao Paulo, KM 101Jacarei, (52)55-53-10-89-83
APG Operations Southeast Region Sao Paulo Caixa (52)55-53-10-28-29
(Control, Transducer and 605 Bel Air Blvd. Postal 167, CEP 12305-330 (52)55-53-10-28-75
Precision Instruments) Suite 10 Tel: 55-11-3958-2011 Fax: (52)55-53-10-26-08
Shelton, Connecticut Mobile, AL 36606 Fax: 55-11-3958-2670 E-Mail: mendiet@avantel.net
Two Research Drive Tel: (251) 473-1692 E-Mail: dresserjac@uol.com.br
Shelton, CT 06484 Fax: (251) 473-1782 Saudi Arabia
Tel: (203) 925-4000 Canada Dresser Al Rushaid Valve &
Fax: (203) 925-4010 Stratford, Connecticut Dresser Canada, Inc. Instrument Co. (DARVICO)
Northeast Region 2135 Meadowpine Blvd. P.O. Box 10145
Commercial 250 E. Main Street Mississauga, Jubail Industrial City
Instrument Operations Stratford, CT 06614-5145 Ontario L5N 6L5 Canada Saudi Arabia 31961
Berea, Kentucky Tel: (203) 385-0670 Tel: 905-826-8411 Tel: 966-3-341-0278
200 Harrison Road Fax: (203) 385-0756 Fax: 905-826-9106 Fax: 966-3-341-7624
Berea, KY 40403 E-Mail: Lance_Barette@dresser.com E-Mail: bill_dumasia@darvico.com
Tel: (859) 986-9333 Stratford, Connecticut E-Mail: sam_dastur@darvico.com
Fax: (859) 986-7676 Pacific Region China
250 E. Main Street Dresser Industries, Inc. Singapore
Stratford, CT 06614-5145 Room #2404, Capital Mansion Dresser Singapore
Tel: (203) 385-0399 No. 6 Xin Yuan Nan Road Beijing, Instrument Operations
Fax: (203) 385-0402 People’s Republic of China 100004 Block 1004 Toa Payoh North
Tel: 86-10-84862440/1/2/3/4 #07-15/17 Singapore 318995
Fax: 86-10-84862445 Tel: 65-252-6602
E-Mail: dresser@public3.bta.net.cn Fax: 65-252-6603
E-Mail: john.wong@dresser.com
France
Dresser Europe GmbH United Kingdom
74, Rue d’Arceuill Dresser Europe GmbH
F 95478, France East Gillibrands, Skelmersdale
Tel: 33 (0) 1 60372530 Lancashire, WN8 9TU
Fax: 33 (0) 1 60372539 United Kingdom
E-Mail: dresser.europe@wanadoo.fr Tel: 14-16-95-52600
Fax: 14-16-95-52693
Germany E-Mail: Johanna.Gribben@dresser-
Dresser Europe GmbH instrument.co.uk
Postfach 11 20 Max-Planck-Str. 1 E-Mail: sales@dresser-instrument.co.uk
D-52499 Baesweiler, Germany
Tel: 49-24-01-8080 Venezuela
Fax: 49-24-01-7027 Manufactures Petroleras
E-Mail: jbiermans@dresserbae.de Venezolanas (M.P.V.)
KM 7 Carretera A El Mojan Calle 18,
Germany #15B355 ZONA Ind. Norte Sector
Ebro Electronic GmbH Canchancha Maracaibo Edo
Peringerstr 10D-85055 Zulia Venezuela
Ingolstadt, Germany Tel: 58-61-579-762/070
Tel: 49-84-1-95478-0 Fax: 58-61-579-461
Fax: 49-84-1-95478-80 E-Mail: contactenos@
E-Mail: info@ebro.de mapvensa.com
E-Mail: ventasmpv@
Japan telcel.net.ve
Dresser Japan Ltd.
Room 818, Shin Tokyo Building
3-1 Marunouchi 3-Chome,
Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, Japan
Tel: 813-3201-1501
Visit our web site Fax: 813-3213-6567
www.ashcroft.com E-Mail: yuichi.yamamoto@
dresserjapan.co.jp

© Dresser Instrument, Dresser Measurement, Dresser, Inc. 11/01 20MSWP-2/02-1P1/97


All specifications are subject to change without notice. All sales subject to standard terms and conditions.
81
Stainless Steel-Case Gauges
Type 1008, ASME B 40.1
Grade B (±3-2-3% of span)

• 40mm and 50mm sizes Ashcroft® 40mm and 50mm all


stainless steel pressure gauges help
• All-stainless steel construction
to complete our full-line product offer-
• Dry or liquid-filled versions ing of stainless steel gauges with
dial sizes from 40mm to 100mm.
• Lower or back connect
These smaller size gauges are used
• Glass window standard whenever space limitations and atmo-
spheric and process corrosion exist.
• Front flange or U-clamp available
for flush mounting

STANDARD RANGES SPECIFICATIONS


Pressure Ranges – Single Scale Dial size: 40mm (11 ⁄ 2˝ ) and 50mm (2˝ )
psi kg/cm2 kPa Accuracy: ASME B 40.1 Grade B
0/15 0-1 0-100 (±3-2-3% of span)
0/30 0-2 0-200 Optional: ASME B 40.1 Grade 1A
0/60 0-2.5 0-250 (±1% of span)
0/100 0-4 0-400
0/160 0-6 0-600 Case: 304 stainless steel with 304
stainless steel polished ring
0/200 0-10 0-1000
0/300 0-16 0-2000 Bourdon Tube
0/400 0-25 0-2500 and Socket: 316 stainless steel
0/600 0-40 0-4000 Movement: Stainless steel
0/800 0-60 0-6000
0/1000 0-100 0-10,000 Standard
0/1500 0-160 0-20,000 connections: 1
⁄ 8 NPT standard for 40mm,
1
⁄4 NPT standard for 50mm
0/2000 0-250 0-25,000
0/3000 Dial: Aluminum, white background
0/5000 with black markings.
Pressure range: Vac. through
Compound Ranges – Single Scale 15,000 psi including compound
psi kg/cm2 kPa
Pointer: Aluminum
30 in.Hg/15 psi –1/0/1 –100/0/100
30 in.Hg/30 psi –1/0/3 –100/0/300 Window: Glass
30 in.Hg/60 psi –1/0/5 –100/0/500
30 in.Hg/100 psi –1/0/9 –100/0/900
30 in.Hg/150 psi –1/0/15 –100/0/1500
30 in.Hg/300 psi –1/0/25 –100/0/2500
Vacuum Ranges – Single Scale
psi kg/cm2
30/0 in.Hg –1/0

TO ORDER THIS 1008 PRESSURE GAUGE:


Select: 40 1008 S (L) 01L 1000#
1. Dial size–40mm or 50mm
2. Case type–1008
3. Tube and socket material
4. Liquid filled (glycerin), leave blank if dry
5. Connection size–1⁄8 (01), 1⁄4 (02)
6. Connection location–Lower (L), Back (B)
7. Standard pressure range–1000 psi

Consult factory for guidance in product selection


Phone (203) 385-0217, Fax (203) 385-0602 or
visit our web site at www.ashcroft.com
82
Stainless Steel-Case Gauge
Type 1008S, ASME B 40.1
Grade B (±3-2-3% of span)

DESIGNED FOR SAFETY AND • True Zero™ pointer indication – no


LONGER LIFE stop pin to mask false zero reading
• Patented PowerFlex™ movement – ensures safety and process control
isolates movement from shock and
vibration for longer life OTHER FEATURES:
• All stainless, all-welded construc- Available in 63mm and 100mm dials
tion for long life
sizes, 1008S pressure gauges are field
• New PLUS!™ Performance Option: liquid fillable and field convertible for
- Liquid-filled performance in a dry panel mounting. ASME Grade B, 3-2-3%
gauge accuracy is standard. The gauge is
- Fights vibration and pulsations available dry, liquid-filled weatherproof
without liquid-fill headaches or hermetically sealed and now with
- See pages 6-7 for details PLUS!™ performance option.
- Order as option XLL

STANDARD RANGES
Single-Scale Dial Dual-Scale Dial
psi psi Inner Arc kPa Outer Arc
0/15 0/15 0/100
0/30 0/30 0/200
0/60 0/60 0/400
DUAL-SCALE AMMONIA RANGES
0/100 0/100 0/700
Compound in Hg/psi °F Outer Arc
0/160 0/160 0/1100
0/200 0/200 0/1400 Vac/150 –40/84°F
0/300 0/300 0/2000 Vac/300 –40/125°F
0/400 0/400 0/2800
0/600 0/600 0/4000
Vacuum in.Hg in.Hg Vacuum BOURDON SYSTEM SELECTION(1)
30/0 30/0 –100/0
Ordering Bourdon Tube Socket Tube Range Selection NPT
Comp. in.Hg/psi in.Hg/psi kPa Code & Tip Material(1) Material Type Limits (psi) Conn.(3)
30/15 30/15 –100/100
S 316 stainless steel 316 stainless steel C-Tube Vac/800 1
⁄4 , 1⁄2 & 1⁄8(2)
30/30 30/30 –100/200
S 316 stainless steel 316 stainless steel Helical 1000/15,000 ⁄4 , 1⁄2 & 1⁄8(2)
1
30/60 30/60 –100/400
30/100 30/100 –100/700 (1) For selection of the correct Bourdon system material, see the media application table on page 243.
(2) 1⁄2 NPT available 100mm lower only.
30/150 30/150 –100/1000 (3) 1⁄4" JIS, BSP or DIN threads available.
30/300 30/300 –100/2000
psi psi Inner Arc kPa Outer Arc
0/1000 0/1000 0/7000
0/1500 0/1500 0/10,000
0/2000 0/2000 0/14,000
0/3000 0/3000 0/20,000
0/5000 0/5000 0/34,000
0/6000 0/6000 0/40,000
0/7500 0/7500 0/50,000
0/10,000 0/10,000 0/70,000
0/15,000 0/15,000 0/100,000

TO ORDER THIS 1008 PRESSURE GAUGE:


Select: 63 1008 S (L) 02L XXX 1000#
1. Dial size–63mm or 100mm
2. Case type–1008
3. Tube and socket material
4. Liquid filled (glycerin), leave blank if dry
5. Connection size–1⁄8 (01), 1⁄4 (02), 1⁄2 (04)
6. Connection location–Lower (L), Back (B)
7. Optional Features–see page 176
8. Standard pressure range–1000 psi

Consult factory for guidance in product selection


Phone (203) 385-0217, Fax (203) 385-0602 or
visit our web site at www.ashcroft.com
Receiver Gauges
Type 1008 Stainless Steel
40mm, 50mm, 63mm and 100mm
Case Type 1008 – 40mm & 50mm Case Type 1008 – 63mm & 100mm
B
B HH B S
S / (3)
18
S
H

C C
A C C A
A

I G G
9/16-(14)
/ NPT
14
I
ACROSS
FLATS / (14)
9 16
H ACROSS FLATS
#8 - 32 THD I
2 PLACES /
9 16 (14) ACROSS FLATS 7/16
D / NPT
14
(11)
40/50mm lower and back connection 63/100mm 1008A/AL back connection 63/100mm1008A/AL lower connection

B
B
S 111/32
HH B (34)
FF
/18 S
S 1 / NPT
14
(3) (25)

M
C / (6)
14 PANEL
CUTOUT
C
A C ± 1/32

A DD
A

G
/ NPT
14
HH I 7/16 (11)
I 13/8 ACROSS FLATS
/ NPT
14 DD1 / 1/4 (35)
/ (14)
9 16
I
1 16
#8 - 32 THD (2) TO (6) #8-32 LOCKWASHER
ACROSS FLATS 15/32
2 PLACES /
7 16 (11) ACROSS FLATS CUST. PANEL NUT 3/8 (10) HEX
(12)

63/100mm 1008S/SL lower connection 63/100mm 1008S/SL back connection 63/100mm 1008A/AL back connection (XUC) U-clamp
3X 5/32 (4) HOLES B B
3X / (4) HOLES
5 32 B
111/32 #6 FILISTER HEAD S H I 9/16 (14)
#6 FILISTER HEAD S S H
(34) SCREWS & NUTS ACROSS FLATS
HH
/
14

M M
M
PANEL C-1 PANEL
PANEL
C CUTOUT
C CUTOUT C CUTOUT
C-1 C-1 ± 1/32 ± 1/32
±1/32

E E DD
A A A

/
14 / NPT
14
#8-32 LOCKWASHER
ASHE
1/16 1/4
1/16 1/4
I 7/16 (11) I 9/16 (14) DD1 / 1/4 NUT 3/8 (10) HEX
(2) TO (6)
1 16
(2) TO (6) (2) TO (6)
CUST. PANEL ACROSS FLATS CUST. PANEL ACROSS FLATS
CUST. PANEL

63/100mm 1008S/SL back connection (XFF) Front Flange 63/100mm 1008A/AL back connection (XFF) Front Flange 63/100mm 1008A/AL back connection (XRF) Retrofit Front Flange

B B Case Type 1008S – 100mm with 1⁄2 NPT


111/32 111/32
S (34) I 7/16 (11) S (34) I 7/16 (11)
B
ACROSS FLATS ACROSS FLATS
HH HH S

/
14 / NPT
14

M M
C-1 PANEL PANEL
C CUTOUT C CUTOUT C
± 1/32 ± 1/32

DD DD
A A

DD1 DD1 I 5/8 (16)


1/16 1/4
#8-32 LOCKWASHER 1/16 1/4
#8-32 LOCKWASHER
(2) TO (6) NUT 3/8 (10) HEX (2) TO (6) NUT 3/8 (10) HEX ACROSS / NPT
12
FLATS
CUST. PANEL CUST. PANEL

D
63/100mm 1008S/SL back connection (XRF) Retrofit Front Flange 63/100mm 1008S back connection (XUC) U-clamp 100mm 1008S/SL lower connection

Gauge Weight
Size A A-1 B C C-1 D DD DD1 E FF G G-1 H HH I J L S M Dry LF
(40) (41) (25) (42) (10) (43) (20) (14) (8) .08kg .10kg
11⁄2 15⁄8 31
⁄32 121⁄32 3
⁄8 111⁄16 25
⁄32 9
⁄16 5
⁄16 .17# .22#
(50) (52) (29) (53) (10) (48) (24) (14) (10) .12kg .17kg
2 21⁄16 11⁄8 23⁄32 3
⁄8 17⁄8 15
⁄16 9
⁄16 3
⁄8 .26# .37#
(63) (63) (31) (69) (86) (19) (29) (73) (79) (46) (55) (64) (23) (49) (11) (4) (71) (64) (6) .11kg .21kg
21⁄2 21⁄2 17⁄32 223⁄32 33⁄8 3
⁄4 11⁄8 27⁄8 31⁄8 113⁄16 25⁄32 21⁄2 29⁄32 115⁄16 7⁄16 5
⁄32 23⁄16 217⁄32 1⁄4 .25# .47#
(100) (100) (94) (31) (106) (133) (22) (29) (106) (116) (46) (86) (81) (86) (76) (11) (6) (97) (101) (6) .18kg .42kg
31⁄2 315⁄16 323⁄32 17⁄32 45⁄32 57⁄32 7⁄8 11⁄8 43⁄16 49⁄16 113⁄16 33⁄8 33⁄16 33⁄8 3 7
⁄16 1
⁄4 33⁄16 331⁄32 1⁄4 .40# .94#
(100) (100) (31) (106) (91) (16) (6) .23kg .45kg
315⁄16 17⁄32 45⁄32 35⁄8 5
⁄8 1
⁄4 .50# .97#
Note: Dimensions in brackets ( ) are millimeters.

www.dresser.com/instruments
© Dresser Instrument Division 6/97
PRESSURE GAUGE
INSTALLATION,
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE

I&M012-10098-5/02 (250-1353H)
ii
CONTENTS

1.0 Selection and Application Page


1.1 Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
1.2 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
1.3 Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
1.4 Oxidizing media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
1.5 Pulsation/Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
1.6 Gauge fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
1.7 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

2.0 Temperature
2.1 Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
2.2 Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
2.3 Steam service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
2.4 Hot or very cold media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
2.5 Diaphragm seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
2.6 Autoclaving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

3.0 Installation
3.1 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
3.2 Gauge reuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
3.3 Tightening of gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
3.4 Process isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
3.5 Surface mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
3.6 Flush mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

4.0 Operation
4.1 Frequency of inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
4.2 In-service inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
4.3 When to check accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
4.4 When to recalibrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
4.5 Other considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
4.6 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

5.0 Gauge Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

6.0 Accuracy: Procedures/Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5


6.1 Calibration - Rotary movement gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
6.2 Calibration - 1009 Duralife® Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
6.3 Positive Pressure Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10

iii
CONTENTS
Page

7.0 Diaphragm Seals


7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
7.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
7.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
7.4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
7.5 Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

8.0 Dampening Devices


8.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
8.2 Throttle Screws & Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
8.3 Ashcroft Gauge Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
8.4 Ashcroft Pulsation Dampener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
8.5 Ashcroft Pressure Snubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
8.6 Campbell Micro-Bean® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
8.7 Ashcroft Needle Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
8.8 Chemiquip® Pressure Limiting Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

9.0 Resources
9.1 Training Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
9.2 Pressure Instrument Testing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
9.3 Tools & Tool Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
9.4 Sales Bulletins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Cover photo courtesy of Johnson/Yokogawa Co.

Campbell Micro-Bean® is a registered trademark of J.A. Campbell Co.

Chemiquip® is a registered trademark of Chemiquip Products Co. Inc.

iv
1.0 SELECTION & APPLICATION or Dresser Instrument Division. Use of a dia-
phragm seal with the gauge is recommended for
process media that (a) are corrosive to the
Users should become familiar with ASME
process sensing element; (b) contain heavy par-
B40.1 (Gauges – Pressure Indicating Dial
ticulates (slurries) or (c) are very viscous includ-
Type – Elastic Element) before specifying
ing those that harden at room temperature.
pressure measuring instruments. That docu-
ment – containing valuable information 1.4 Oxidizing media – Gauges for direct use
regarding gauge construction, accuracy, safety, on oxidizing media should be specially
selection and testing – may be ordered from: cleaned. Gauges for oxygen service should be
ordered to variation X6B and will carry the
ASME International
ASME required dial marking “USE NO OIL”
Three Park Avenue
in red letters. Gauges for direct use on other
New York, N.Y. 10016-5990
oxidizing media may be ordered to variation
800-843-2763 (US/Canada)
X6W. They will be cleaned but carry no dial
95-800-843-2763 (Mexico)
marking. Plus!® gauges or Halocarbon filled
973-882-1167 outside North America
gauge or diaphragm fill is required for use
Email: infocentral@asme.org
with oxidizing media; order variation XCF.
WARNING: To prevent misapplication, pres- See page 4 of the text of the Ashcroft
sure gauges should be selected considering Corrosion Guide mentioned in paragraph 1.4
media and ambient operating conditions. above for more information.
Improper application can be detrimental to the
gauge, causing failure and possible personal 1.5 Pulsation/Vibration – Pressure pulsation
injury, property damage or death. The infor- can be dampened by several mechanisms; the
mation contained in this manual is offered as patented PLUS! Performance gauge will han-
a guide in making the proper selection of a dle the vast majority of applications. One
pressure gauge. Additional information is exception to this is high frequency pulsation
available from Dresser Instrument Division. which is difficult to detect. The only indication
may be an upscale zero shift due to movement
The following is a highlight of some of the more wear. These applications should be addressed
important considerations: with a liquid filled gauge, or in extreme cases,
a remotely mounted liquid filled gauge con-
1.1 Range – The range of the instrument nected with a length of capillary line. The
should be approximately twice the maximum small diameter of the capillary provides excel-
operating pressure. Too low a range may lent dampening, but can be plugged. The
result in (a) low fatigue life of the elastic ele- Ashcroft 1106 pulsation dampener and 112
ment due to high operating stress and (b) sus- snubber are auxiliary devices which dampen
ceptibility to overpressure set due to pressure pulsation with less tendency to plug.
transients that exceed the normal operating
pressure. Too high a range may yield insuffi- 1.6 Gauge fills. – Once it has been determined
cient resolution for the application. that a liquid filled gauge is in order, the next
step is selecting the type of fill. Glycerin sat-
1.2 Temperature – Refer to page 2 of this isfies most applications. While being the least
manual for important information concerning expensive fill, its usable temperature range is
temperature related limitations of pressure 20/250°F. Silicone filled gauges have a
gauges, both dry and liquid filled. broader service range: –40/250°F. Oxidizing
1.3 Media – The material of the process sensing media require the use of Halocarbon, with a
element must be compatible with the process service range of –50/250°F. Pointer motion
media. Consult the Corrosion Guide available will be slowed at the low end of the low end of
on the website: www.dresserinstruments.com these temperature ranges.

1
1.7 Mounting – Users should predetermine gauges is 0.5% of full scale change for every
how the gauge will be mounted in service: 40°F change from 75°F. Double that allowance
stem (pipe), wall (surface) or panel (flush). for gauges with hermetically sealed or liquid
Ashcroft wall or panel mounting kits should be filled cases, except for Duragauge® gauges
ordered with the gauge. See paragraph 3 where no extra allowance is required due to
Installation. the elastomeric, compensating back. Above
250°F there may exist very significant errors
in indication.
2.0 TEMPERATURE
2.3 Steam service – In order to prevent live
2.1 Ambient Temperature – To ensure long steam from entering the bourdon tube, a
life and accuracy, pressure gauges should siphon filled with water should be installed
preferably be used at an ambient tempera- between the gauge and the process line.
ture between –20 and +150F (–30 to +65C). At Siphons can be supplied with ratings up to
very low temperatures, standard gauges may 4,000 psi. If freezing of the condensate in the
exhibit slow pointer response. Above 150F, the loop of the siphon is a possibility, a diaphragm
accuracy will be affected by approximately seal should be used to isolate the gauge from
1.5% per 100F. Other than discoloration of the the process steam. Siphons should also be
dial and hardening of the gasketing, non-liq- used whenever condensing, hot vapors (not
uid filled type 1279 (phenolic case) and 1379 just steam) are present. Super heated steam
(aluminum case) Duragauges, with standard should have enough piping or capillary line
glass windows, and Duralife gauges types ahead of the siphon to maintain liquid water
1008 and 1009, can withstand continuous in the siphon loop.
operating temperatures up to 250F. Liquid
filled gauges can withstand 200F but glycerin 2.4 Hot or very cold media – A five foot capil-
fill and the acrylic window of Duragauges will lary line assembly will bring most hot or cold
tend to yellow. Silicone fill will have much less process media within the recommended gauge
tendency to yellow. Low pressure, liquid filled ambient temperature range. For media above
types 1008 and 1009 gauges may have some 750F (400C) the customer should use his own
downscale errors caused by liquid fill expan- small diameter piping to avoid possible corro-
sion. This can be alleviated by “burping” the sion of the stainless steel. The five foot capillary
gauge by gently pushing the top fill plug to will protect the gauges used on the common
one side to admit air to the case. cryogenic (less than –300F (200C) gases, liquid
argon, nitrogen, and oxygen. The capillary and
Although the gauge may be destroyed and cal- gauge must be cleaned for oxygen service. The
ibration lost, gauges can withstand short media must not be corrosive to stainless steel,
times at the following temperatures: gauges and must not plug the small bore of the capillary.
with all welded pressure boundary joints,
750F (400C); gauges with silver brazed joints, 2.5 Diaphragm seals – As mentioned above, a
450F (232C) and gauges with soft soldered diaphragm seal should be used to protect
joints, 250F (121C). For expected long term gauges from corrosive media, or media that
service below –20F (–30C) Duragauges and will plug the instrument. Diaphragm seals
41⁄2˝ 1009 gauges should be hermetically are offered in a wide variety of designs and
sealed and specially lubricated; add “H” to the corrosion resistant materials to accommodate
product code for hermetic sealing. Add varia- almost any application and most connections.
tion XVY for special lubricant. Standard Request bulletin OH-1 for details. Recom-
Duralife gauges may be used to –50F (–45C) mended materials for corrosive service may
without modification. be found in the Corrosion Guide available at
www.dresserinstruments.com.
2.2 Accuracy – Heat and cold affect accuracy
of indication. A general rule of thumb for dry 2.6 Autoclaving – Sanitary gauges with
2
clamp type connections are frequently steam and subsequent inaccurate readings. Always
sterilized in an autoclave. Gauges equipped apply torque only to the wrench flats on the
with polysulfone windows will withstand lower seal housing when installing filled,
more autoclave cycles than those equipped diaphragm seal assemblies or removing same
with polycarbonate windows. Gauges from process lines.
equipped with plain glass or laminated safety
glass should not be autoclaved. Gauge 3.4 Process isolation – A shut-off valve
cases should be vented to atmosphere (remov- should be installed between the gauge and
ing the rubber fill/safety plug if necessary) the process in order to be able to isolate the
before autoclaving to prevent the plastic gauge for inspection or replacement without
window from cracking or excessively distort- shutting down the process.
ing. If the gauge is liquid filled, the fill should 3.5 Surface mounting – Also known as wall
also be drained from the case and the front ring mounting. Gauges should be kept free of piping
loosened before autoclaving. strains. The gauge case mounting feet, if applic-
able, will ensure clearance between the pres-
3.0 INSTALLATION sure relieving back and the mounting surface.
3.6 Flush mounting – Also known as panel
3.1 Location – Whenever possible, gauges mounting. The applicable panel mounting
should be located to minimize the effects of cutout dimensions can be found in Ashcroft
vibration, extreme ambient temperatures and sales bulletins – see item 9.4 RESOURCES
moisture. Dry locations away from very high on page 14 of this manual. These dimensions
thermal sources (ovens, boilers etc.) are pre- are also on Ashcroft® gauge general dimension
ferred. If the mechanical vibration level is drawings which can be obtained from the
extreme, the gauge should be remotely locat- Customer Service department in Stratford,
ed (usually on a wall) and connected to the Connecticut.
pressure source via flexible tubing.
3.2 Gauge reuse – ASME B40.1 recommends
that gauges not be moved indiscriminately 4.0 OPERATION
from one application to another. The cumula-
4.1 Frequency of inspection – This is quite
tive number of pressure cycles on an in-service
subjective and depends upon the severity of
or previously used gauge is generally
the service and how critical the accuracy of
unknown, so it is generally safer to install a
the indicated pressure is. For example, a
new gauge whenever and wherever possible.
monthly inspection frequency may be in order
This will also minimize the possibility of a
for critical, severe service applications.
reaction with previous media.
Annual inspections, or even less frequent
3.3 Tightening of gauge – Torque should schedules, are often employed in non-critical
never be applied to the gauge case. Instead, applications.
an open end or adjustable wrench should 4.2 In-service inspection – If the accuracy of
always be used on the wrench flats of the the gauge cannot be checked in place, the user
gauge socket to tighten the gauge into the fit- can at least look for (a) erratic or random
ting or pipe. NPT threads require the use of a pointer motion; (b) readings that are suspect
suitable thread sealant, such as pipe dope or – especially indications of pressure when the
teflon tape, and must be tightened very user believes the true pressure is 0 psig. Any
securely to ensure a leak tight seal. gauge which is obviously not working or indi-
CAUTION: Torque applied to a diaphragm cating erroneously, should be immediately
seal or its attached gauge, that tends to loosen valved-off or removed from service to avoid a
one relative to the other, can cause loss of fill possible pressure boundary failure.

3
4.3 When to check accuracy – Obviously any than 25%. It is likely the bourdon tube has
suspicious behavior of the gauge pointer war- seen significant overpressure leaving
rants a full accuracy check be performed. residual stresses that may be detrimental
Even if the gauge is not showing any symp- to the application.
toms of abnormal performance, the user may
want to establish a frequency of bench type c. Gauges which have accumulated over
inspection. 1,000,000 pressure cycles with significant
pointer excursion.
4.4 When to recalibrate – This depends on the
criticality of the application. If the accuracy of d. Gauges showing any signs of corrosion
a 3-2-3% commercial type gauge is only 0.5% and/or leakage of the pressure system.
beyond specification, the user must decide e. Gauges which have been exposed to high
whether it’s worth the time and expense to temperature or simply exhibit signs of
bring the gauge back into specification. having been exposed to high temperature
Conversely if the accuracy of a 0.25% test – specifically 250°F or greater for soft sol-
gauge is found to be 0.1% out of specification dered systems; 450°F or greater for brazed
then obviously the gauge should be recalibrat- systems; and 750°F or greater for welded
ed. systems.
4.5 Other considerations – These include (a)
f. Gauges showing significant friction error
bent or unattached pointers due to extreme
and/or wear of the movement and linkage.
pressure pulsation; (b) broken windows which
should be replaced to keep dirt out of the g. Gauges having damaged sockets, especially
internals; (c) leakage of gauge fill; (d) case damaged threads.
damage – dents and/or cracks; (e) any signs of
service media leakage through the gauge h. Liquid filled gauges showing loss of case
including its connection; (f) discoloration of fill.
gauge fill that impedes readability. NOTE: ASME B40.1 does not recommend
4.6 Spare parts – As a general rule it is rec- moving gauges from one application to anoth-
ommended that the user maintain in his er. This policy is prudent in that it encourages
parts inventory one complete Ashcroft instru- the user to procure a new gauge, properly tai-
ment for every ten (or fraction thereof) of that lored by specification, to each application that
instrument type in service. arises.

6.0 ACCURACY:
5.0 GAUGE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES/DEFINITIONS
It is recommended that the user stock one Accuracy inspection – Readings at approxi-
complete Ashcroft instrument for every ten mately five points equally spaced over the
(or fraction thereof) of that instrument type in dial should be taken, both upscale and down-
service. With regard to gauges having a ser- scale, before and after lightly rapping the
vice history, consideration should be given to gauge to remove friction. A pressure standard
discarding rather than repairing them. with accuracy at least 4 times greater than
Gauges in this category include the following: the accuracy of the gauge being tested is rec-
a. Gauges that exhibit a span shift greater ommended.
than 10%. It is possible the bourdon tube Equipment – A finely regulated pressure sup-
has suffered thinning of its walls by corro- ply will be required. It is critical that the pip-
sion. ing system associated with the test setup be
leaktight. The gauge under test should be
b. Gauges that exhibit a zero shift greater
4
positioned as it will be in service to eliminate Span – A span error exists when the error at
positional errors due to gravity. full scale pressure is different from the error
at zero pressure. This error is often propor-
Method – ASME B40.1 recommends that
tional to the applied pressure. Most Ashcroft
known pressure (based on the reading from
gauges are equipped with an internal, adjust-
the pressure standard used) be applied to the
ing mechanism with which the user can cor-
gauge under test. Readings including any
rect any span errors which have developed in
error from the nominal input pressure, are
service.
then taken from the gauge under test. The
practice of aligning the pointer of the gauge Linearity – A gauge that has been properly
under test with a dial graduation and then spanned can still be out of specification at
reading the error from the master gauge intermediate points if the response of the
(“reverse reading”) can result in inconsistent gauge as seen in Figure 1 on page 6 is not lin-
and misleading data and should NOT be used. ear. The Ashcroft Duragauge® is equipped
with a rotary movement feature which per-
Calibration chart – After recording all of the
mits the user to minimize this class of error.
readings it is necessary to calculate the errors
Other Ashcroft gauge designs (e.g., 1009
associated with each test point using the fol-
Duralife®) require that the dial be moved left
lowing formula: ERROR in percent = 100
or right prior to tightening the dial screws.
times (TRUE VALUE minus READING) ÷
RANGE. Plotting the individual errors Hysteresis – Some bourdon tubes have a
(Figure 1 on page 6) makes it possible to visu- material property known as hysteresis. This
alize the total gauge characteristic. The plot material characteristic results in differences
should contain all four curves: upscale – between the upscale and downscale curves.
before rap; upscale – after rap; downscale – This class of error can not be eliminated
before rap; downscale – after rap. Rap means by adjusting the gauge movement or dial
lightly tapping the gauge before reading to position.
remove friction as described in ASME B40.1.
Friction – This error is defined as the differ-
Referring to Figure 1 on page 6, several class- ence in readings before and after lightly tap-
es of error may be seen: ping the gauge case at a check point. Possible
causes of friction are burrs or foreign materi-
Zero – An error which is approximately equal
al in the movement gearing, “bound” linkages
over the entire scale. This error can be mani-
between the movement and the bourdon tube,
fested when either the gauge is dropped or
or an improperly tensioned hairspring. If cor-
overpressured and the bourdon tube takes a
recting these potential causes of friction does
permanent set. This error may often be cor-
not eliminate excessive friction error, the
rected by simply repositioning the pointer.
movement should be replaced.
Except for test gauges, it is recommended
that the pointer be set at midscale pressure to (Continued on page 7)
“split” the errors.

5
TYPICAL CALIBRATION CHART
INDICATED VALUE (PSI)
True Value – Increasing – Increasing – Decreasing – Decreasing –
PSI Without RAP With RAP Without RAP With RAP
0 –.4 0 –.4 0
40 +.8 +1.0 +1.4 +1.1
80 +.4 +.5 +1.2 +1.0
120 –.4 –1.0 +.8 +.6
160 –.8 –.5 +.6 +.4
200 +.4 +.8 +.4 +.4

ERROR (% OF FULL SCALE)


True Value – Increasing – Increasing – Decreasing – Decreasing –
% of Range Without RAP With RAP Without RAP With RAP
0 –.20 0 –.20 0
20 +.40 +.50 +.70 +.55
40 +.20 +.25 +.60 +.50
60 –.20 –.05 +.40 +.30
80 –.40 –.25 +.30 +.20
100 +.20 +.40 +.20 +.20

1.0
Fig. 1




0.5  
  
 
Error (% of Full Scale)


  

0.0 


 



  upscale – without rap
–0.5
  upscale – with rap
  downscale – without rap
  downscale – with rap

–1.0
0 20 40 60 80 100
% of Range

6
6.1 Calibration – Rotary Movement Gauges movement should be rotated counter clock-
– Inspect gauge for accuracy. Many times wise. Rotating the movement one degree
gauges are simply “off zero” and a simple will change this error by approximately
pointer adjustment using the micrometer 0.25%. Rotating the movement often
pointer is adequate. If inspection shows the affects span and it should be subsequently
gauge warrants recalibration to correct span rechecked and readjusted if necessary
and/or linearity errors, proceed as follows: according to step 6.1e and 6.1f.
a. Remove ring, window and, if solid front h. While recalibrating the gauge, the friction
case, the rear closure assembly. error – difference in readings taken with
b. Pressurize the gauge once to full scale and and without rap – should be noted. This
back to zero. error should not exceed the basic accuracy
of the gauge. If the friction error is exces-
c. Refer to Figure 2 on page 8 for a view of a sive, the movement should be replaced.
typical Ashcroft system assembly with One possible cause of excessive friction is
component parts identified. improper adjustment of the hairspring.
The hairspring torque,or tension, must be
d. For solid front gauges, adjust the microme- adequate without being excessive. The
ter pointer so that it rests at the true zero hairspring should also be level, unwind
position. For open front gauges the pointer evenly (no turns rubbing) and it should
and dial must also be disassembled and never tangle.
the pointer should then be lightly pressed
onto the pinion at the 9:00 o’clock position. NOTES:
1 For operation of test gauge external zero
e. Apply full scale pressure and note the reset, refer to Figure 3 on page 8.
magnitude of the span error. With open 2 For test gauge calibration procedure,
front gauges, ideal span (270 degrees) will refer to Figure 4 on page 9.
exist when at full scale pressure the point-
er rests exactly at the 6:00 o’clock position. 6.2 Calibration – 1009 Duralife® Gauge –
Inspect gauge for accuracy. Many times
f. If the span has shifted significantly (span gauges are simply “off zero” and a simple
error greater than 10%), the gauge should pointer adjustment using the adjustable
be replaced because there may be some pointer is adequate. If the inspection shows
partial corrosion inside the bourdon tube that the gauge warrants recalibration to cor-
which could lead to ultimate failure. If the rect span and/or linearity errors, proceed as
span error exceeds 0.25%, loosen the lower follows:
link screw and move the lower end of the
link toward the movement to increase Remove ring, window, gasket and pointer
span or away to decrease span. An adjust- using Ashcroft tool kits 1205T and 1206T.
ment of 0.004 inch will change the span by
6.3 Positive Pressure Ranges –
approximately 1%. This is a repetitive pro-
cedure which often requires more than one a. Remove dial and lightly press pointer onto
adjustment of the link position and the pinion at 9:00 o’clock position.
subsequent rechecking of the errors at zero
b. Apply full scale pressure and rotate span
and full scale pressure.
block as shown in Figure 5a on page 11
g. Apply midscale pressure and note error in until pointer rests at 6:00 o’clock position.
reading. Even though the gauge is accu-
c. Fully exhaust pressure and check that
rate at zero and full scale, it may be inac-
pointer still is at 9:00 o’clock position. If
curate at the midpoint. This is called lin-
not repeat steps 1 and 2 until span is
earity error and is minimized by rotating
correct.
the movement. If the error is positive, the
(Continued on page 10)
7
Fig. 2 ASHCROFT SYSTEM ASSEMBLY

SEGMENT BOURDON TUBE

TIP HAIRSPRING

LINK PINION

ROTARY MOVEMENT
BACKPLATE

SOCKET

Fig. 3 TYPE 1082 EXTERNAL ZERO ADJUST FEATURE*

B RING
A

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE:


LOOSEN RING LOCKING SCREW “A’’
OBTAIN REQUIRED ADJUSTMENT BY ROTATING
KNOB “B’’ CLOCKWISE OR COUNTER-CLOCKWISE.
TIGHTEN SCREW “A’’ DOWN ON KNOB “B.’’

*Applicable only for test gauge with hinged ring design.


8
Fig. 4 TYPE 1082 TEST GAUGE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

9
d. Remove pointer and reassemble dial and h. Repeat steps 4 through 8 until span is
dial screws (finger tight). correct.
e. Lightly press pointer onto pinion. i. Remove the pointer.
f. Check accuracy at full scale. If error exceeds j. With 25 inches of Hg vacuum applied,
1% return to step 1, otherwise proceed. reassemble dial, dial screws (finger tight)
and pointer.
g. Check accuracy at midscale. If error exceeds
1% slide dial left or right to compensate. k. Apply 15 inches of Hg vacuum and note
accuracy of indication. If required, slide dial
h. Continue at * below. left or right to reduce error to 1% maximum.
Vacuum range – l. Continue at * below.
a. Using a pencil, refer to dial and mark the
0 and 25 inch of Hg positions on the case
*Now complete calibration of the gauge as
follows:
flange.
a. Firmly tighten dial screws.
b. Remove the dial.
b. Firmly tap pointer onto pinion, using brass
c. Apply 25 inches of Hg vacuum. back-up tool from Ashcroft kit 1205T if
d. Lightly press pointer onto pinion carefully gauge has rear blow-out plug. If gauge has
aligning it with the 25 inch of Hg vacuum top fill hole no back-up is required.
mark on case flange. c. Recheck accuracy at zero, midscale and full
e. Release vacuum fully. scale points (Figures 5a & 5b on page 11).

f. Note agreement of pointer to zero mark on d. Reassemble window, gasket and ring.
case flange.
g. If span is high or low, turn span block as
shown in Figure 5b on page 11.

10
1009 DURALIFE® PRESSURE GAUGE CALIBRATION

1009 DURALIFE CALIBRA


TION

PRESSURE VACUUM

Pencil marks on case flange

Start at 9:00 o’clock

25
25
Span Block

7/64 Open End Wrench


0
Decrease Increase Increase
Decrease

End at 6:00 o’clock

Mid-scale mark

15

25

Full scale mark


Zero box
Dial screws

Fig. 5a Fig. 5b

11
7.0 DIAPHRAGM SEALS filled prior to being placed in service. Ashcroft
diaphragm seal assemblies should only be
7.1 General – A diaphragm seal (isolator) is a filled by a seal assembler certified by Dresser
device which is attached to the inlet connec- Industries. Refer to section 3.3 for a caution-
tion of a pressure instrument to isolate its ary note about not applying torque on either
measuring element from the process media. the instrument or seal relative to the other.
The space between the diaphragm and the 7.3 Operation – All Ashcroft diaphragm seals,
instrument’s pressure sensing element is with the exception of Type 310 mini-seals, are
solidly filled with a suitable liquid. continuous duty. Should the pressure instru-
Displacement of the liquid fill in the pressure ment fail, or be removed accidentally or delib-
element, through movement of the erately, the diaphragm will seat against a
diaphragm, transmits process pressure matching surface preventing damage to the
changes directly to a gauge, switch or any diaphragm or leakage of the process fluid.
other pressure instrument. When diaphragm
seals are used with pressure gauges, an addi- 7.4 Maintenance – Clamp type diaphragm
tional 0.5% tolerance must be added to the seals – Types 100, 200 and 300 – allow for
gauge accuracy because of the diaphragm replacement of the diaphragm or diaphragm
spring rate. capsule, if that ever becomes necessary. The
Type 200 top housing must also be replaced
Used in a variety of process applications with the diaphragm. With all three types the
where corrosives, slurries or viscous fluids clamping arrangement allows field disassem-
may be encountered, the diaphragm seal bly to permit cleaning of the seal interior.
affords protection to the instrument where:
7.5 Failures – Diaphragm failures are gener-
• The process fluid being measured would ally caused by either corrosion, high tempera-
normally clog the pressure element. tures or fill leakage. Process media build-up
• Pressure element materials capable of on the process side of the diaphragm can also
withstanding corrosive effects of certain require seal cleaning or replacement. Consult
fluids are not available. Customer Service, Stratford CT for advice on
seal failures and/or replacement. Refer also to
• The process fluid might freeze due to Product Information page ASH/PI-14C con-
changes in ambient temperature and dam- taining drawing 96A121 Corrosion Data
age the element. Guide.
7.2 Installation – Refer to sales bulletin OH-1 WARNING: All seal components should be
for information regarding (a) seal configura- selected considering process and ambient
tions; (b) filling fluids; (c) temperature range operating conditions to prevent misapplica-
of filling fluids; (d) diaphragm material pres- tion. Improper application could result in fail-
sure and temperature limits; (e) bottom hous- ure, possible personal injury, property
ing material pressure and temperature lim- damage or death.
its; (f) pressure rating of seal assembly; (g)
accuracy/temperature errors of seal assembly;
(h) diaphragm seal displacement. The volu-
8.0 DAMPENING DEVICES
metric displacement of the diaphragm must
8.1 General – Some type of dampening device
at least equal the volumetric displacement of
should be used whenever the pressure gauge
the measuring element in the pressure
may be exposed to repetitive pressure fluctu-
instrument to which the seal is to be attached.
ations that are fairly rapid, high in magni-
It is imperative that the pressure instru- tude and especially when transitory pressure
ment/diaphragm seal assembly be properly spikes exceeding the gauge range are present
(as with starting and stopping action of
12
valves and pumps). A restricted orifice of restrict the flow of glycerin through an orifice
some kind is employed through which pres- and thus provide a degree of dampening. The
sure fluctuations must pass before they reach greater the compression of the felts the
the bourdon tube. The dampener reduces the greater the degree of dampening.
magnitude of the pressure pulse thus extend-
ing the life of the bourdon tube and move- 8.4 Ashcroft Pulsation Dampener – Type
ment. This reduction of the pressure pulsa- 1106 Ashcroft Pulsation Dampener is a mov-
tion as “seen” by the pressure gauge is gener- ing pin type in which the restricted orifice is
ally evidenced by a reduction in the pointer the clearance between the pin and any one of
travel. If the orifice is very small the pointer five preselected hole diameters. Unlike a sim-
may indicate the average service pressure, ple throttle screw/plug, this device has a self-
with little or no indication of the time varying cleaning action in that the pin moves up and
component of the process pressure. down under the influence of pressure fluc-
tuations.
Commonly encountered media (e.g. – water
and hydraulic oil) often carry impurities 8.5 Ashcroft Pressure Snubber – The heart
which can plug the orifice over time thus ren- of the Type 1112 pressure snubber is a thick
dering the gauge inoperative until the damp- porous metal filter disc. The disc is available
ener is cleaned or replaced. in four standard porosity grades.

Highly viscous media and media that tend to 8.6 Campbell Micro-Bean® – Type 1110
periodically harden (e.g., asphalt) require a Micro-Bean is a precision, stainless steel, nee-
diaphragm seal be fitted to the gauge. The dle valve instantly adjustable to changing
seal contains an internal orifice which damp- conditions of flow and viscosity. A very slight
ens the pressure fluctuation within the fill taper on the valve stem fits into tapered hole
fluid. in the body. The degree of dampening is easi-
ly adjusted by turning the valve handle. A fil-
8.2 Throttle Screws & Plugs – These acces- ter is built into the Micro-Bean to help pre-
sories provide dampening for the least cost. vent plugging.
They have the advantage of fitting completely
within the gauge socket and come in three 8.7 Ashcroft Needle Valves – Type 7001 thru
types: (a) a screwed-in type which permits 7004 steel needle valves provide varying
easy removal for cleaning or replacement; (b) degrees of dampening similar to the Campbell
a pressed in, non-threaded design and (c) a Micro-Bean but with a less precise and less
pressed in, threaded design which provides a costly adjustability. Like the Micro-Bean
highly restrictive, helical flow path. Not all these devices, in the event of plugging, can
styles are available on all gauge types. easily be opened to allow the pressure fluid to
clear away the obstruction.
8.3 Ashcroft Gauge Saver – Type 1073
Ashcroft Gauge Saver features an elastomer- 8.8 Chemiquip® Pressure Limiting Valves –
ic bulb that fully isolates the process media Model PLV-255, PLV-2550, PLV-5460, PLV-
from the bourdon tube. In addition to provid- 5500 and PLV-6430, available with and with-
ing dampening of pressure pulses, the bour- out built-in snubbers, automatically “shut off”
don tube is protected from plugging and cor- at adjustable preset values of pressure to pro-
rosion. The space between the bulb and bour- tect the gauge from damage to overpressure.
don tube is completely filled with glycerin. They are especially useful on hydraulic sys-
Felt plugs located between the bulb and bour- tems wherein hydraulic transients (spikes)
don tube are first compressed some amount to are common.

13
9.0 RESOURCES
9.1 Training Videos
9.1.1 Test gauge calibration
9.1.2 1009 Duralife® calibration
9.1.3 Duragauge® calibration
9.1.4 Diaphragm seal filling

9.2 Pressure Instrument Testing Equipment


9.2.1 Type 1305D Deadweight Tester
9.2.2 Type 1327D Pressure Gauge Comparator
9.2.3 Type 1327CM “Precision” Gauge Comparator

9.3 Tools & Tool Kits


9.3.1 Type 2505 universal carrying case for 1082 test gauge
9.3.2 Type 266A132-01 span wrench for 1082 test gauge
9.3.3 Type 1280 conversion kit for 41⁄2˝ lower connect 1279/1379
9.3.4 Type 1283 conversion kit for 41⁄2˝ back connect 1279/1379
9.3.5 Type 1284 conversion kit for 6˝ lower & back connect
9.3.6 Type 1281 socket O-Ring kit for 1279/1379 lower connect
9.3.7 Type 1285 41⁄2˝ ring wrench for 1279/1379 lower & back connect
9.3.8 Type 1286 6˝ ring wrench for 1379 lower & back connect
9.3.9 Type 1287 cone tool for installing diaphragm & spring on 1279/1379 back connect
9.3.10 Type 1105T calibration tool kit (all gauges except 1009 Duralife®)
9.3.11 Type 3220 pointer puller (all gauges except 1009 Duralife®)
9.3.12 Type. 3530 pinion back-up tool for 1009 Duralife®
9.3.13 Type 1230 throttle plug insertion (1⁄4 NPT) for 1009 Duralife®
9.3.14 Type 1231 throttle plug insertion (1⁄2 NPT) for 1009 Duralife® (body only)
9.3.15 Type 1205T calibration hand tools for 1009 Duralife®
9.3.16 Type 1206T ring removal & assembly tools for 1009 Duralife®

9.4 Sales Bulletins


9.4.1 Pressure Instrument Testing Equipment – Bulletin TE-1
9.4.2 Type 1327CM Portable Precision Gauge Comparator – Bulletin TE-2
9.4.3 Test Gauges – Bulletin TG-2
9.4.4 Duragauge® Pressure Gauges – Bulletin DU-1
9.4.5 General Service Gauges – Bulletin IG-1
9.4.6 Type 1009 Duralife® Industrial Gauges – Bulletin SS-1
9.4.7 Type 1008 Metric Case Gauges – Bulletin SS-1
9.4.8 Duralife® Metric Process Gauges – Bulletin SS-1
9.4.9 Type 1032 Sanitary Pressure Gauges – Bulletin SG-2
9.4.10 Special Service Gauges – Bulletin IG-1
9.4.11 Diaphragm Seals – Bulletin OH-1

14
Instrument Division Sales and Customer Service Locations

U.S. & International U.S. Sales Offices International Operations Japan


Headquarters Dresser Japan Ltd.
Midwest Region Brazil Room 818, Shin Tokyo Building
Stratford, Connecticut Chicago, Illinois Dresser Industria e 3-1 Marunouchi 3-Chome,
250 E. Main Street 400 W. Lake Street Comercio Ltda. Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, Japan
Stratford, CT 06614-5145 Suite 318 Rua Senador Vergueiro #433 Tel: 813-3201-1501
Tel: (203) 378-8281 Roselle, IL 60172-3573 09521-320 Sao Caetano do Sul Fax: 813-3213-6567
Fax: (203) 381-9042 Tel: (630) 980-9030 Sao Paulo, Brazil E-Mail: yuichi.yamamoto@
Fax: (630) 980-9440 Tel: 55-11-4224-7400 dresserjapan.co.jp
Fax: 55-11-4224-7477
Southeast Region E-Mail: vendas.instrumentos@ Korea
Mobile, Alabama dresser.com Dresser International, S.A
605 Bel Air Blvd. Room 2107
Suite 10 Brazil (Jacarei) #2015 Kuk Dong Bldg.
Mobile, AL 36606 Dresser Industria e Comercio Ltda. 60-1, 3-KA, Choongmu-Ro,
Tel: (251) 473-1692 Divisao Masoneilan Chung-ku, Seoul, Korea 100-705
Fax: (251) 473-1782 Rua Particular– Estrada Tel: 82-2-2274-0792
Velha Rio De Janeiro – Fax: 82-2-2274-0794
Northeast Region Sao Paulo, KM 101Jacarei, E-Mail: dkisjlee@chollian.net
Stratford, Connecticut Sao Paulo Caixa
250 E. Main Street Postal 167, CEP 12305-330 Mexico
Stratford, CT 06614-5145 Tel: 55-11-3958-2011 Dresser Instruments S.A. De C.V.
Tel: (203) 385-0670 Fax: 55-11-3958-2670 Mexico Operations
Fax: (203) 385-0756 E-Mail: dresserjac@uol.com.br Henry Ford No. 114
Esq. Foulton Fracc.
Pacific Region Canada Industrial San Nicolas
Stratford, Connecticut Dresser Canada, Inc. 54030 Tlalnepantla,
250 E. Main Street 2135 Meadowpine Blvd. Edo De Mexico
Stratford, CT 06614-5145 Mississauga, Tel: (52)55-53-10-72-17
Tel: (203) 385-0399 Ontario L5N 6L5 Canada (52)55-53-10-89-83
Fax: (203) 385-0402 Tel: 905-335-3529 (52)55-53-10-28-29
Fax: 905-826-9106 (52)55-53-10-28-75
E-Mail: Lance_Barette@dresser.com Fax: (52)55-53-10-26-08
E-Mail: mendiet@avantel.net
China
Dresser Industries, Inc. Saudi Arabia
Room #2404, Capital Mansion Dresser Al Rushaid Valve &
No. 6 Xin Yuan Nan Road Beijing, Instrument Co. (DARVICO)
People’s Republic of China 100004 P.O. Box 10145
Tel: 86-10-84862440/1/2/3/4 Jubail Industrial City
Fax: 86-10-84862445 Saudi Arabia 31961
E-Mail: dresser@public3.bta.net.cn Tel: 966-3-341-0278
Fax: 966-3-341-7624
France E-Mail: bill_dumasia@darvico.com
Dresser Europe GmbH E-Mail: sam_dastur@darvico.com
Dresser Instrumentation
206 ZA Le Mandinet Singapore
Rue des Campanules Dresser Singapore
F 77185 Lognes, France Instrument Operations
Tel: 33-1-60372530 Block 1004 Toa Payoh North
Fax: 33-1-60372539 #07-15/17 Singapore 318995
E-Mail: europe@wanadoo.fr Tel: 65-6252-6602
Fax: 65-6252-6603
Germany E-Mail: john.wong@dresser.com.sg
Dresser Europe GmbH
Postfach 11 20 Max-Planck-Str. 1 United Kingdom
D-52499 Baesweiler, Germany Dresser Europe GmbH
Tel: 49-24-01-8080 East Gillibrands, Skelmersdale
Fax: 49-24-01-7027 Lancashire, WN8 9TU
E-Mail: jbiermans@dresserbae.de United Kingdom
Tel: 44-16-95-52600
Germany Fax: 44-16-95-52693
Ebro Electronic GmbH E-Mail: sales@dresser-instrument.co.uk
Peringerstr 10D-85055
Ingolstadt, Germany Venezuela
Tel: 49-84-1-95478-0 Manufactures Petroleras
Fax: 49-84-1-95478-80 Venezolanas (M.P.V.)
E-Mail: info@ebro.de KM 7 Carretera A El Mojan Calle 18,
#15B355 ZONA Ind. Norte Sector
Canchancha Maracaibo Edo
Zulia Venezuela
Tel: 58-261-757-9070
Visit our web site www.ashcroft.com Fax: 58-261-757-9561
E-Mail: contactenos@mapvensa.com
© Dresser, Inc., Dresser Instruments, 250 East Main Street, Stratford, CT 06614, E-Mail: ventasmpv@telcel.net.ve
203-378-8281, 203-378-0499 Fax, www.ashcroft.com
All sales subject to standard terms and conditions of sale. I&M012-10098-5/02 (250-1353H) GBE 5M DPS 4P7/2003
Direct Reading PENBERTHY
10/05
08/01
2000
2100

Replaces
Section
Bulletin

Liquid Level Gages and Gagecocks


Issued
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Flat Glass Gages
Flat Glass Gages Overview ..................................................................................4-7
Low Pressure Flat Glass Gages: Models RL & TL ....................................................8
Medium Pressure Flat Glass Gages: Models RM & TM, RMR & TMR ........................9
High Pressure Flat Glass Gages: Models RH & TH, RHR & THR ..............................10
Large Chamber Flat Glass Gages: Models RLC & TLC ............................................11
Weld Pad Flat Glass Gages: Models RMW & TMW..................................................12
Dimensions for Process Glass................................................................................13
Ultra High Pressure Flat Glass Gages: Model TU ....................................................14
Steam/Water Flat Glass Gages: Models TSL, TSL-F, TSM, TSM-F ..........................15

Offshore Gage Glasses

Table of Contents
Offshore Glass Gages Overview ......................................................................16-17

Tubular Glass Gages


Tubular Glass Gages Overview ........................................................................18-19

Gagecocks
Gagecocks Overview........................................................................................20-21
Flat Glass Gagecocks: Series 100, 200..................................................................22
Flat Glass Gagecocks: Series 300, 400..................................................................23
Flat Glass Gagecocks: Series 500..........................................................................24
Flat Glass Gagecocks: Series 700..........................................................................25
OS&Y Fugitive Emission Gagecocks: Series 550, 750 ............................................26
Flat Glass Gagecocks: Series 600..........................................................................27
Tubular Glass Gagecocks: Series N2, K2................................................................28
Tubular Glass Gagecocks: Series K3 ......................................................................29
Tubular Glass Gagecocks: Series N6......................................................................30
Tubular Glass Gagecocks: Series N7......................................................................31

Accessories
Graph-a-BondTM Gaskets ......................................................................................32
Flat Glass Frost-Proof Illuminators ........................................................................33
Protectors, Illuminators, Extensions,
Heating & Cooling Devices, Valves & Fittings ........................................................34

© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
4
Armored Cover
Flat Glass
Gages
Flat glass gages provide direct
observation of liquid level in a process Gasket
vessel. The process liquid level and
liquid characteristics can be observed
through the glass as it rises and falls in
the gage chamber.
Glass
The six basic components of flat glass
gages are as follows:
Chamber
Pressure retaining element which
Flat Glass Gages Overview

provides rigidity to the gage assembly


and a means to connect the gage to
isolation gagecocks or other vessel Bolts
connections.
Penberthy’s standard chambers have a
flat gasket seat to allow for easy
removal of gasket residue and
fragments. Because the chamber does Cushion
not have a recessed face, the gasket
may be removed quickly with a flat
blade.
Penberthy has an optional chamber with mechanical integrity along the length of Gasket
a recessed gasket seating surface to the chamber. Seals the gap and prevents leaking
meet customer requirements. The cross tie provides a higher strength between the glass and the chamber.
Slots are machined into Penberthy’s chamber due to the reduction of Glass
transparent gage chambers rather than unsupported beam length. Chambers are Contains the process liquid and provides
continuous vision slots. These cross available with PFA (Teflon®), PECTFE the viewing window to the process liquid
ties between vision slots increase the (Halar®), and PETFE (Tefzel®) lining. level.
Cushion
Protects the glass from mechanical stress
points by acting as a buffer between the
glass and cover.
Cover
Protects the glass from mechanical
Standard impact along the sides of the chamber
Gasket Recessed and provides a compression surface for
Chamber Gasket the bolts/studs/nuts to hold the gasket
Chamber and glass tightly against the chamber.
Bolts/Studs/Nuts
Properly torqued gage bolting applies a
uniform compressive load to the gage
assembly for pressure retaining purposes.

Reflex Transparent
© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
5
Multiple Section
Gages
To meet visible glass lengths greater
than Size 9 glass (12.625” [321 mm]),
Penberthy stacks covers along the
length of the single chamber. The
maximum operating pressure and
temperature ordinarily determine the
largest glass size that can be used.
Vision slots are cut according to the
size of the glass used and the
number of sections necessary to
meet the desired vision length or
minimum center to center (vessel
connections). Support brackets
should be attached to larger gages to

Flat Glass Gages Overview


support the weight of the gage 3-section gage Continuous vision Multiple
assembly. on continuous single-section gages section gages
The maximum number of sections chamber on standpipe on standpipe
(covers) that can be used on a single
gage chamber is ten. If the required
liquid level vision length extends Gage Connections
beyond 139.750” [3550 mm], multiple
section gages may be bridled to a End, side and back (typically reflex distance and/or the optimum vision
standpipe or alternately top-bottom only) connections can be machined position for liquid level viewing.
side connected. into the gage chamber to provide end Connections include NPT, BSP, ANSI
users with desired center to center flanged, DIN flanged and socketweld.

Gage Connections

Side Back Connect End


Connect Connect
© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
6
Reflex and
Transparent Gages
Reflex gages have a single vision slot
in which light can enter the gage
chamber to determine liquid level.
Above the liquid level, glass prisms
reflect the surrounding light. Below
the liquid level the liquid fills the Reflex
prisms causing the glass to become
relatively transparent.
Light striking the area of glass
covered by transparent liquid is Transparent
allowed to pass through to the
interior of the gage along the entire
length of the covered prism. The light
is reflected from the back of the
Flat Glass Gages Overview

chamber to the observer. Typically


the chamber appears dark. An
opaque liquid such as milk would
directly reflect the light at the
surface of the prisms, where it
appears as a solid column of white.
Light striking the area of the glass
above the liquid level experiences
internal reflection. Internal reflection
will occur when light attempts to
move from a medium having a given
index of refraction to one having a
lower index of refraction.
through the prism angle), it reflects rather The interface between the liquid and
When the light attempts to move than passes through to the back of the gas occurs where the silvery and
from a higher index of refraction chamber. Except for a focused line of light dark/opaque area intersect.
(glass – 1.47 index of refraction) along the apex of the prism, the
to a lower index of refraction Transparent gages have a vision slot on
surrounding light reflects back to the
(air – 1.00 index of refraction both sides of the chamber. Light enters
observer appearing silvery.
the gage from the side opposite the
observer so that both the level of a
liquid and its characteristics can be seen.
For easier liquid observation in dark
environments, illuminators are available
for use with transparent gages.
Transparent gages may be used for
interface applications.

© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
7
Armored Gages
Armored flat glass gages give users Borosilicate Glass, Aluminosilicate
the ability to visually inspect liquid
characteristics (color, particulate, Glass and Quartz
striations, turbulence) and monitor
relative fill or drain rates in a variety of Borosilicate glass is the most Materials other than quartz limit
applications where vibration, common type of optic material used a gage assembly’s maximum
temperature and/or pressure extremes in Penberthy gages. Borosilicate operating temperature.
rule out level technologies. glass offers good resistance to most
Penberthy offers quartz in its model
End users interested in establishing a chemicals at temperatures at or
TH only. The physical properties of
reliable, easy-to-understand level below 600˚F [316˚C].
quartz require an extremely flat
reference often use flat glass gages to Penberthy uses tempered seating surface. Flatness tolerance
verify electronic level device output at borosilicate glass in its gages to of gasket and cushion seating
plant start-up or routine maintenance improve thermal shock resistance. surfaces on chambers and covers
(especially pressure vessels). The tempering process involves must be maintained to avoid
Other distinct advantages: heating the glass to a glassy torsional or point stresses on the

Flat Glass Gages Overview


transition point and rapidly cooling quartz.
• They require no electrical power. the glass to create compressive
Level can be monitored in remote Shields (e.g., PCTFE, Mica) can be
stress in the outer 1/6 of thickness.
locations where no power is installed to prolong the life of
available. In event of a power failure, Aluminosilicate glass has a higher transparent flat glass in corrosive or
the flat glass gage is not effected. viscosity and a lower thermal erosive environments such as
expansion coefficient compared to hydrofluoric acid, sodium hydroxide
• They are not dependent on most or steam.
liquid properties. Multiple liquids can borosilicate glass. Aluminosilicate
be processed through the same glass is commonly used where
vessel without concerns for density, process temperatures are greater
surface turbulence, di-electric, than 600˚F [316˚C] but are at or
conductivity, etc. below 800˚F [427˚C].
• They’re suitable for vacuum Fused quartz is made from
application. crystalline silica with few impurities
• They provide a near-unlimited length (50 ppm by weight). The highest
of measure. temperature rating, 1000ºF [538ºC],
is achieved by using quartz.
• They’re non-intrusive.
Temperature Ranges for Commonly Used Optical Material

Illuminator Assembly
(see p. 33 for more information)

© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
8
Low Pressure Flat Glass Gages
for less demanding Model RL – Model TL –
process conditions... Reflex Low Pressure Transparent Low Pressure
Penberthy’s low pressure gages are
designed to maximize the mechanical
and economical advantages of ductile
iron covers.
All materials in low pressure gages
conform to ASTM specifications.
RL gages can achieve pressures to
2400 psig [16550 kPa] @ 100ºF
[38ºC] and TL gages can achieve
Low Pressure Flat Glass Gages

pressures to 2000 psig [13790 kPa]


@ 100ºF [38ºC] when manufactured
with size 1 glass – see ratings
table below.
Penberthy does not recommend
low pressure gages for
steam/water applications.

Model RL
Pressure/Temperature

Standard/Optional Features
CONNECTION TYPE STANDARD OPTIONAL
End Connections
Threaded
1/2” NPTF X
Model TL 3/4” NPTF X
Pressure/Temperature Socketweld
1/2” female X
3/4” female X
Flanged X
Side or Back (typically reflex only) Connections
Threaded
1/2” NPTF X
3/4” NPTF X
Socketweld
1/2” female X
3/4” female X
Flanged X

NOTE: Pressure/Temperature ratings shown for standard


gasket, otherwise see chart on page 13.

© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
9
Medium Pressure Flat Glass Gages
for most common Model RM – Model TM –
process conditions... Relfex Medium Pressure Transparent Medium Pressure
Strength and versatility make
Penberthy’s medium pressure gages
ideal for most common process
conditions. Offshore specification
2600.1 is preferred with medium
pressure gages in offshore and other
corrosive environments.

Medium Pressure Flat Glass Gages


All materials in medium pressure gages
conform to ASTM specifications.
RM gages can achieve pressures to
3000 psig [20680 kPa] @ 100˚F [38˚C]
and TM gages can achieve pressures to
2500 psig [17240 kPa] @ 100˚F [38˚C]
when manufactured with size 1 glass –
see ratings table below.
Although not designed for thermal
cycling, Penberthy allows use of
medium pressure gages for steam/
water applications due to historical
precendence - see Application Report
2781 in Penberthy Catalog.

Model RM
Pressure/Temperature

Standard/Optional Features
CONNECTION TYPE STANDARD OPTIONAL
End Connections
Threaded
1/2” NPTF X
3/4” NPTF X
Socketweld
1/2” female X
Model TM 3/4” female X
Pressure/Temperature Flanged X
Side or Back (typically reflex only) Connections
Threaded
1/2” NPTF X
3/4” NPTF X
Socketweld
1/2” female X
3/4” female X
Flanged X
Chambers
Recessed Gasket X
*Gages with recessed gaskets are designed with the
NOTE: Pressure/Temperature ratings shown for standard letter R at the end of the Model Number (i.e. RMR)
gasket, otherwise see chart on page 13.

For environmental Nace MR0175 &/or MR0103 gages, pressure © 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
de-rating is required
10
High Pressure Flat Glass Gages
Heavy duty Model RH – Model TH –
construction for high Reflex High Pressure Transparent High Pressure
pressure resistance...
Penberthy engineers its high pressure
cover to allow maximum rated
pressure regardless of glass size.
High pressure gages resist torsional
stresses exceptionally well to provide
a process gage for the most
demanding applications.
High Pressure Flat Glass Gages

All materials in high pressure gages


conform to ASTM specifications.
RH gages can achieve pressures to
4000 psig [27580 kPa] @100˚F [38˚C]
and TH gages can achieve pressures
to 3000 psig [20680 kPa] @ 100˚F
[38˚C] for all glass sizes – see ratings
table below.
Penberthy does not recommend high
pressure gages for steam/water
applications. They are designed for high
pressure, but low thermal cycle duty.

Model RH
Pressure/Temperature

Standard/Optional Features
CONNECTION TYPE STANDARD OPTIONAL
End Connections
Threaded
1/2” NPTF X
3/4” NPTF X
Socketweld
Model TH
1/2” female X
Pressure/Temperature 3/4” female X
Flanged X
Side or Back (typically reflex only) Connections
Threaded
1/2” NPTF X
3/4” NPTF X
Socketweld
1/2” female X
3/4” female X
Flanged X
Chambers
NOTE: Pressure/Temperature ratings shown for standard
gasket, otherwise see chart on page 13. Recessed Gasket* X
For environmental Nace MR0175 &/or MR0103 gages, pressure *Gages with recessed gaskets are designed with the
de-rating is required letter R at the end of the Model Number (i.e. RHR) © 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
11
Large Chamber Flat Glass Gages
for turbulent surface Model RLC – Model TLC –
or extremely Reflex Large Chamber Transparent Large Chamber
transparent liquids...
Combining high pressure covers and a
large cylindrical chamber, these gages can
improve accuracy in determining turbulent
vessel liquid levels. In addition to
simulating the function of a stilling well and
providing a liquid column approximately
four times the diameter of standard gages,

Large Chamber Flat Glass Gages


large chamber gages can provide end
connections up to 2” NPTF that can
accommodate various instrumentation.
All materials in large chamber gages
conform to ASTM specifications.
RLC gages can achieve pressures to
2400 psig [16550 kPa] @ 100˚F [38˚C]
and TLC gages can achieve pressures to
1580 psig [10890 kPa] @ 100˚ F [38˚C]
for all glass sizes – see ratings table below.
Penberthy does not recommend large
chamber gages for steam/water
applications.

Model RLC
Pressure/Temperature

Standard/Optional Features
CONNECTION TYPE STANDARD OPTIONAL
End Connections
Threaded
Model TLC 1/2” NPTF X
Pressure/Temperature 3/4”-2” NPTF X
Socketweld
1/2”-2” female X
Flanged X
Side or Back (typically reflex only) Connections
Threaded
1/2” NPTF X
3/4” NPTF X
Socketweld
1/2” female X
3/4” female X
X
NOTE: Pressure/Temperature ratings shown for standard
gasket, otherwise see chart on page 13. Flanged
For environmental Nace MR0175 &/or MR0103 gages, pressure
de-rating is required © 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
12
Weld Pad Flat Glass Gages
for direct mounting to Model RMW – Model TMW –
vessel wall... Reflex Medium Weld Pad Transparent Medium Weld Pad
For application involving high vibration,
highly viscous liquids or liquids with
considerable amounts of solids,
Penberthy offers end users a flat or
radius weld pad gage. Because there
are no nipples through which the
process liquid enters the gage,
clogging potential is eliminated.
When welding the gage to a vessel, it is
extremely important to take proper
Weld Pad Flat Glass Gages

precautions to prevent warpage of the


chamber. Penberthy strongly
recommends the use of an optional
steel spacer for welding.
After welding, it is important to check
the flatness of all glass seating surfaces
as described in Penberthy’s Installation,
Operation, and Maintenance manual.
All materials in weld pad gages conform
to ASTM specifications. RMW and TMW
gages can achieve pressures to 2000 psig
[13790 kPa] @ 100˚F [38˚C] –when
manufactured with size 1 glass
– see table below.

Standard/Optional Features
FEATURE STANDARD OPTIONAL
Flat Pad X
Radius Pad
2” [51 mm] min. radius through
12” [305 mm] max. radius X
Isolable Gagecocks X
Isolable
Gagecocks – Model RMW Model TMW
Weld Pad Pressure/Temperature Pressure/Temperature
Gage

Integral gagecocks can be added to


Penberthy’s weld pad gages. These
gagcocks allow the gage to be isolated for
maintenance without lowering the liquid
level below the gage.
Penberthy does not recommend weld
pad gages for steam/water applications.
NOTE: Pressure/Temperature ratings shown for standard gasket, otherwise see chart on page 13.
For environmental Nace MR0175 &/or MR0103 gages, pressure de-rating is required

© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
13
Dimensions for Process Gages
5 Section Gage End Connected
Sections Model Glass Size Visible Length Overall Length
Size 9 Glass inch mm inch mm
1 RL/TL 1 3.750 95 5.250 133
1 RM(R)/TM(R) 2 4.750 121 6.250 159
1 RMW/TMW 3 5.750 146 7.250 184
1 4 6.750 171 8.250 210
1 5 7.875 200 9.375 238
1 6 9.125 232 10.625 270
1 7 10.250 260 11.750 298
1 8 11.875 302 13.375 340
1 9 12.625 321 14.125 359

Dimensions for Process Gages


2 4 15.000 381 16.500 419
2 5 17.250 438 18.750 476
2 6 19.750 502 21.250 540
2 RL 7 22.000 559 23.500 597
2 TL 8 25.250 641 26.750 679
2 RM 9 26.750 679 28.250 718
3 RMR 6 30.375 772 31.875 810
3 TM 7 33.750 857 35.250 895
3 TMR 8 38.625 981 40.125 1019
3 RH 9 40.875 1038 42.375 1076
4 RHR 7 45.500 1156 47.000 1194
4 TH 8 52.000 1321 53.500 1359
4 THR 9 55.000 1397 56.500 1435
5 RLC 7 57.250 1454 58.750 1492
5 TLC 8 65.375 1661 66.875 1699
5 RMW 9 69.125 1756 70.625 1794
6 TMW 8 78.750 2000 80.250 2038
6 9 83.250 2115 84.750 2153
7 8 92.125 2340 93.625 2378
7 9 97.375 2473 98.875 2511
8 8 105.500 2680 107.000 2718
8 9 111.500 2832 113.000 2870
9 8 118.875 3019 120.375 3058
9 9 125.625 3191 127.125 3229
Pressure/Temperature 10 8 132.250 3359 133.750 3397
De-Rating for Material 10 9 139.750 3550 141.250 3588
Other Than Standard
Gasket Maximum Pressure at specified temperature psig [kPa]
Material 100˚F [38˚C] 250˚F [121˚C] 300˚F [149˚C] 400˚F [204˚C] 500˚F [260˚C]
Buna-N 300 [2070] 225 [1550] – – – – – –
EPDM 300 [2070] 225 [1550] 210 [1450] – – – –
Neoprene 300 [2070] 225 [1550] 210 [1450] – – – –
Viton® (FKM) 300 [2070] 225 [1550] 210 [1450] 180 [1240] – –
Daikin® (PCTFE) 300 [2070] 225 [1550] 210 [1450] 180 [1240] – –
Teflon® (PTFE) 300 [2070] 225 [1550] 210 [1450] 180 [1240] 150 [1030]

Graphite ribbon (Grafoil®) and non-asbestos (Nobestos D-7301®) gasket ratings


are derived from performance curves. © 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
14
Ultra-High Pressure Flat Glass Gages

for extraordinary Model TU -


pressure and vapor Transparent Ultra High
requirements... Pressure
The method of clamping and sealing
the glass differs from other gages in
that the glass does not experience
stress concentrations imposed by
bolting. The glass becomes a
floating member between two solidly
Ultra-High Pressure Flat Glass Gages

bolted blocks of rigid plate.


The pressure activated seal principle
provides a self adjusting means of
maintaining a tight joint between

Standard/Optional Features
glass and liquid chamber. The
gasket system compensates for
machining variations. CONNECTION TYPE STANDARD OPTIONAL
Because glass can take a End Connections
tremendous amount of evenly loaded Threaded
compression, the gage can withstand 1/2” NPTF X
3/4” NPTF X
extremely demanding pressure
Socketweld
requirements.
1/2” female X
All materials in TU gages conform to 3/4” female X
ASTM specifications. TU gages can Flanged X
achieve pressures to 6000 psig Side Connections
[41370 kPa] @ 250˚F [121˚C]. Threaded
Pressure rating is not glass size 1/2” NPTF X
dependent. A higher temperature 3/4” NPTF X
rating 400˚F [204˚C] @ 6000 psig Socketweld
[41370 kPa] can be achieved by 1/2” female X
using Viton®. Teflon® can achieve 3/4” female X
500˚F [260˚C] @ 6000 psig Flanged X
[41370 kPa].
Penberthy does not recommend Dimensions
ultra-high pressure gages for
steam/water applications. Glass End Connected
Visible Length Overall Length
Sections Model
Size
Model TU inch mm inch mm
1 TU 1 3.531 90 6.500 165
Pressure/Temperature 1 TU 3 5.531 140 8.500 216
1 TU 4 6.531 166 9.500 241
1 TU 5 7.656 194 10.625 270
1 TU 7 10.031 255 13.000 330
2 TU 1 8.875 225 11.750 298
2 TU 3 12.875 327 15.750 400
2 TU 4 14.875 378 17.750 451
2 TU 5 17.125 435 20.000 508
2 TU 7 21.875 556 24.750 629
3 TU 3 20.219 514 23.094 587
3 TU 4 23.219 590 26.094 663
3 TU 5 26.594 675 29.469 749
NOTE: Pressure/Temperature ratings shown for standard 3 TU 7 33.719 856 36.594 929
gasket, otherwise see chart on page 13.
© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
15
Steam/Water Flat Glass Gages
for dynamic thermal TSL Configurations
environments... TSL TSL TSL TSL-F TSL-F TSL-F
1 section 2 section 3 section 1 section 2 section 3 section
Designed to expand and contract
during dynamic thermal conditions,
these steam/water gages have extra-
heavy construction incorporating a
wide chamber. Thermally induced
gage stresses are absorbed by the
linear expansion within the stuffing
box or the expansion loop.
TSL stuffing box or TSL-F flanged

Steam/Water Flat Glass Gages


configurations can be used for
steam/water service at or below 650 TSM Configurations
psig [4480 kPa]. TSM stuffing box or TSM TSM TSM TSM-F TSM-F TSM-F
1 section 2 section 3 section 1 section 2 section 3 section
TSM-F flanged configurations can be
used at or below 1500 psig
[10340 kPa] steam/water service.
Mica shields and Belleville washers
are standard to improve the long term
sealing of the gage. All materials
conform to ASME/ASTM specifications.
The following gagecocks are suggested
for use with steam/water gages:
Model 730 OS&Y - for Model TSL
and TSM gage having flanged gage Standard/Optional Features
connections;
FEATURE TSL TSL-F TSM TSM-F
Model 780 OS&Y - for Model TSL Std Opt Std Opt Std Opt Std Opt
and TSM gage having stuffing box Connections
connections. Stuffing box nipple 3/4” dia. X X
Flanged X X
Model TSL, TSL-F, TSM, TSM-F Expansion Loop X X
Pressure/Temperature Mica Shields X X X X
1500

1400 TSM, TSM - F =


1300

1200
TSL, TSL - F = Dimensions
1100 Sections Model Glass Visible Length
1000 Size inch mm
Pressure psig

900

800 1 6 9.000 229


700
1 7 10.125 257
600

500
1 TSL 9 12.500 318
400 2 TSL-F 6 17.000 432
300
2 TSM 7 19.250 489
200

100
2 TSM-F 9 24.000 610
0 3 6 25.000 635 Stuffing Box
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700

Temperature ºF
3 7 28.375 721 Nipple
3 9 35.500 902
NOTE: Pressure/ Temperature ratings shown for standard gasket.
© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
16
Offshore Gage Glasses
1 2 3 After experiencing a problem on
one of their offshore rigs, a
major oil company requested that
Tyco initiate a research program
to develop better corrosion protection
for offshore gage glass. To assess
the relative strengths and
weaknesses of various coatings and
materials commonly used as
“offshore protection,” we subjected a
number of our own gages as well as
competitive models to an accelerated
Offshore Gage Glass Overview

corrosion/weathering test (ASTM


1 Two years actual 2&3 Two years offshore exposure simulated in lab B117). While the tests were
offshore exposure
performed in a controlled laboratory
environment, the exposure to over
4 5 6 2500 hours of heat and salt spray
provided a corrosive environment that
was judged to be comparable to two
years of actual offshore use.
Above left is a Penberthy gage
(figure 1) which was used offshore for
two years in the Gulf of Mexico. It
was prepared according to an
industry-accepted specification which
the oil company had established for
its offshore equipment. Badly
corroded and potentially dangerous,
4 Flourocarbon and Moly 5 Three-part coating 6 Three-part coating as this gage establishes a benchmark
DiSulfide coatings too easliy applied to individual parts applied by Penberthy for the kind of corrosion and
penetrated prior to gage assembly provides true “offshore
controls corrosion-except protection” deterioration that typically occurs
on hardware

Competitive comparison shows the need for concern


in selecting a gage with “offshore” design
As important as coatings are in making minor abrasions can cause the The following diagrams illustrate the
a gage corrosion-resistant, their value tempered gage glass to lose most relative vulnerability of the glass on
can be rendered useless if the glass is of its pressure containing ability. competitive models.
left vulnerable to other types of
Exposed Glass Exposed Glass Exposed Glass Exposed Glass
damage. The total protection of gage
glass is critical in complementing the
effectiveness of offshore coatings.
The Penberthy offshore gage design is
unique in its ability to completely
isolate the gage glass from abrasive
forces. This complete protection is
important because even seemingly Other U.S. European Japanese Latin American
Manufacturer Manufacturer Manufacturer Manufacturer

© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
17

during two years of actual offshore


use. Corrosion on interior surfaces Durable coatings complement the
has put stress on the glass, making it effectiveness of inorganic zinc
vulnerable to failure. Also, the heavily
Polyurethane Top-Coat
corroded bolts cannot be retorqued in (2 to 3 mil)
routine maintenance. Its glossy tile-like finish dramatically upgrades
the weather resistance of the layered coatings.
As a result of these tests, Tyco Provides excellent added protection from
chemicals and abrasion as well.
has developed a unique three-part
coating, applied to the components Epoxy Tie-Coat (4 to 8 mil)
before the gage is assembled, to Epoxy polyamide complements the zinc primer
by providing added abrasion resistance and
provide unprecedented gage

Offshore Gage Glasses Overview


protection from weathering. Also provides an
protection in offshore application. effective base for the topcoat.

The Penberthy gage also includes a Inorganic Zinc Primer (2.5 to 3 mil)
variety of unique design features to This self-curing coating produces a tight bond to
further extend gage life. prepare surfaces and protects steel galvanically.
Meets performance requirements of
ANSI N 101.2-1972 and N 5.12-1974.

Three Protective Coatings


First, and prior to assembly, all metal
parts are coated with a layer of
sacrificial inorganic zinc. Then, after
assembly, they are sprayed with an
epoxy tie coat and urethane finish.

Stainless Steel Hardware


Nuts, bolts and washers are stainless
steel to assure that they will never rust
and that nuts can be periodically
retorqued, as required. Washers,
in turn, prevent the protective
coatings on the cover from being
scraped off.

Tough PMMA Panel


Attached with a durable silicone sealant,
this strong clear polymethylmethacrylate
panel fully protects the glass front from
flying sand and debris.

Deep Wall Cover


Gage cover extends the full depth
of the glass and protects it laterally from
sandblasting and other abrasives from
nearby installation and maintenance
operations.

© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
18
Tubular Glass Gages
for cost effective
level indication...
Penberthy Tubular Glass Gages are
used to register liquid levels in low to
medium pressure applications. They
are externally mounted to the vessel
and use tubular glass to provide
direct visual verification of the liquid
level present. The transparent glass
also provides an excellent means to
optically inspect fluid characteristics.
Tubular Glass Gages Overview

Liquid enters the gage through the


lower tank connection. The meniscus
present in the glass tube corresponds
to the liquid level in the tank.
Available accessories allow you to Wire Refractive Refractive Sheet
customize each gage to your specific Guard Rod Protector Protector Metal
application requirements. These (Glass Union) Protector
options can also provide enhanced
level indication and protection for the the gage fills, liquid passes in front of
tubular glass. the stripes. The refractive nature of
the liquid changes the stripe angle
Protectors showing the highly visible contrast
Tubular glass is susceptible to between liquid presence and
accidental breakage. To counteract absence.
this condition, Penberthy offers a
If water is the liquid used, the stripes
variety of protectors. These
become horizontal. Liquids with a
protectors prevent damage to the
refractive index less than water will
glass, but do not restrict level
alter the angle less, higher indexes
indication capability. In some cases
will alter the angles more. The
the protector actually enhances it.
refractive protector is designed for use Plastic
Protectors can be adapted to fit most Protector
with standard tubular glass.
major manufacturers’ gagecocks.
Guard Rods – Two or four metallic Internal Tubes
rods placed next to the glass tube. A stainless steel internal heating or
cooling tube that passes through the Wire Glass
Plastic or Wire Glass – A transparent length of the tubular glass can be used Protector
box surrounding the tubular glass in conjunction with an offset pattern
constructed from either clear plastic or gagecock and high pressure glass.
wire glass.
Glass Union
Sheet Metal – Two pieces of sheet Intended for use in gages over 48” in
metal formed to protect both sides of height. It allows you to join two pieces
the tubular glass. The front and back of glass within the same gage. This
are left open to facilitate easy viewing. increases the length of the gage, yet
Refractive – An extruded aluminum maintains the same pressure/
channel with your choice of either a temperature rating as the individual
polymer or glass cover. The interior pieces of glass. Glass unions should
is a white anodized finish with 45º be used in conjunction with the
angle red stripes on the back wall. As refractive protector to provide Glass Union
mechanical stability.
© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
19
Pressure/Temperature Ratings for Gages with a Single Piece of Tubular Glass (Both 5/8” and 3/4”)
Center to Center No Corrosion up to 150ºF [66ºC] Steam Boiler Service Up to 425ºF [218ºC]
Distance For Vessel High Heavy Red High Heavy Red
Connections Pressure Wall Line Pressure Wall Line
Inches [mm] Psig [kPa] Psig [kPa]
10 [ 254] 410 [2830] 600 [4140] 340 [2340] 310 [2140] 345 [2380] 275 [1900]
15 [ 381] 385 [2650] 600 [4140] 310 [2140] 280 [1930] 325 [2240] 265 [1830]
20 [ 508] 355 [2450] 600 [4140] 285 [1960] 265 [1830] 315 [2170] 260 [1790]
25 [ 635] 300 [2070] 580 [4000] 260 [1790] 250 [1720] 300 [2070] 250 [1720]
30 [ 762] 275 [1900] 550 [3790] 230 [1590]
35 [ 889] 240 [1650] 500 [3450] 200 [1380]
40 [1016] 210 [1450] 420 [2890] 180 [1240]
45 [1143] 200 [1380] 360 [2480] 170 [1170] NOT RECOMMENDED
50 [1270] 180 [1240] 340 [2340] 160 [1100]

Tubular Glass Gages Overview


55 [1397] 150 [1030] N/A 140 [ 970]
60 [1524] 140 [ 970] N/A 120 [ 830]
65 [1651] 125 [ 860] N/A 100 [ 690]
70 [1778] 100 [ 690] N/A 90 [ 620]

Using secured Glass Unions and multiple pieces of tubular glass will increase the pressure/temperature rating over that of an
equivalent length of single glass.
Temperature Ratings for Typical Packing Material Material Specifications for Glass Unions and Hydraulic Adapters
Maximum Temperature Part Steel Brass 316 STS
Packing Type
Rating ºF [ºC] Glass Union X X X
Grafoil ® (Standard) 425 [218] Hydraulic Adapters X X X
Teflon ® 425 [218]
Neoprene ® 300 [149]
Viton ® 400 [204]

Options Available for the Different Types of Tubular Glass


OPTIONS
Glass Type Gagecocks Hydraulic Guard Plastic or Wire Sheet Refractive Internal
(Both 5/8” and 3/4”) Adapters Rods Glass Protector Metal Protector Tube

High Pressure X X X X X X X
Heavy Wall X X X X X
Red Line X X X X X
Glass Union X X X X

Hydraulic Adapters
Hydraulic Adapters are used in place
of gagecocks for connecting the gage to
your vessel. They attach directly to
the ends of the tubular glass,
providing a 1/2” NPT male
connection. This allows you to
incorporate most standard hydraulic
connections currently available.

Hydraulic Adapter
© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
20
Gagecocks:
Flat Glass and Tubular Glass
Offset and straight Gagecock Connections
pattern designs for
flat glass and tubular Spherical
glass gages Union
Penberthy offers offset and straight
pattern gagecocks that isolate the gage
chamber from the liquid contents of
Flanged Solid
the vessel. Shank
Offset gagecocks have an advantage
of permitting the inside of the gage Socket
glass to be cleaned easily with a Weld
minimum of disassembly. By
removing the vent and drain plugs
Union
Gagecocks Overview

(or other connection), a straight


NPT-M
passage through the gage chamber
is opened. A brush can be inserted
through the gagecock vent and drain Gagecock Bodies
for glass cleaning.
OFFSET STRAIGHT
To prevent rapid loss of fluid in the
event of accidental glass breakage,
Penberthy supplies its gagecocks with
automatic ball check shut-off. Should
the glass break, the pressure drop
causes the ball checks to seat to
prevent loss of tank contents.
To unseat these ball checks during
the liquid level readings, the tip of the (x)30 Series (x)20 Series Offset
gagecock stem has an extension that Offset Pattern and Straight Pattern
pushes the ball away from its seat
while allowing the gage column to fill DIMENSIONS (Flat Glass)
as liquid contents pass around the
To obtain the maximum length permissible for given vessel center-to-center
ball. Stainless steel retainers prevent
dimension using 1/2” nipples:
reverse seating of balls or loss of
balls during installation. Maximum Gage Length =
(Gagecock Center-to Center Dimension) - (Dimension X)
Both upper and lower gagecocks in each
set are equipped with horizontal ball To determine the overall length of nipples needed to make up a gage set for
checks. Balls are located on the vessel fixed vessel center-to-center dimension using 1/2” nipples:
side of the gagecock seats.
Combined Nipple Length =
Gagecocks with ball checks omitted (Gagecock Center-to-Center Dimension) - (Gage Length + Dimension Y)
meet ASME boiler requirements. As an
Overall nipple length can be divided between nipples to suit the application.
alternative method to ASME boiler
Minimum length required for each nipple is: 1-1/8” for 1/2” NPT nipple;
requirements, the lower gagecock is
1-3/8” for 3/4” NPT nipple.
available with an optional vertical rising
ball check located in the offset portion of Penberthy Floating Shank union vessel connection permits gagecock
the gagecock body, and the upper center-to-center dimension to vary 3/8” [9.5 mm] total from actual vessel
gagecock has a leaky seat. center-to-center dimension.

© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
21

Series 100, 200, 300, 400 Standard Gagecock


and 600 Gagecocks
These gagecocks have inside screw
threads that are wetted by the liquid.
They are offered with a wide range of
features in both straight and offset
pattern designs (600 Series - offset only).
Series 500 and 700
Gagecocks - OS&Y
These are outside screw and yoke
gagecocks that are used for high
temperature or corrosive-liquid
applications. The OS&Y design
isolates the stem threads from the Vacuum Seat
liquid. The stem seats in a reciprocative

Gagecocks Overview
instead of a rotary fashion.
Series N2, K2, K3, N6 and
N7 Gagecocks
Penberthy tubular glass gagecocks
are for use in lower pressure
applications. They are available with
many of the same combinations of
features described above for a range
of uses, including union or solid
shank vessel connections and a
choice of stuffing box sizes for Backseating Stem
various glass diameters. All stuffing (Union Bonnet Gagecocks only)
box connections are designed for
positive seal with minimum radial
compression. Both straight and
offset pattern gagecocks are offered.

Vertically Rising
Ball Check

DIMENSIONS (Tubular Glass)


To obtain the length of glass tubing needed to make up gage set for given
vessel center-to-center dimension:
Glass Tubing Length =
(Vessel Center-to-Center Dimension) - (Dimension X)
To obtain the length of guard rods for given gagecock center-to-center
dimension:
Guard Rod Length =
(Gagecock Center-to-Center Dimension) - (Dimension Y)

© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
22
Straight Pattern Flat Glass Gagecocks
1500 lb. ANSI rating – Pressures to Series 100 Series 200
4000 psi @ +100ºF [27580 kPa
@ +38ºC]
Temperature Ranges from
-300ºF to +750ºF [-184ºC to +399ºC]
130 230
Design Features
The 100 and 200 series includes Standard/Optional Features
Straight Pattern Flat Glass Gagecocks

models 120/220 and 130/230 120 220 130 230


with these standard features: FEATURE Std Opt Std Opt Std Opt Std Opt
Pattern
• Straight pattern Straight X X X X
Bonnet
• Integral bonnet (100 series) Integral X X
• Union bonnet (200 series) Union X X
Gage Connection
• Union Vessel connection Union 1/2” NPTF X X
1/2” NPTM X X
• Gage connection 3/4” NPTF X X
Model 120/220 - Union 3/4” NPTM X X
Rigid 1/2” NPTF X X
Model 130/230 - Rigid 3/4” NPTF X X
Socketweld 1/2” Female X X X X
• Ball Check Shutoff 1/2” Male X X
• Integral seat (100 series) 3/4” Male X X
3/4” Female X X
Threaded renewable seat (200 series) Flanged X X X X
Spherical Union 1/2” NPTF X X
A variety of optional features are 1/2” NPTM X X
3/4” NPTM X X
available when specified. Vessel Connection
Union 1/2” NPTF X X X X
Optional materials can be specified for 1/2” NPTM X X X X
the gagecock body and trim. (Trim consists 3/4” NPTM X X X X
1” NPTM (non floating) X X X X
of the stem, stem packing retainer, ball Solid Shank 1/2” NPTM X X X X
3/4” NPTM X X X X
check, and seat (200 series only)). Standard 1” NPTM X X X X
and optional materials conform to ASTM Socketweld 1/2” Male X X X X
3/4” Male X X X X
Specifications. 1” Male X X X X
Flanged X X X X
ASME Boiler Code Spherical Union 1/2” NPTF
1/2” NPTM
X X X
X
X
X X X
Series 100 and 200 gagecock sets that 3/4”NPTM X X X X
are acceptable for ASME Boiler Code are Vent/Drain Connection
1/2” NPTF X X X X
supplied with ball check shut-offs 3/4” NPTF X X X X
omitted. Ball Check Shut-Off
Horizontal Lower and Upper Gagecocks X X X X
Center-to-Center Omitted *
Vacuum - Horizontal Upper and Lower
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

Dimensions (see p. 20) Seat


Integral X X
Threaded (Renewable) X X
Model Dimension X Dimension Y Backseating Stem X X
inches [cm] inches [cm]
Handwheel
120/220 5-5/8 [14.9] 3-3/8 [9.2] w/ Standard Pitch Threads X X X X
w/ Quick Closing Thread X X X X
130/230 2-5/8 [7.3] 3/8 [1.6] Lever
w/ Quick Closing Thread (1/4 turn) X X X X
* Acceptable for ASME Service
Pressure/Temperature
Maximum working pressure, psi [kPa] at temperatures to-
Construction -300ºF [-184ºC] -150ºF [-101ºC] -20ºF [-29ºC] 100ºF [38ºC] 200ºF [93ºC] 300ºF [149ºC] 400ºF [204ºC] 500ºF [260ºC] 550ºF [288ºC] 750ºF [399ºC]
psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa]

Forged Steel 4000 [27580] 4000 [27580] 3900 [26890] 3815 [26300] 3730 [25720] 3525 [24300] 3355 [23130] 2620 [18060]
Stainless Steel 4000 [27580] 4000 [27580] 4000 [27580] 4000 [27580] 3900 [26890] 3815 [26300] 3730 [25720] 3525 [24300] 3355 [23130] 2755 [18990]

© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
23
Offset Pattern Flat Glass Gagecocks
1500 lb. ANSI rating – Pressures to Series 300 Series 400
4000 psi @ +100ºF [27580 kPa
@ +38ºC]
Temperature Ranges from
-300ºF to +750ºF [-184ºC to +399ºC]
330 430
Design Features
The 300 and 400 series includes
models 320/420 and 330/430 Standard/Optional Features
with these standard features:
320 420 330 430

Offset Pattern Flat Glass Gagecocks


FEATURE Std Opt Std Opt Std Opt Std Opt
• Offset pattern Pattern
• Integral bonnet (300 series) Offset X X X X
Bonnet
• Union bonnet (400 series) Integral X X
• Union vessel connection Union X X
Gage Connection
• Gage connection Union 1/2” NPTF X X
Model 320/420 - Union 1/2” NPTM X X
3/4” NPTF X X
Model 330/430 - Rigid 3/4” NPTM X X
Rigid 1/2” NPTF X X
• Ball Check Shutoff 3/4” NPTF X X
Socketweld 1/2” Female X X X X
• Integral seat (300 series) 1/2” Male X X
Threaded renewable seat (400 series) 3/4” Male X X
3/4” Female X X
A Variety of optional features are Flanged X X X X
Spherical Union 1/2” NPTF X X
available when specified. 1/2” NPTM X X
3/4” NPTM X X
Optional materials can be specified for Vessel Connection
the gagecock body and trim. (Trim consists Union 1/2” NPTF X X X X
1/2” NPTM X X X X
of the stem, stem packing retainer, ball 3/4” NPTM X X X X
check, and seat (400 series only)). Standard 1” NPTM (non floating) X X X X
and optional materials conform to ASTM Solid Shank 1/2” NPTM X X X X
3/4” NPTM X X X X
Specifications. 1” NPTM X X X X
Socketweld 1/2” Male X X X X
ASME Boiler Code 3/4” Male
1” Male
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Series 300 and 400 gagecock sets that are Flanged X X X X
acceptable for ASME Boiler Code are available Spherical Union 1/2” NPTF X X X X
1/2” NPTM X X X X
as an option. Model 320/420 gagecock sets 3/4”NPTM X X X X
with this option can be supplied either with Vent/Drain Connection
1/2” NPTF X X X X
ball check shutoffs or with them omitted. 3/4” NPTF X X X X
Model 330/430 gagecock sets with this option Ball Check Shut-Off
have the ball check shutoffs omitted. Horizontal Lower and Upper Gagecocks X X X X
Vertical Lower/Horizontal Upper Gagecock * X X
Omitted * X X X X
Center-to-Center Vacuum - Horizontal Upper and Upper X X X X

Dimensions (see p. 20)


Seat
Integral X X
Threaded (Renewable) X X
Model Dimension X Dimension Y Backseating Stem X X
inches [cm] inches [cm] Handwheel
w/ Standard Pitch Threads X X X X
320/420 5-5/8 [14.9] 3-3/8 [9.2]
w/ Quick Closing Thread X X X X
330/430 2-5/8 [7.3] 3/8 [1.6] Lever
w/ Quick Closing Thread (1/4 turn) X X X X
Pressure/Temperature * Acceptable for ASME Service

Maximum working pressure, psi [kPa] at temperatures to-


Construction -300ºF [-184ºC] -150ºF [-101ºC] -20ºF [-29ºC] 100ºF [38ºC] 200ºF [93ºC] 300ºF [149ºC] 400ºF [204ºC] 500ºF [260ºC] 550ºF [288ºC] 750ºF [399ºC]
psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa]

Forged Steel 4000 [27580] 4000 [27580] 3900 [26890] 3815 [26300] 3730 [25720] 3525 [24300] 3355 [23130] 2620 [18060]
Stainless Steel 4000 [27580] 4000 [27580] 4000 [27580] 4000 [27580] 3900 [26890] 3815 [26300] 3730 [25720] 3525 [24300] 3355 [23130] 2755 [18990]

© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
24
Straight Pattern/OS&Y Flat Glass Gagecoks

1500 lb. ANSI rating – Pressures to Series 500


4000 psi @ +100ºF [27580 kPa
@ +38ºC]
Temperature Ranges from
-20ºF to +750ºF [-29ºC to +399ºC]
Straight Pattern/OS&Y Flat Glass Gagecocks

Design Features
The 500 series includes models
520 and 530 with these
standard features:
• Straight pattern
530
• Outside screw and yoke
• Solid shank vessel connection
• Gage connection
Model 520 - Union
Standard/Optional Features
520 530
Model 530 - Rigid FEATURE Std Opt Std Opt
• Ball Check Shutoff Pattern
Straight X X
• Threaded renewable seat OS&Y
• Backseating stem OS&Y X X
Gage Connection
A variety of optional features are Union 1/2” NPTF X
1/2” NPTM X
available when specified. 3/4” NPTF X
3/4” NPTM X
Optional materials can be specified for Rigid 1/2” NPTF X
3/4” NPTF X
the gagecock body and trim. (Trim consists Socketweld 1/2” Female X X
of the stem, stem packing retainer, ball 1/2” Male X
3/4” Male X
check, and seat.) Standard and optional 3/4” Female X
materials conform to ASTM Specifications. Flanged X X
Spherical Union 1/2” NPTF X
1/2” NPTM X
ASME Boiler Code 3/4” NPTM X
Series 500 gagecock sets that are Vessel Connection
Solid Shank 1/2” NPTM X X
acceptable for ASME Boiler Code are 3/4” NPTM X X
available as an option. Gagecock sets 1” NPTM X X
Socketweld 1/2” Male X X
with this option are supplied with ball 3/4” Male X X
1” Male X X
check shut-offs omitted. Flanged X X
Vent/Drain Connection

Center-to-Center
1/2” NPTF X X
3/4” NPTF X X
Ball Check Shut-Off
Dimensions (see p. 20) Horizontal Lower and Upper Gagecocks
Omitted *
X
X
X
X
Model Dimension X Dimension Y Seat
inches [cm] inches [cm] Threaded (Renewable) X X
Backseating Stem X X
520 6-3/8 [16.8] 4-1/8 [11.1] Handwheel
530 4-3/8 [11.7] 2-1/8 [6.0] w/ Standard Pitch Threads X X
w/ Quick Closing Thread (1/4 turn) X X

Pressure/Temperature
* Acceptable for ASME Service

Maximum working pressure, psi [kPa] at temperatures to-


Construction -20ºF [-29ºC] 100ºF[38ºC] 200ºF [93ºC] 300ºF [149ºC] 400ºF [204ºC] 500ºF [260ºC] 550ºF [260ºC] 750ºF [399ºC]
psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa]

Forged Steel 4000 [27580] 4000 [27580] 3900 [26890] 3815 [26300] 3730 [25720] 3525 [24300] 3355 [23130] 2620 [18060]
Stainless Steel 4000 [27580] 4000 [27580] 3900 [26890] 3815 [26300] 3730 [25720] 3525 [24300] 3355 [23130] 2755 [18990]

© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
25
Offset Pattern/OS&Y Flat Glass Gagecocks
1500 lb. ANSI rating - Pressures to Series 700
4000 psi @ +100ºF [27580 kPa
@ +38ºC]
Temperature Ranges from
-20ºF to +750ºF [-29ºC to +399ºC]
Design Features

Offset Pattern/OS&Y Flat Glass Gagecocks


The 700 series includes models
720, 730 and 780 with these
standard features:
• Offset pattern
• Outside screw and yoke 730
• Solid shank vessel connection
• Gage connection
Model 720 - Union
Standard/Optional Features
720 730 780
Model 730 - Rigid FEATURE Std Opt Std Opt Std Opt
Model 780 - Stuffing Box Pattern
• Ball Check Shutoff Offset X X X
OS&Y
• Threaded renewable seat OS&Y X X X
• Backseating Stem Gage Connection
Union 1/2” NPTF X
A Variety of optional features are 1/2” NPTM X
3/4” NPTF X
available when specified. 3/4” NPTM X
Rigid 1/2” NPTF X
Optional materials can be specified for 3/4” NPTF X
Socketweld 1/2” Female X X
the gagecock body and trim. (Trim consists 1/2” Male X
of the stem, stem packing retainer, ball 3/4” Female X
3/4” Male X
check and seat.) Standard and optional Flanged X X
materials conform to ASTM Spherical Union 1/2” NPTF X
1/2” NPTM X
Specifications. 3/4” NPTM X
Stuffing Box 3/4” Adapter Diameter X
ASME Boiler Code Vessel Connection
Series 700 gagecock sets that are Solid Shank 1/2” NPTM X X X
3/4” NPTM X X X
acceptable for ASME Boiler Code are 1” NPTM X X X
available as an option. Ball check Socketweld 1/2” Male X X X
3/4” Male X X X
shut-offs can be omitted; or the Model 1” Male X X
X
720 and 780 can have a vertical Flanged X X X
rising lower ball check and horizontal, Vent/Drain Connection
1/2” NPTF X X X
leaky upper ball check. 3/4” NPTF X X X

Center-to-Center
Ball Check Shut-Off
Horizontal Lower and Upper Gagecocks X X X
Vertical Lower/Horizontal Upper Gagecocks*
Dimensions (see p. 20)
X X
Omitted * X X X
Seat
Model Dimension X Dimension Y Threaded (Renewable) X X
X
inches [cm] inches [cm] Backseating Stem X X
X
Handwheel
720 6-3/8 [16.8] 4-1/8 [11.1] X X
w/ Standard Pitch Threads X
730 4-3/8 [11.7] 2-1/8 [6.0] w/ Quick Closing Thread (1/4 turn) X X X

Pressure/Temperature
* Acceptable for ASME Service

Maximum working pressure, psi [kPa] at temperatures to-


Construction -20ºF [-29ºC] 100ºF[38ºC] 200ºF [93ºC] 300ºF [149ºC] 400ºF [204ºC] 500ºF [260ºC] 550ºF [260ºC] 750ºF [399ºC]
psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa]
Forged Steel 4000 [27580] 4000 [27580] 3900 [26890] 3815 [26300] 3730 [25720] 3525 [24300] 3355 [23130] 2620 [18060]
Stainless Steel 4000 [27580] 4000 [27580] 3900 [26890] 3815 [26300] 3730 [25720] 3525 [24300] 3355 [23130] 2755 [18990]
© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
26
OS&Y Fugitive Emission Gagecocks
1500 lb. ANSI rating – Pressures to Series 550/750
4000 psi @ +100ºF [27580 kPa
@ +38ºC]
Temperature Ranges from
-20ºF to +400ºF [-29ºC to +204ºC]
The “Arrestor” Fugitive
Emission Gagecock
Environmental pollution is a global
OS&Y Fugitive Emission Gagecocks

issue. Environmental regulations


impacting plant operations include
gagecocks. The “ARRESTOR” OS&Y 750
gagecock is utilized with gage glass,
mag gage or other apparatus when
process fluid vapors or gases are
considered to be environmentally harmful. Standard/Optional Features
Penberthy’s “ARRESTOR” gagecocks are 550/551 750/751
FEATURE Std Opt Std Opt
individually serialized and tested to Pattern
meet EPA emission test requirements. Straight X
Offset X
Each (550/750 gagecock) is shipped OS&Y
with its individual test report OS&Y X X
that certifies less than 5 ppm methane Gage Connection
Socketweld 1/2” Female X X
equivalent leak rates using Kalrez® 3/4” Female X X
packing. Kalrez®/Zymaxx™, API 607 Rigid 1/2” NPTF X X
3/4” NPTF X X
III Edition Fire Test qualified, is a Flanged X X
packing material option. Vessel Connection
Socketweld 1/2” Male X X
3/4” Male X X
Models 551/751 are available with 1” Male X X
type-accepted packing, rated to leak Solid Shank 1/2” NPTM X X
3/4” NPTM X X
rates of 500 ppm methane equivalent. 1” NPTM X X
Flanged X X
Optional materials of construction can Vent/Drain Connection
be specified for the gagecock body and Socketweld 1/2” Female X X
3/4” Female X X
trim. (Trim consists of the stem, stem Threaded 1/2” NPTF X X
packing retainer, ball and seat.) 3/4” NPTF X X
Ball Check Shut-Off
Reference Penberthy Material Horizontal Lower and Upper Gagecocks X X
Specification sheets for optional Ball Checks Omitted X X
Seat
materials. Threaded (Renewable) X X
Backseating Stem X X
Handwheel
w/ Standard Pitch Threads X X
w/ Quick Closing Thread (1/4 turn) X X

Pressure/Temperature
Maximum working pressure, psi [kPa] at temperatures to-
Construction -20ºF [-29ºC] 100ºF[38ºC] 200ºF [93ºC] 300ºF [149ºC] 400ºF [204ºC]
psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa]
Forged Steel 4000 [27580] 4000 [27580] 3900 [26890] 3815 [26300] 3730 [25720]
Stainless Steel 4000 [27580] 4000 [27580] 3900 [26890] 3815 [26300] 3730 [25720]

© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
27
Offset Pattern Flat Glass Gagecocks
Pressures to 6000 psi @ +250ºF Series 600
[41370 kPa @ +121ºC]
Temperature Ranges from
-50ºF to +250ºF [-46ºC to +121ºC]
Design Features
The 600 series includes model 630
with these standard features:
• Offset pattern

Offset Pattern Flat Glass Gagecocks


• Union bonnet
• Union vessel connection
• Rigid gage connection
• Ball Check Shutoff
• Threaded renewable seat
• Backseating Stem Standard/Optional Features
630
A Variety of optional features are FEATURE Std Opt
available when specified. Pattern
Straight X
Optional materials can be specified Bonnet
for the gagecock body and trim. (Trim Union X
consists of the stem, stem packing Gage Connection
Rigid 1/2” NPTF X
retainer, ball check and seat.) 3/4” NPTF X
Standard and optional materials Socketweld 1/2” Female X
3/4” Female X
conform to ASTM Specifications. Flanged X
Vessel Connection
Pressure/Temperature Union 1/2” NPTM X
3/4” NPTM X
Range 1” NPTM X
Model 630 gagecocks are rated for Solid Shank 1/2” NPTM X
3/4” NPTM X
pressures up to 6000 psi [41370 kPa] 1” NPTM X
over a temperature range of -50ºF to Socketweld 1/2” Male X
3/4” Male X
+250ºF [-46ºC to +121ºC]. Optional 1” Male X
o-ring materials for vessel tailpipe Flanged X
can be used to increase temperature Vent/Drain Connection
3/8” NPTF X
capability. 1/2” NPTF X
3/4” NPTF X
Ball Check Shut-Off
Horizontal Lower and Upper Gagecocks X
Center-to-Center Omitted *
Seat
X

Dimensions (see p. 20) Threaded (Renewable)


Backseating Stem
X
X
Lever
Model Dimension X Dimension Y
w/ Standard Pitch Threads X
inches [cm] inches [cm]
w/ Quick Closing Thread (1/4 turn) X
630 3-1/8 [8.6] 7/8 [2.9] * Acceptable for ASME Service

© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
28
Offset Pattern Tubular Glass Gagecocks
300 lb. ANSI rating - Pressures to Series N2 Series K2
750 psi @ +100ºF [5170 kPa
@ +38ºC]
Temperature Ranges from
-300ºF to +750ºF [-184ºC to +399ºC]
Design Features
The N2 and K2 series include models
Standard/Optional Features
Offset Pattern Tubular Glass Gagecocks

N2A/K2A, N2B/K2B and N2C/K2C with


these standard features:
N2A K2A N2B K2B N2C K2C
• Offset Pattern FEATURE Std Opt Std Opt Std Opt Std Opt Std Opt Std Opt
Pattern
• Integral bonnet (N2 series) Offset X X X X X X
Bonnet
Union bonnet (K2 series) Integral X X X
• Union vessel connection Union X X X
Gage Connection
• Stuffing Box gage connection Stuffing Box 5/8” Glass Diameter X X
3/4” Glass Diameter X X X X
• Ball check shutoff Vessel Connection

• Integral seat (N2 series) Union 1/2” NPTM X X


3/4” NPTM X X
Threaded renewable seat (K2 series) 1” NPTM (non-floating) X X
Solid Shank 1/2” NPTM X X X X X X
A variety of optional features are 3/4” NPTM X X X X X X
available when specified. 1”NPTM X X X X X X
Socketweld 1/2” Male X X
Optional materials can be specified for 3/4” Male X X
the gagecock body and trim. (Trim con- 1” Male X X
sists of the stem, stem packing retainer, Flanged X X X X X X
ball check, and seat (K2 series only)). Spherical Union 1/2” NPTM X X
3/4” NPTM X X
Standard and optional materials conform Vent Connection
to ASTM Specifications. 3/4” NPTF X X X X X X
Drain Connection
ASME Boiler Code 1/2” NPTF X X X X X X
Ball Check Shut-Off
Series N2 and K2 gagecock sets that are
Horizontal Lower and Upper Gagecocks X X X X X X
acceptable for ASME Boiler Code are Vertical Lower/Horizontal Upper Gagecocks* X X X X X X
available as an option. Omitted* X X X X X X
Vacuum - Horizontal Upper and Lower X X X X X X
For steam/water service in excess of 350 Seat
psi [2400 kPa], transparent flat glass Integral X X X
gages with tubular adapters and shields Threaded (Renewable) X X X
are recommended. Handwheel
w/Standard Pitch Threads X X X X X X
w/Quick Closing Threads X X X X X X
Center-to-Center and Lever
w/Quick Closing Thread (1/4 turn) X X X X X X
Guard Rod Dimensions Guard Rods (4 per gagecock set)
1/4” [6.4 mm] diameter X X X X X X
(see p. 21)
Model Dimension X Dimension Y * Acceptable for ASME Service
inches [cm] inches [cm]

All Models 1-7/8 [4.8] 2-3/8 [6.0]

Pressure/Temperature (Subject to limitations of tubular glass)

Maximum working pressure, psi [kPa] at temperatures to-


MODEL -300˚F [-184˚C] -20˚F [-29˚C] 100˚F [38˚C] 300˚F [149˚C] 400˚F [204˚C] 500˚F [260˚C] 750˚F [399˚C]
psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa]

Steel & 316 STS


N2A/K2A 675 [4650] 675 [4650] 675 [4650] 610 [4210] 590 [4070] 555 [3830] 400 [2760]
Steel & 316 STS
N2B/K2B, N2C/K2C 750 [5170] 750 [5170] 750 [5170] 675 [4650] 655 [4520] 610 [4210] 450 [3100]

© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
29
Offset Pattern Tubular Glass Gagecocks
300 lb. ANSI rating – Pressures to Series K3
500 psi @ +100ºF [3450 kPa
@ +38ºC]
Temperature Range from
-20ºF to +550ºF [-29ºC to +288ºC]
Design Features
The K3 series include models K3A

Offset Pattern Tubular Glass Gagecocks


(150 lb. ASA) and K3B (300 lb. ASA) with
these standard features:
• Offset pattern
• Union bonnet
• Rigid vessel connection
• Stuffing box gage connection
• Ball check shutoff
• Backseating stem Standard/Optional Features
• Drain cock furnished K3A K3B
FEATURE Std Opt Std Opt
A variety of optional features are avail- Pattern
Offset X X
able when specified. Bonnet
Union X X
Optional materials can be specified for Gage Connection
the gagecock trim. (Trim consists of the Stuffing Box 5/8” Glass Dia. X
3/4” Glass Dia. X
stem, stem packing retainer and ball Vessel Connection
check.) Standard and optional materials Solid Shank 1/2” NPTM X
conform to ASTM Specifications. 3/4” NPTM X
Socketweld 1/2” Male X
X
ASME Boiler Code Flanged
3/4” Male
X X
Series K3 gagecock sets that are accept- Drain Connection
3/8” NPTF X X
able for ASME Boiler Code are available Ball Check Shut-Off
as an option. These gagecock valve sets Horizontal Lower and Upper Gagecocks X X
have a vertical rising ball check shut-off Vertical Lower/Horizontal Upper Gagecock* X X
Omitted* X X
in the lower gagecock and a horizontal Seat
leaky ball seat in the upper gagecock. Integral X X
Backseating Stem X X
Handwheel
Center-to-Center and w/Quick Closing Threads (1/4 turn) X X

Guard Rod Dimensions Lever


Lever X X
(see p. 21)
Drain Cock
Model Dimension X Dimension Y Furnished X X
inches [cm] inches [cm] Guard Rods (4 per gagecock set)
1/4” [6.4 mm] diameter X X
All Models 2 [5.1] 2-1/8 [5.4]
* Acceptable for ASME Service

Pressure/Temperature (Subject to limitations of tubular glass)

Maximum working pressure, psi [kPa] at temperatures to-


MODEL -20˚F [-29˚C] 100˚F [38˚C] 200˚F [93˚C] 300˚F [149˚C] 400˚F [204˚C] 500˚F [260˚C] 550˚F[288ºC] Max. Steam Pressure
psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa]

K3A 225 [1550] 225 [1550] 215 [1480] 190 [1310] 170 [1170] 150 [1030] 175 [1210]
K3B 500 [3450] 500 [3450] 475 [3270] 425 [2930] 375 [2580] 325 [2240] 300 [2070] 360 [2480]

© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
30
Straight Pattern Tubular Glass Gagecocks
125 lb. ANSI rating – Pressures to
200 psi @ +100ºF [1380 kPa @ Series N6
+38ºC]
Temperature Range from
-20ºF to +400ºF [-29ºC to +204ºC]
Design Features
Straight Pattern Tubular Glass Gagecocks

The N6 series consists of model N6A


with these standard features:
• Straight pattern
• Integral bonnet
• Rigid vessel connection
• Stuffing box gage connection
• Ball check shutoff
• Drain cock furnished
A variety of optional features are
Standard/Optional Features
N6A
available when specified. FEATURE Std Opt
Pattern
Optional materials can be specified for Straight X
Bonnet
the gagecock trim. (Trim consists of the X
Intergral
stem, stem packing retainer and ball Gage Connection
check.) Standard and optional materials Stuffing Box 5/8” Glass Dia. X
Vessel Connection
conform to ASTM Specifications. Solid Shank 1/2” NPTM X
Socketweld 1/2” Male X
Steam Service Flanged X
Drain Connection
Series N6 gagecock sets for steam X
3/8” NPTF
service are available as an option. Ball Check Shut-Off
Verticle Lower/Horizontal Upper Gagecock X
Vertical Lower/Horizontal Upper (Steam service Seat)* X

Center-to-Center and Omitted*


Seat
X

Guard Rod Dimensions Integral


Handwheel
X

(see p. 21)
w/Standard Pitch thread X
Model Dimension X Dimension Y Drain Cock
inches [cm] inches [cm] Furnished X
Guard Rods (2 per gagecock set)
N6A 1-5/8 [4.1] + 1/2 [1.3] 3/16” [4.8mm] diameter X

* Acceptable for ASME Service

Pressure/Temperature (Subject to limitations of tubular glass)

Maximum working pressure, psi [kPa] at temperatures to-


MODEL WITH STANDARD NEOPRENE GLASS PACKING WITH OPTIONAL TEFLON GLASS PACKING
-20˚F [-29˚C] 100˚F [38˚C] 200˚F [93˚C] 300˚F [149˚C] 400˚F [204˚C] Max. Steam Pressure
psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa]

N6A 200 [1380] 200 [1380] 190 [1310] 165 [1100] 125 [860] 125 [860]

© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
31
Straight Pattern Tubular Glass Gagecocks
Pressures to 500 psi @ +100ºF Series N7
[3450 kPa @ +38ºC]
Temperature Range from
-20ºF to +500ºF [-29ºC to +260ºC]
Design Features
The N7 series include models N7A and
N7B with these design features:

Straight Pattern Tubular Glass Gagecocks


• Straight pattern
• Integral bonnet
• Rigid vessel connection Standard/Optional Features
• Stuffing box gage connection N7A N7B
FEATURE Std Opt Std Opt
• Ball check shutoff Pattern
• Integral drain cock Straight X X
Bonnet
A variety of optional features are available Intergral X X
when specified. Gage Connection
Stuffing Box 5/8” Glass Dia. X
Combinations of optional features and 3/4” Glass Dia. X
materials are available. Each combination Vessel Connection
Solid Shank 1/2” NPTM X
is designated by the model number in the 3/4” NPTM X
Features table. Optional materials can be Socketweld 1/2” Male X
specified for the gagecock body and trim. 3/4” Male X
Flanged X X
(Trim consists of the stem, stem packing Drain Connection
retainer and ball check.) Standard and 3/8” NPTF X X
optional materials are available for service Ball Check Shut-Off
Horizontal Lower and Upper Gagecocks (Iron, STL, STS) X X
as described by ASTM Specifications. Vertical Lower/Horizontal Upper (Bronze) X X
ASME Boiler Code Vertical Lower/Horizontal Upper *
Omitted*
X
X
X
X
Series N7 gagecock sets that are accept- Ball Inspection Plug**
able for ASME Boiler Code are available as Furnished X X
Omitted X X
an option. These gagecock sets have a Seat
vertical rising ball check shut-off in the Integral X X
lower gagecock and a horizontal ball in Handwheel
w/Standard Pitch Thread (Iron, STL, STS) X X
the upper gagecock. w/Quick Closing Threads (Bronze) X X
Drain Cock
Center-to-Center and Integral
Polished Body
X X

Guard Rod Dimensions Bronze X X


(see p. 21) Guard Rods (4 per gagecock set)
3/16” [4.8 mm] diameter X X
Model Dimension X Dimension Y
inches [cm] inches [cm] * Acceptable for ASME Service **Required for ASME Service

All Models 2 [5.1] 3/4 [1.9]

Pressure/Temperature (Subject to limitations of tubular glass)

Maximum working pressure, psi [kPa] at temperatures to-

MODEL WITH STANDARD NEOPRENE GLASS PACKING WITH OPTIONAL TEFLON GLASS PACKING
-20˚F [-29˚C] 100˚F [38˚C] 200˚F [93˚C] 300˚F [149˚C] 400˚F [204˚C] 450˚F [232˚C] 500˚F [204˚C] Max. Steam Pressure
psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa] psi [kPa]
Bronze
N7A 200 [1380] 200 [1380] 190 [1310] 165 [1140] 125 [860] 125 [860]
N7B 400 [2760] 400 [2760] 385 [2650] 335 [2310] 250 [1720] 250 [1720]

Ducille Iron
N7A, N7B 500 [3450] 500 [3450] 460 [3170] 375 [2580] 290 [2000] 250 [1720] 350 [2410]
STL, STS
N7A, N7B 500 [3450] 500 [3450] 500 [3450] 500 [3450] 500 [3450] 500 [3450] 500 [3450] 350 [2410]

© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
32
!
EW
N

Introducing the Graph-a-BondTM


gasket: superior strength and
better adhesion
Frustrated with GRAFOIL® gasket folding,
flecking, denting and slipping? Penberthy
has the answer – a graphite composite
gasket that provides both superior strength
to resist gasket deformation and better
surface adhesion than commonly used
graphite gaskets. (Concept is
covered by US Pat# 5,895,058, other
patents and proprietary data may pertain).

Graph-a-BondTM Gaskets
Penberthy has combined the grip of fibrous
gasketing with the superior sealing and Cross-section of gasket, showing
physical attributes of graphite to create a fibrous laminate providing
Graph-a-BondTM gasket. It provides: stiffness and better handling
characteristics
• Excellent chemical resistance
• Efficient conduction of thermal energy The laminate bonding is crucial to
• Stability at high temperatures the success of this gasket form. It
• Extremely low microporosity (leakage) is a very thin combination of
• “Springback” resilience to conform to acrylonitrile and phenolic polymers.
curved and flat surfaces The acrylonitrile, a thermoplastic,
• Reduced gasket blow-out provides the initial bonding at
relatively low temperatures and
Penberthy has also attached a fibrous
during the heated pressure roller
gasket (elastomeric binder) to the
initial laminating phase. As
otherwise exposed graphite material to
negate its natural lubricity and difficulty in temperature is increased during
handling. As a result, handling Penberthy’s application, the acrylonitrile
Graph-a-Bond gasket is much easier than carbonizes and the phenolic, a
conventional graphite gaskets, helping to thermosetting polymer, becomes
eliminate the possibility of damage during the bonding agent. At extreme
gage assembly. The fibrous laminate also temperatures, the entire seal
gives the graphite a higher degree of (binders, adhesives, etc.) turns
stiffness to resist deformation or bending carbonaceous with high bonding
better than graphite gaskets with polyester strength to the sealed members
or metal inserts. (the so-called “frying-on”). Once
The Penberthy gasket is also ideal to carbonaceous an effective seal can
retrofit onto aged chambers that have be maintained until such time as
experienced rebuilds over the years and excessive mechanical shifting of
may leak if conventional graphite the elements (due to pipe stresses,
gaskets are used. Note that the Penberthy thermally induced movement, etc.)
gasket fits any manufacturer’s standard- occurs.
size flat glass gage. Gasket material can be
manufactured for use with other fittings
including flanges.

© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
33

!
EW
Flat Glass Illuminators for

N
Explosion-Proof applications -
indoor or outdoor!
The absence of a watertight seal on
conventional gage illuminators has been
an ongoing problems for users seeking
illumination in XP or cryogenic applications
in an outdoor environment. Now,
Penberthy has introduced the first standard
lamp illuminator with a watertight seal,
enabling users to get flat glass gage
illumination outdoors with a product that’s
impervious to the elements and can
operate maintenance free and reliably for
Flat Glass Illuminators

years.
These new flat glass gage
illuminators are available in single section
units, double section units and in
combinations for three or more section
gages.
FM approved CSA certified Ex d
Approvals
Division 1 and 2 Division 1 and 2
The standard illuminator rating is 60 watts Class I, B,C,D Class I, B,C,D
at 115Vac. Other illuminators are listed in Class II, E,F,G Class II, E,F,G
the Optional Models Structure table below. Class III, Type 4, T4 Class III, Type 4, T4
UNITS ARE EXPLOSION-PROOF! CENELEC
EExd IIB + H2 T4, IP66

Optional Model Structure


EXAMPLE: Standard illuminator for doulble section size 7 flat glass gage (2TM7) with 60 watt lamp and 115 volt service

I D S N 7 N 1 6
I = Illuminator 2 = 25w - pigtail leads
3 = 25w - terminal block
S = single section flat glass 6 = 60w - pigtail leads
D = double section flat glass 7 = 60w - terminal block
L = LED single sect flat glass
M = magnetic gage (inch incr) 1 = 115 Vac standard thread 1” NPTF
N = LED magnetic gage A = 115 Vac ISO thread
2 = 230 Vac standard thread 1” NPTF
S = standard extension B = 230 Vac ISO thread
F = frost extension 4 = 24 Vdc standard thread 1” NPTF
D = 24 Vdc ISO thread
2, 4, 6, 8, A(10), C(12), N (Not applicable -
standard indicator) = WEDGE DEPTH (inch)
N (not applicable-if flat glass); MAG GAGE
INDICATOR LENGTH (unit digit of inches;
GLASS SIZE (1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,); e.g., 24 inches use “4”, max. 48 inches)
MAG GAGE INDICATOR LENGTH
(tens digit of inches; e.g., 24 inches use “2”, max. 48 inches)
© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
34
Other Accessories . . .
An internal heating or cooling tube is Frost-proof extensions are clear plastic Drain valves, drain cocks and try cocks
offered for tubular and flat glass gages. The windows that fit over the visible part of the are used in the drain or vent connection of
tube passes through the inside of the gage glass in flat glass gages. In low temperature flat glass liquid level gages.
and is in direct contact with the liquid. applications, they prevent build-up of frost
over the visible part of the gage resisting An extended packing nut is recommended
Double-and single-sided external heating obstruction of the view of liquid level. for accommodating gagecocks with protectors
and cooling chambers are offered for L and and gage scales for tubular gagecocks.
M series gages. External chambers do not Frost-Free Sizing
contact the liquid inside the gage. Gage scales are constructed of corrosion-
Lowest Temperature Size resistant materials.
Lightweight, flexible, silicon-impregnated,
-30º F [-35º C] 2” PENGAGETM Selection software allows for
fiberglass insulation is available for a wide
variety of gagecocks, gages and other -94º F [-70º C] 4” fast, accurate and simple gage/gagecock
instrumentation. Reduces heat or cold loss -148º F [-100º C] 6” specification.
at temperatures from -65ºF to +1000ºF -211º F [-135º C] 8” Many other accessories are available.
{-55ºC to +540ºC}. Penberthy insulating -274º F [-170º C] 10” See your representatives for details.
covers can also be used with frost proof -328º F [-200º C] 12”
extensions and illuminators.

Tubular gages and end connect & side connect flat glass gages with Reflex gage with external chamber Transparent gage with single Insulation Blanket
offset pattern gagecocks, internal tube and packing adapters mounted to back and jacketed gagecocks external chamber

Try cock Extending Packing Nut

NPT
Style 1/8” 1/4” 3/8”
Single male X X X
Male/male X X
Male/female X X
Female/female X X
Frost-proof extensions Drain cocks Drain valve Gage scale

ISO 9001:2000
Certification Number 30053

TYCO VALVES & CONTROLS, L.P. Represented By:


320 Locust St. • Prophetstown, IL 61277
Tel. (815) 537-2311 • Fax (815) 537-5764
Email: gagevalveteam@tycovalves.com
Website: www.penberthy-online.com

© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved
Section: 2000
I.O.M.: 2950L
Issued: 08/05
Replaces: 01/05

PENBERTHY®

Flat
Glass Gages
Series L

Installation, Operation and Maintenance Instructions


TABLE OF CONTENTS

Product Warranty . . . . . . . . . iii

1.0 About the Manual . . . . . . . . . 1

2.0 Introduction . . . . . . . . . 1
2.1 System Description . . . . . . . 1

3.0 Available Models . . . . . . . . 2


3.1 Design Ratings at Max. & Min. Operating Temperatures . . . . 2,3

4.0 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . 3
4.1 Glass Inspection . . . . . . . . 3
4.2 User Rating Inspection . . . . . . . 3,4

5.0 Installation . . . . . . . . . . 4
5.1 Piping Strain . . . . . . . . 4
5.2 Differential Thermal Expansion . . . . . . 4
5.3 Mirror Viewing . . . . . . . . 4
5.4 Nut Retorquing . . . . . . . . 4,5
5.5 Belleville Washers . . . . . . . . 5

6.0 Operation . . . . . . . . . . 6
6.1 Hydrostatic Test . . . . . . . . 6

7.0 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 6,7


7.1 Maintenance Procedures. . . . . . . . 7
7.2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . 7

8.0 Removal - Disassembly - Reassembly . . . . . . 8


8.1 Disassembly . . . . . . . . 8
8.2 Inspection of Glass Seating Surfaces . . . . . 9
8.3 Reassembly . . . . . . . . 9,10

9.0 Disposal at End of Useful Life . . . . . . . 10

10.0 Telephone Assistance . . . . . . . . 11

11.0 Exploded Parts Drawing . . . . . . . . 12

TABLES AND FIGURES page

Table 1 Design Ratings of RL Gage . . . . . . 2


Table 2 Design Ratings of TL Gage . . . . . . 2
Table 3 Bolt Torque Values . . . . . . . 5

Figure 1 Nut Tightening Sequence . . . . . . 4


Figure 2 Belleville Washer Position . . . . . . 5
Figure 3 Nut Loosening Sequence . . . . . . 8
Figure 4 Exploded Parts Drawing of Transparent Gage . . . . 12
Figure 5 Exploded Parts Drawing of Reflex Gage . . . . . 12

ii
PENBERTHY PRODUCT WARRANTY

Tyco Gagecocks & Controls Prophetstown warrants its Penberthy products as designed and
manufactured by TV&C Prophetstown to be free of defects in the material and workmanship for a
period of one year after the date of installation or eighteen months after the date of manufacture,
whichever is earliest. TV&C Prophetstown will, at its option, replace or repair any products which fail
during the warranty period due to defective material or workmanship.

Prior to submitting any claim for warranty service, the owner must submit proof of purchase to TV&C
Prophetstown and obtain written authorization to return the product. Thereafter, the product shall be
returned to TV&C in Prophetstown, Illinois, with freight paid.

This warranty shall not apply if the product has been disassembled, tampered with, repaired or
otherwise altered outside of TV&C Prophetstown factory, or if it has been subject to misuse, neglect or
accident.

The responsibility of TV&C Prophetstown hereunder is limited to repairing or replacing the product at
its expense. TV&C Prophetstown shall not be liable for loss, damage or expenses related directly or
indirectly to the installation or use of its products, or from any other cause or for consequential
damages. It is expressly understood that TV&C Prophetstown is not responsible for damage or injury
caused to other products, buildings, personnel or property, by reason of the installation or use of its
products.

THIS IS TV&C PROPHETSTOWN’S SOLE WARRANTY AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER


WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WHICH ARE HEREBY EXCLUDED, INCLUDING IN
PARTICULAR ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.

This document and the warranty contained herein may not be modified and no other warranty,
expressed or implied, shall be made by or on behalf of TV&C Prophetstown unless made in writing
and signed by the General Manager or Director of Engineering of TV&C Prophetstown.

iii
INSTALLATION, OPERATION and MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FOR PENBERTHY SERIES L FLAT GLASS GAGES

1.0 About the Manual

This manual has been prepared as an aid and guide for personnel involved installation or
maintenance. All instructions must be read and understood thoroughly before attempting any
installation, operation or maintenance.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Penberthy does not have any control over the manner in which its liquid level gage is handled,
installed or used. Penberthy cannot and will not guarantee that a liquid level gage is suitable
or compatible for the user's specific application.

WARNING
v
Contained fluids may be pressurized and can unexpectedly exit vessel connections due to
apparatus or material failure. Safety glasses should be worn when installing a liquid level
gage. Failure to follow instructions could result in serious physical injury or property damage.

2.0 Introduction

Penberthy liquid level gages are used to allow direct visualization of liquid level in vessels. By peering
through the glass, it is possible to monitor color, clarity and level of a gas/liquid interface. Gages are
available in varying lengths and configurations (end connect, side connect, multiple sections, NPT or
flange connections, etc.). Visual indication can be enhanced by using reflex glass or illuminators
(accessory).

2.1 System Description

Penberthy gages are comprised of six basic components. Each component may vary slightly,
depending on the desired physical and mechanical properties for the gage. Use the exploded
parts view in Section 11.0 as additional reference material.

Chamber- provides a pressure retaining metallic channel for the liquid to enter and
be viewed. Slot(s) are machined into the chamber to provide direct
visualization of the process fluid.

Gaskets- seal the gap and prevent leakage between the chamber and the glass.
Gaskets are available in a variety of materials for compatibility with the
media in the gage.

Glass- allows for visual observation of the process fluid in the chamber.

Cushion- acts as a protective buffer between the glass and the cover. For proper
sealing, cushions must be as hard as or harder than the gasket material.

Cover- protects the glass assembly from external hits and provides a flat, rigid
surface that is used to evenly compress the gage assembly.

Bolting- compresses the components between the covers (transparent gages) or


cover and chamber (reflex gages).

Shield - (optional on transparent gages) used to prevent the process media from
contacting the glass.

1
3.0 Available Models

Penberthy low pressure (Series L) liquid level gages are designed for applications other than
steam/water where the physical and mechanical properties of a ductile iron cover are sufficient to
meet the pressure and temperature needs of the application.

3.1 Design Ratings at Maximum and Minimum Operating Temperatures

Glass Model RL Reflex


Gasket Material
Size Wetted Parts Material Steel or Stainless Steel w/B7 Bolting
-20°F [-29°C] to 100°F [38°C] 600°F [316°C]
1 2400 psig [16550 kPa] 1780 psig [12270 kPa]
®
2 2335 psig [16100 kPa] 1720 psig [11860 kPa]
Grafoil 3 2250 psig [15510 kPa] 1670 psig [11510 kPa]
(standard) 4 2175 psig [15000 kPa] 1600 psig [11030 kPa]
or 5 2100 psig [14480 kPa] 1550 psig [10690 kPa]
Non-Asbestos 6 2025 psig [13960 kPa] 1500 psig [10340 kPa]
7 1950 psig [13440 kPa] 1440 psig [ 9930 kPa]
8 1875 psig [12930 kPa] 1390 psig [ 9580 kPa]
9 1800 psig [12410 kPa] 1340 psig [ 9240 kPa]
1 2400 psig [16550 kPa]
2 2335 psig [16100 kPa]
3 2250 psig [15510 kPa]
4 2175 psig [15000 kPa]
Top-Chem 2000® 100 psig [690 kPa] at 500°F [260°C]
5 2100 psig [14480 kPa]
6 2025 psig [13960 kPa]
7 1950 psig [13440 kPa]
8 1875 psig [12930 kPa]
9 1800 psig [12410 kPa]
25% glass filled PTFE 1-9 650 psig [4480 kPa] at -20°F [-29°C] to 100°F [38°C] 150 psig [1030 kPa] at 500°F [260°C]
NBR/Buna N 1-9 300 psig [2070 kPa] at -20°F [-29°C] to 100°F [38°C] 225 psig [1550 kPa] at 250°F [121°C]
FKM/Viton® 1-9 300 psig [2070 kPa] at -20°F [-29°C] to 100°F [38°C] 180 psig [1240 kPa] at 400°F [204°C]
PTFE/Teflon® 1-9 300 psig [2070 kPa] at -20°F [-29°C] to 100°F [38°C] 150 psig [1030 kPa] at 500°F [260°C]

Table 1

Glass Model TL Transparent


Gasket Material
Size Wetted Parts Material Steel or Stainless Steel w/B7 Bolting
-20°F (-29°C) to 100°F (38°C) 600°F (316°C)
1 2000 psig [13790 kPa] 1480 psig [10200 kPa]
2 1815 psig [12510 kPa] 1340 psig [ 9240 kPa]
®
Grafoil 3 1630 psig [11240 kPa] 1210 psig [ 8340 kPa]
(standard) 4 1440 psig [ 9930 kPa] 1060 psig [ 7310 kPa]
or 5 1250 psig [ 8620 kPa] 920 psig [ 6340 kPa]
Non-Asbestos 6 1065 psig [ 7340 kPa] 790 psig [ 5450 kPa]
7 875 psig [ 6030 kPa] 645 psig [ 4450 kPa]
8 690 psig [ 4760 kPa] 510 psig [ 3520 kPa]
9 500 psig [ 3450 kPa] 370 psig [ 2550 kPa]
1 2000 psig [13790 kPa]
2 1815 psig [12510 kPa]
3 1630 psig [11240 kPa]
4 1440 psig [ 9930 kPa]
Top-Chem 2000® 100 psig [690 kPa] at 500°F [260°C]
5 1250 psig [ 8620 kPa]
6 1065 psig [ 7340 kPa]
7 875 psig [ 6030 kPa]
8 690 psig [ 4760 kPa]
9 500 psig [ 3450 kPa]
25% glass filled PTFE 1-9 650 psig [4480 kPa] at -20°F [-29°C] to 100°F [38°C] 150 psig [1030 kPa] at 500°F [260°C]
NBR/Buna N 1-9 300 psig [2070 kPa] at -20°F [-29°C] to 100°F [38°C] 225 psig [1550 kPa] at 250°F [121°C]
FKM/Viton® 1-9 300 psig [2070 kPa] at -20°F [-29°C] to 100°F [38°C] 180 psig [1240 kPa] at 400°F [204°C]
PTFE/Teflon® 1-9 300 psig [2070 kPa] at -20°F [-29°C] to 100°F [38°C] 150 psig [1030 kPa] at 500°F [260°C]
PCTFE/(Kel-F®) Shields
1-9 300 psig [2070 kPa] at -20°F [-29°C] to 100°F [38°C] 180 psig [1240 kPa] at 400°F [204°C]
0.063" (1.6mm) thick

Table 2

The pressure and temperature ratings may deviate from the previous tables if the gasketing
materials of construction and/or bolting are other than those specified.

2
To determine the maximum allowable working pressure for a specific temperature within the
design limits stated in the tables, the user should refer to Penberthy application reports, or
when provided, the specifically stated design limits on a Penberthy product proposal.

NOTE: under no circumstances should shields be used in reflex style gages. Installation of
shields in reflex style gages will keep the liquid from coming in contact with the refractive
prisms, thereby prohibiting visualization of the liquid level in the gage.

DANGER
NEVER exceed these design ratings or application data. Exceeding design ratings or
application data may result in mechanical failure of gage components resulting in death,
serious personal injury or property damage.

4.0 Inspection

Upon receipt of a liquid level gage, check all components carefully for damage incurred in shipping. If
damage is evident or suspected, do not attempt installation. Notify carrier immediately and request
damage inspection.

Penberthy's standard 1 section TL gage consists of: (1) chamber, (2) gaskets, (2) borosilicate flat
glass, (2) rubber bands, (2) cushions, (2) covers, (1) washer, (1) nameplate and (6-14) bolting sets,
depending on the size.

4.1 Glass Inspection

The self stick caution tape was applied at the factory to protect the glass during shipping,
handling and installation. Do not remove the tape from the glass until all installation
procedures have been completed, except during receiving inspection to momentarily inspect
glass for shipping damage. Glass that is not protected will be vulnerable to dust, grit, tools
and any other objects which may scratch, chip or break the glass.

WARNING
DO NOT use glass that is chipped or even slightly scratched. Glass surface defects weaken
the glass, which may result in glass breakage and fluid loss under pressure resulting in
serious personal injury and property damage.

4.2 User Rating Inspection

The user should confirm that:

1. the Series L liquid level gage model and assembly number stamped on the
nameplate conforms to the description on the user's purchase order,
2. the operating conditions described in the purchase order agree with the actual
operating conditions at the installation site,
3. the actual operating conditions at the installation site are within the application
data shown on the Penberthy Technical Data Bulletin or product proposal referred
to above, and
4. the materials of construction of the liquid level gage are compatible with both the
contained media and surrounding atmosphere in the specific application.

3
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
If the size, model or performance data of the liquid level gage as received does not conform
with any of the criteria above, do not proceed with installation. Contact an authorized
Penberthy distributor for assistance. The incorrect gage can result in unacceptable
performance and potential damage to the gage.

5.0 Installation

Installation should only be undertaken by qualified, experienced personnel who are familiar with
equipment of this type. They should have read and understood all of the instructions in this manual.
The user should refer to Penberthy dimension sheets or Penberthy product proposal to obtain
dimensional information for the specific size and model liquid level gage.

Penberthy recommends that all liquid level gage installations be provided with gagecock sets equipped
with ball check shut-off. Gagecock sets are designed to isolate the gages from the pressure vessel
when it becomes necessary to drain or service the gages. The ball check shut-off is designed to
retard leakage of the contained fluid in the event of gage glass breakage. Ball checks are available for
both positive and negative vessel pressures.

The number of different types of gage and gagecock installations is too great to adequately detail in an
installation manual. It is, therefore, the user's responsibility to assure that the knowledgeable
installation personnel plan and carry out the installation in a safe manner. The following procedures
are some of the installation guidelines that should be employed.

5.1 Piping Strain

The gage should be mounted and connected so that is does not support any piping weight.
Piping not properly supported, independent of the gage, may subject the gage to stresses that
can cause leaks or glass breakage. Support brackets are available as an accessory.

5.2 Differential Thermal Expansion

High mechanical loads may be imposed on a gage by expanding and contracting pipes due to
hot or cold service. Such mechanical loads on the gage must be minimized by the use of
expansion loops in the system. Failure to allow for expansion or contraction can result in
leaks or glass breakage.

5.3 Mirror Viewing

For added safety, a system of indirect viewing by means of mirrors should be installed to
protect personnel from the hazards of possible gage failure.

5.4 Nut Retorquing

Nut retorque is vital to the operation of a liquid level gage


because gaskets take permanent set under initial bolt loading
at assembly. Tightening of nuts before installation to values
specified in Table 3 is necessary to insure pressure retaining
capabilities of liquid level gage to specific design ratings. The
user must refer to the liquid level gage model and assembly
number and to the purchase order or tag to determine
materials of construction.

Nut Tightening Sequence


Figure 1

4
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Before placing liquid level gage into initial operation, torque values must be verified. From
factory testing to installation, gasketing may take “set” reducing closure force. Retorquing
before operation reduces chance of leakage or gasket “blow out”.

BOLT TORQUE VALUES


GAGE MODELS & GASKET MATERIAL ft·lb N·m
RL, TL w/Grafoil® (standard) 20 to 25 27 to 34
RL, TL w/Non-asbestos (optional) 25 to 30 34 to 41
Top-Chem 2000® 20 to 25 27 to 34
25% glass filled PTFE 19 to 22 26 to 30
PTFE and PCTFE (Kel-F®) 20 to 25 27 to 34
All models with Viton® or elastomeric (optional) 10 to 15 14 to 20
TL with PCTFE(Kel-F®) Shields (optional) 0.063" [1.6 mm] 20 to 25 27 to 34

Table 3

Using a torque wrench, tighten nuts in 5 ft·lb (7 N·m) increments following the "Z" pattern
sequence in Figure 1, until the torque values shown in Table 3 above for the specific liquid
level gage are reached. For multiple section gages, torque the center section(s) and
progressively work toward the ends of the gage.

If bolting, gasketing or glass on any or repaired section of a multi-section gage is disturbed, all
sections must be checked for integrity and retorqued as necessary.

WARNING
n
Failure to comply with the proper torquing sequence or force value can lead to leakage, gasket
blow-out or glass breakage resulting in gage failure, serious injury or property damage.

NOTE: Depending on gage size there may be less bolting than shown in Figure 1. Start at the
center and follow "Z" pattern outward to the limit of bolting on a specific gage.

5.5 Belleville Washers

Belleville washers are used to reduce the need to retorque nuts. This is especially important
for gages subject to pressure and/or thermal cycling. The conical washers allow for material
expansion and contraction while maintaining axial bolt loading and, therefore, compression on
the gasket.

Model RL gages require 3 washers per nut, model TL gages require 2 washers per nut (4 per
bolt). Washers should be assembled with the cupped side facing the gage cover. Refer to
Figure 2 for proper washer assembly.

Note: the following procedure is to be done on only one side of a transparent gage.

Using a torque wrench, tighten nuts in 5 ft·lb (7 N·m) increments following the "Z" pattern
sequence in Figure 1 until the torque values shown in Table 3 are reached.

Belleville Washer Position


Figure 2

5
6.0 Operation

Before initializing liquid level gage operation, check that all installation procedures have been
completed. Use only qualified experienced personnel who are familiar with liquid level gage
equipment and thoroughly understand the implications of the tables and all the instructions. Check to
determine that all connections are pressure tight. Assure that nuts have been retorqued to their
proper values as specified in Table 3. Remove self stick caution tape from the glass and inspect to be
sure that glass is clean and free of any damage such as cracks, scratches, pits and chips.

6.1 Hydrostatic Test

DANGER
Liquid level gage installations should be brought into service slowly to avoid excessive shock
or stress on the glass. Rapid pressurization or sudden changes in temperature may cause
glass breakage. To avoid excessive thermal shock or mechanical stress on glass, the
connecting gagecocks should be opened slightly, and the gage temperature and pressure
allowed to slowly equalize. If the gagecocks are equipped with ball checks, the gagecocks
must be opened all the way after the pressure and temperature have equalized to permit
operation of the automatic ball checks in the event of failure. Failure to follow the
recommended operating procedures can result in death, severe personal injury and/or
property damage.

Take all precautions necessary to handle the possibility of leakage during the test.
Hydrostatically pressure test all installations to at least 100 psig (690 kPa) but less than the
design pressure and correct any leakage before proceeding.

7.0 Maintenance

WARNING
m
Use only qualified experienced personnel who are familiar with liquid level gage equipment
and thoroughly understand the implications of the tables and all the instructions. DO NOT
proceed with any maintenance unless the liquid level gage has been relieved of all pressure or
vacuum, has been allowed to reach ambient temperature and has been drained or purged of all
fluids. Failure to follow instructions can cause serious personal injury and property damage.

The rate at which components degrade is dependent upon a variety of conditions. Pressure,
temperature and process media all influence the rate at which gage components deteriorate. Higher
temperatures can accelerate the deterioration of gaskets, cushions, glass and metals. Acids and
similar chemicals can break down the integrity of almost any material. Concentration of chemicals can
accelerate the corrosion rate. Penberthy cannot create a blanket maintenance schedule for every
application.

The end user is the most familiar with the process media and conditions and must be responsible for
creating a maintenance schedule. The user must create maintenance schedules, safety manuals and
inspection details for each liquid level gage. Realistic maintenance schedules can only be determined
with full knowledge of the services and application situations involved. These will be based upon the
user's own operating experience with their specific application.

If bolting, gasketing or glass on any section of a multi-section gage is disturbed, all sections must be
checked for integrity and retorqued or repaired as necessary.

6
On all installations the following items should be regularly evaluated by the user for purposes of
maintenance:

1. glass, for cleanliness and signs of damage or wear,


2. shields, if used, for signs of clouding, wear or deterioration,
3. gage, for signs of leakage around gaskets or at connections and
4. gage, for signs of internal or external corrosion.

7.1 Maintenance Procedures

GLASS should be given regular and careful attention. Keep glass clean using a commercial
glass cleaner and a soft cloth. Inspect the surface of the glass for any clouding, etching or
scratching or physical damage such as bruises, checks or corrosion. Glass that is damaged
is weakened and may break under pressure. Shining a light at approximately a 45° angle will
aid in detecting some of these conditions. Typical damaged areas will glisten more brightly
than the surrounding glass because the light is reflected.

Detection of any damage, problem areas or surface wear is sufficient evidence to take the
liquid level gage out of service. DO NOT proceed with operation of the liquid level gage until
the glass has been replaced with a glass replacement kit following the disassembly -
reassembly instructions in Section 8.0.

SHIELDS showing any signs of clouding, wear or deterioration are an indication that the gage
glass has been exposed, or could soon be exposed to the contained fluid. Immediately take
liquid level gage out of service. DO NOT proceed with operation of the liquid level gage until
shields and glass have been replaced by following the disassembly-reassembly instructions in
Section 8.0.

GASKET LEAKS must be repaired immediately. DO NOT proceed with operation of a liquid
level gage until gaskets have been replaced by following Section 8.0 disassembly-reassembly
instructions.

CONNECTION LEAKS at a flanged or threaded connection should be corrected by tightening


the bolting at the connection or by taking the liquid level gage out of service and wrapping the
connection threads with Teflon® tape on all male pipe threads.

CORROSION may occur if the user has selected an improper material for the liquid level gage
application. It is the responsibility of the user to choose a material of construction compatible
with both the contained fluid and the surrounding environment. If internal or external corrosion
is present, an investigation must immediately be performed by the user. It may be necessary
to contact an authorized Penberthy distributor to better determine the origin of the corrosion.
7.2 Troubleshooting
Problem: glass becomes prematurely etched or clouded in service
Cause: fluid being handled is not compatible with the glass or shields
Solution: replace the glass and install shields which will not be affected by contained fluid
Problem: glass continually breaks in service despite careful attention to maintenance
procedures
Cause: thermal shock, hydraulic shock, mechanical loads, exceeding design ratings or a
combination of these
Solution: check entire system to determine possible sources of loads. Check application to
determine actual operating conditions and contact an authorized Penberthy
distributor on how to proceed.

7
8.0 Removal - Disassembly - Reassembly

WARNING
Use only qualified experienced personnel who are familiar with liquid level gage equipment
and thoroughly understand the implications of the tables and all the instructions. DO NOT
proceed with any maintenance unless the liquid level gage has been relieved of all pressure or
vacuum, has been allowed to reach ambient temperature and has been drained or purged of all
fluids. Failure to follow instructions can cause serious personal injury and property damage.

8.1 Disassembly

Secure workbench longer than the liquid level gage, and


sufficiently wide to lay out parts as they are removed.
1. Lay gage on bench so nut side of fastener is up.
2. Hold gage firmly; loosen nuts starting at both ends of each
section and then proceeding from both ends to the center of
each section as shown in Figure 3.
3. Nut Loosening Sequence
-remove nuts, washer, belleville washers (if any) and
nameplate
-tap covers with rubber hammer as needed to loosen and
remove
-for belleville washer assemblies: to remove covers, studs
may need to be removed by laying the assembly on its side
and knocking the stud/U-bolts through the cover with a
hammer and punch
-remove cushions, glass, shields (if any) and gaskets
-tap liquid chamber or remaining covers as necessary with
rubber hammer to break loose and remove remaining
Nut Loosening Sequence
components
Figure 3
-remove, destroy and dispose of all glass, cushions,
gaskets and shields. Under no circumstances should
these components be re-used or installed on a gage.

NOTE: If size of gage is smaller than shown, follow spiraling sequence from the ends until all
bolting is loosened.

WARNING
m
Once used, cushions, gaskets and shields are permanently deformed by compression and if
re-used, may cause leaks and high stress points resulting in glass breakage. Glass may
contain hidden damage and internal stresses caused by previous usage. If re-used, the glass
may break under pressure causing severe personal injury or property damage.

8
8.2 Inspection of Glass Seating Surfaces

Clean the glass seating surfaces on the liquid chamber and cover with a soft metal scraper
(preferably brass) to remove all burrs, rust and remnants of the previous gaskets and
cushions. Exercise extreme care to avoid gouging or scarring gasket and cushion seating
surfaces.

Use a known flat piece of metal the same approximate length as the glass or a new piece of
glass and a thickness gage to check flatness of each glass seating surface on liquid chamber
and under cover. Surface must be flat within 0.002 inch (0.05 mm). If any one surface is
found to be beyond a tolerance of 0.002 inch (0.05 mm), the entire gage must be disposed of
and replaced. Gasket seating surface must have a final surface finish of 450 to 500 AARH.

WARNING
m
Flatness of glass seating surfaces outside 0.002 inch (0.05 mm) tolerance specified is an
indication of the gage having been overstressed through repeated exposure to mechanical,
thermal or hydraulic shock during its previous service. Operation of a liquid level gage which
has been overstressed will result in abnormal stresses on the glass which may cause glass to
break. If surface finish is not in the 450-500 AARH range, gasket may extrude under pressure
with resulting sudden release of pressure, leakage of contained fluid, serious personal injury
or property damage.

Glass seating surfaces should NOT be machined to achieve seating tolerance. The chamber
and cover are designed for a critical thickness to achieve the pressure/temperature ratings.
Machining glass seating surfaces may result in non-compliance to the necessary critical
thickness due to material removal.

8.3 Reassembly

If all glass seating surfaces are found to be within the 0.002 inch (0.05 mm) tolerance
described in the previous section, proceed to obtain new glass, gaskets, cushions and shields
(if used) and proceed to reassemble as follows (refer to exploded parts view in Section 11.0 if
needed):
1. Clean threads on bolt and nuts to remove all paint, rust and scale. Apply a light
coat of oil to the threads.
2. For transparent gages, insert bolts through half the cover and lay out covers along
the bench, side by side, with the liquid chamber. Use chamber to space covers
and line them up with vision slots.
3. For reflex style and belleville reflex style gages, lay out covers along bench, side
by side, with liquid chamber. Use chamber to space covers and line them up with
vision slots.
4. For transparent belleville style gages, thread nuts on stud, place two belleville
washers under nut with pointed end toward the nut (see Figure 2), insert stud
through each cover and lay out covers along bench, side by side, with liquid
chamber. Use chamber to space covers and line them up with vision slots.
5. Install one cushion inside each cover.

9
WARNING
m
Separate installation instructions are supplied with replacement glass. All instructions
supplied with the glass must be followed, as there are precautions to be taken when handling
gage glass. Among the precautions is avoidance of bumping or sliding glass against any
surface and inspection of individual pieces. Failure to follow any of the replacement gage
glass installation instructions could result in glass breakage with resulting sudden release of
pressure, severe personal injury or property damage.
6. Install rubber band around each piece of glass, then place glass centered inside
each cover.
7. Install shields, if used, and gasket on glass being careful to keep components
centered.
8. Place liquid chamber on the gaskets making sure all components are aligned with
vision slot.
9. For reflex gage, install U-bolts in place by tapping as needed with rubber hammer,
being careful not to lose alignment with vision slot.
10. For reflex gage, quickly turn over assembly onto backside of U-bolts. Assemble
nameplate, washer and nuts to U-bolts. Tighten nuts with fingers. Using a torque
wrench, tighten nuts in 5 ft·lb (7 N·m) increments, following the sequence in
Figure 1 until the torque values shown in Table 3 are reached.

NOTE: Depending on gage size there may be less bolting than shown in Figure 1. Start at the
center and follow "Z" pattern outward to the limit of bolting on a specific gage.

11. For transparent gage, install gaskets and shields, if used, centered on vision slot.
12. Install rubber band around each piece of glass, then place glass centered on
gasket or shields, if used.
13. Install one cushion on each piece of glass.
14. Install covers in place being careful to maintain components alignment inside.
15. Install nameplate, washer and nuts to bolts. Tighten nuts with fingers. Using a
torque wrench, tighten nuts in 5 ft·lb (7 N·m) increments, following the sequence
in Figure 1 until the torque values shown in Table 3 are reached.
15A. For transparent belleville style gages: install nameplate and two belleville washers
under each nut with pointed end toward the nut (see Figure 2). Finger tighten
nuts.

NOTE: the following procedure is to be done on only one side of the gage.

15B. For reflex belleville style gages: install nameplate and three belleville washers
under each nut with pointed end toward the nut (see Figure 2). Finger tighten
nuts.
16. Using a torque wrench, tighten nuts in 5 ft·lb (7 N·m) increments, following the
sequence in Figure 1, until the torque values shown in Table 3 are reached.

Refer to Section 5.0 for installation and Section 6.0 for operation of liquid level gage when
returning to service.

9.0 Disposal at End of Useful Life

Penberthy gages are used in a variety of fluid applications. By following the appropriate federal and
industry regulations, the user must determine the extent of preparation and treatment the gage must
incur before its disposal. A Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) may be required before disposal
services accept certain components.

Metal, glass and polymers should be recycled whenever possible. Refer to order and TV&C -
Prophetstown Material Specification sheets for materials of construction.

10
10.0 Telephone Assistance

If you are having difficulty with your liquid level gage, contact your local Penberthy distributor. You
may also contact the factory direct at (815) 537-2311 and ask for an applications engineer. So that we
may assist you more effectively, please have as much of the following information available as
possible when you call:

Model #
Name of the company from whom you purchased your liquid level gage
Invoice # and date
Process conditions (pressure, flow rates, tank shape, etc)
A brief description of the problem
Trouble shooting procedures that failed

If attempts to solve your problem fail, you may request to return your liquid level gage to the factory for
intensive testing. You must obtain a Return Authorization (R.A.) number from TV&C Prophetstown
before returning anything. Failure to do so will result in the unit being returned to you without being
tested, freight collect. To obtain an R.A. number, the following information (in addition to that above) is
needed:

Reason for return


Person to contact at your company
“Ship To” address

There is a minimum charge for evaluation of non-warranty units. You will be contacted before any
repairs are initiated should the cost exceed the minimum charge. If you return a unit under warranty,
but is not defective, the minimum charge will apply.

Grafoil® is a registered trademark of Graftech, Inc.


Top Chem 2000® is a registered trademark of Klinger
Viton® and Teflon® are registered trademarks of E.I. du Pont de Nemours and Company
®
PCTFE (formerly known as Kel-F , a registered trademark of 3M) is manufactured by Daikin

11
11.0 Exploded Parts Drawing
Recommended Spare Parts
REF # ITEM QTY.
100 Bolt/U-bolt 2/1 per sect.
4 Nut 2 per sect.
48 Glass 1
7 Gasket 2
8 Cushion 2
9 Shield (if used) 2

Transparent Reflex

1 Cover
2 Chamber
4 Nut
48 Glass
7 Gasket
8 Cushion
9 Shield
100 Bolt/U-Bolt
125 Washer
163 Nameplate
331 Band

Figure 4 Figure 5

NOTE: size 9 shown - actual gage may be shorter and require fewer bolting components.

12
PENBERTHY
DECLARATION of CONFORMITY

In conformance with ISO/IEC Guide 22 - 96


LLG.DC r C

Manufacturer's Name: Tyco Valves & Controls


Manufacturer's Address: 320 Locust Street
Prophetstown, IL 61277-1147 U.S.A.

Product:
Type of Equipment: Pressure Vessel - Liquid Level Gage Glass
Equipment Class: Industrial Instrumentation - Hazardous Area
Model Designations: RL, TL, RM, RMR, TM, TMR, RH, RHR, TH, THR, RMW, TMW,
RLC, TLC

The product described above is in conformity with:


92/59/EEC General product safety 1992
87/404/EEC Simple pressure vessel 1987
89/392/EEC Machinery 1989
EN 10213-1:4 Technical delivery conditions for steel castings 1996
ISO 7-1 Pipe threads where pressure-tight joints are made 1996
BS 10 Flanges and bolting for pipes, gagecocks and fittings 1962
BS 21 Pipe threads for tubes and fittings where pressure tight 1985
BS 759 Gagecocks, gauges and other safety fittings for 1984
application
BS 970 Part 1 Wrought steels for mechanical and allied engineering 1996
BS 970 Part 3 Wrought steel for mechanical and allied engineering 1991
BS 1501 Part 3 Steels for pressure purposes 1990
BS 1502 Steels for fired and unfired pressure vessels 1982
BS 1506 Carbon, low alloy and stainless steel bars and billets 1990
BS 1560 Circular flanges for pipes, gagecocks and fittings 1989
BS 1640 Part 1 Steel butt-welding pipe fittings 1962
BS 1640 Part 2 Steel butt-welding pipe fittings 1962
BS 1965 Butt-welding pipe fittings 1963
BS 3076 Nickel and nickel alloys: bar 1989
BS 3463 Observation and gauge glasses for pressure vessels 1975
BS 3602 Part 1 Steel pipes and tubes for pressure purposes 1987
BS 3605 Austenitic stainless steel pipes and tubes 1991
BS 3643 ISO metric screw threads 1981
BS 3799 Steel pipe fittings, screwed and socket-welding 1974
BS 4504 Circular flanges for pipes, gagecocks and fittings 1989
ASME B&PV Code Rules for construction of pressure vessels 1995
Section VIII
ANSI/ASME B1.1 Unified screw inch threads un and unr thread form 1982
ANSI/ASME B1.20.1 Pipe threads, general purpose (inch) 1983
ANSI/ASME B16.5 Pipe flanges and flanged fittings 1988
ANSI/ASME B18.2.1 Square and hex nuts and screw inch series 1981
ANSI/ASME B18.2.2 Square and hex nuts 1972
ANSI/ASME B31.3 Process piping 1996

Date: 28 May 2004 Signature: _________________________


Prophetstown, IL U.S.A. Name: David J. Williams, C.Q.E.
Position: Quality Assurance Manager

Technical Construction File is available at stated address. Signatory is contact person.

13
NOTES

14
NOTES

15
NOTES

16
Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown
320 Locust St., Prophetstown, Illinois 61277
Phone: 815-537-2311
FAX: 815-537-5764
Printed in USA
Part No. 18R65-009

© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved

17
Section: 2000
I.O.M.: 2960
Issued: 08/05
Replaces: 04/05

PENBERTHY®

Armored
Gagecocks
Series 100, 200, 300 and 400

Installation, Operation and Maintenance Instructions


TABLE OF CONTENTS

Product Warranty . . . . . . . . . iii

1.0 About the Manual . . . . . . . . . 1

2.0 Introduction . . . . . . . . . 1
2.1 System Description . . . . . . . 2

3.0 Available Models . . . . . . . . . 2,3


3.1 Design Ratings at Max. and Min. Operating Temperatures . . 3
3.2 Steam Application . . . . . . . . 3

4.0 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . 4
4.1 User Rating Inspection . . . . . . . 4

5.0 Installation . . . . . . . . . . 4
5.1 Piping Strain . . . . . . . . 4
5.2 Differential Thermal Expansion . . . . . . 4
5.3 Mounting . . . . . . . . . 5

6.0 Operation . . . . . . . . . . 5
6.1 Hydrostatic Test . . . . . . . . 5

7.0 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 6
7.1 Preventative Maintenance . . . . . . . 6
7.2 Ball Check Shut-Off . . . . . . . 6,7
7.3 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . 7

8.0 Removal - Disassembly and Reassembly . . . . . . 8


8.1 Disassembly . . . . . . . . 8
8.2 Reassembly . . . . . . . . 8

9.0 Disposal at End of Useful Life . . . . . . . 8

10.0 Telephone Assistance . . . . . . . . 9

11.0 Exploded Parts Drawing . . . . . . . . 10

TABLES AND FIGURES page

Table 1 Armored Gagecock Standard Features . . . . 2


Table 2 Armored Gagecock Standard Features . . . . 3
Table 3 Design Ratings for Threaded or Welded Connections . . . 3
®
Figure 1 Teflon Tape Wrapping . . . . . . 5
Figure 2 Exploded Parts Drawing . . . . . . 10
Figure 3 Optional Gasket Union Connection . . . . . 10

ii
PENBERTHY PRODUCT WARRANTY

Tyco Valves & Controls Prophetstown warrants its Penberthy products as designed and manufactured
by TV&C Prophetstown to be free of defects in the material and workmanship for a period of one year
after the date of installation or eighteen months after the date of manufacture, whichever is earliest.
TV&C Prophetstown will, at its option, replace or repair any products which fail during the warranty
period due to defective material or workmanship.

Prior to submitting any claim for warranty service, the owner must submit proof of purchase to TV&C
Prophetstown and obtain written authorization to return the product. Thereafter, the product shall be
returned to TV&C in Prophetstown, Illinois, with freight paid.

This warranty shall not apply if the product has been disassembled, tampered with, repaired or
otherwise altered outside of TV&C Prophetstown factory, or if it has been subject to misuse, neglect or
accident.

The responsibility of TV&C Prophetstown hereunder is limited to repairing or replacing the product at
its expense. TV&C Prophetstown shall not be liable for loss, damage or expenses related directly or
indirectly to the installation or use of its products, or from any other cause or for consequential
damages. It is expressly understood that TV&C Prophetstown is not responsible for damage or injury
caused to other products, buildings, personnel or property, by reason of the installation or use of its
products.

THIS IS TV&C PROPHETSTOWN’S SOLE WARRANTY AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER


WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WHICH ARE HEREBY EXCLUDED, INCLUDING IN
PARTICULAR ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.

This document and the warranty contained herein may not be modified and no other warranty,
expressed or implied, shall be made by or on behalf of TV&C Prophetstown unless made in writing
and signed by the General Manager or Director of Engineering of TV&C Prophetstown.

iii
INSTALLATION, OPERATION and MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FOR PENBERTHY SERIES 100, 200, 300 and 400 GAGECOCKS

1.0 About the Manual

This manual has been prepared as an aid and guide for personnel involved installation or
maintenance. All instructions must be read and understood thoroughly before attempting any
installation, operation, or maintenance.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Penberthy does not have any control over the manner in which its gagecocks are handled,
installed or used. Penberthy cannot and will not guarantee that a gagecock is suitable or
compatible for the user's specific application.

WARNING
Vessel fluids may be pressurized and can unexpectedly exit vessel connections due to
apparatus or material failure. Safety glasses should be worn when installing a gagecock.
Failure to follow any instruction could possibly result in a malfunction of the gagecock with
resulting sudden release of pressure, severe physical injury or property damage.

2.0 Introduction

Penberthy armored gagecocks are used to isolate gage glass, magnetic gages or other apparatus
from the holding or pressure vessel when it becomes necessary to drain and service the gage.
Penberthy Series 100, 200, 300 and 400 gagecocks are supplied in pairs, (upper and lower), and are
available with socketweld, flanged and NPT connections.

These gagecocks are equipped, as a standard feature, with a floating shank union vessel connection,
which permits up to 3/8" (10 mm) variation in center to center distance and with ball check shut-offs to
prevent leakage of contained fluid in case of accidental gage glass breakage.

Series 100, 200, 300 and 400 gagecocks for process use should include ball check shut-off feature.
Gagecocks without the ball check shut-off feature will not automatically stop leakage of contained fluid
in the event of accidental gage glass breakage.

1
2.1 System Description

Penberthy armored gagecocks are comprised of six basic components. Each component
may vary slightly, depending on the desired physical and mechanical properties for the
gagecock. Use the exploded parts view in Section 11.0 as additional reference material.

Body- a pressure retaining structure through which liquid passes to enter a gage glass or
other apparatus. Provides a rigid, union, or spherical union connection to the vessel and
seating surfaces for most gagecock components. Series 100 and 200 are straight pattern
bodies; Series 300 and 400 are offset pattern bodies.

Ball Checks- sphere installed loosely within the body of the gagecock that seats to prevent
significant leakage when a differential pressure surge occurs (e.g., mechanical failure). Ball
checks for ASME steam service incorporate a vertically rising lower and leaky horizontal upper
or omit ball checks completely. "Reverse acting” ball checks are available for vacuum service.

Trim- wetted parts that mechanically control the liquid path from the vessel to the gage glass
or other apparatus. The ball and stem act to seal and release the liquid. In the event of
mechanical failure, the ball will seat to prevent large quantities of the contained fluid from
exiting the vessel. Liquid is allowed to exit the vessel into the gage glass or other apparatus
when the stem is screwed away from its seated position. The liquid is sealed when the stem
is screwed into its seated position.

The stem packing retainer provides a compression surface between the process liquid and
the stem packing. A stem packing gland is used to compress the packing against the retainer
and around the stem to prevent leakage.

Stem Packing- under compression the stem packing is forced to mold around the stem and
prevent leakage of media during operation.

Gage Connection- provides connection between the gagecock and the gage glass or other
apparatus. A union, spherical union or rigid connection may be used. A union connection can
move in a plane parallel to the vessel connection.

Handwheel/Lever- rotated to engage threads and provide screw action of stem.

3.0 Available Models

Armored gagecock standard features are listed in chart below.

Model Number
Features
120 130 220 230 320 330 420 430
Straight Pattern x x x x
Offset Pattern x x x x
Integral Bonnet x x x x
Union Bonnet x x x x
Union Gage Connection x x x x
Rigid Gage Connection x x x x
Union Vessel Connection x x x x x x x x
Screwed in Seat x x x x

Table 1

2
Additional gagecock models are available with gasketed union connections. The gaskets are a spiral
wound style, stainless steel/graphite, which are inserted into the body at the union connection to
provide a gasketed seal between the body and tailpipe as opposed to the standard metal-to-metal
joint. These gaskets provide a seal even with small angular misalignments and with less closure force
than the standard metal-to-metal seals.
Model Number
Features
121 122 123 131 221 222 223 231 321 322 323 331 421 422 423 431
Straight Pattern x x x x x x x x
Offset Pattern x x x x x x x x
Integral Bonnet x x x x x x x x
Union Bonnet x x x x x x x x
Metal Union Gage Connection x x x x
Rigid Gage Connection x x x x
Metal Union Vessel Connection x x x x
Screwed in Seat x x x x x x x x
Gasket Union Gage Connection x x x x x x x x
Gasket Union Vessel Connection x x x x x x x x x x x x

Table 2

3.1 Design Ratings at Maximum and Minimum Operating Temperatures

To determine the maximum allowable working pressure for a specific temperature within the
design limits stated below, the user must refer to Penberthy Application Reports, or when
provided, the specifically stated design limits on a Penberthy product proposal.

DESIGN RATINGS FOR THREADED OR WELDED CONNECTIONS


Gagecock Material of Maximum Allowable Working Pressure
Series Construction Teflon® packing Grafoil® packing
4000 psig [27580 kPa] at -20°F [-29°C] to +100°F [38°C] 4000 psig [27580 kPa] at -20°F [-29°C] to +100° [38°C]
Carbon Steel
3525 psig [24300 kPa] at 500°F [260°C] 2620 psig [18060 kPa] at 750°F [399°C]
100 200
300 400 316 STS 4000 psig [27580 kPa] at -300°F [-184°C] to +100°F [38°C] 4000 psig [27580 kPa] at -300°F [-184°C] to +100°F [38°C]
Construction 3525 psig [24300 kPa] at 500°F [260°C] 2755 psig [18990 kPa] at 750°F [399°C]
For other materials or connections consult factory

Table 3

WARNING
NEVER exceed these design ratings or application data. Exceeding design ratings or
application data may result in mechanical failure of gagecock components resulting in serious
personal injury or property damage.

3.2 Steam Application

Penberthy series 100, 200, 300 and 400 gagecocks are designed for process conditions.
In low pressure steam/water applications (< 350 psig [2410 kPa] at 434°F [223°C]), Penberthy
allows the use of 300 and 400 series gagecocks because the potential mechanical stress
imposed on the gagecock assembly by the thermodynamic steam environment is relatively
small. Request Penberthy Application Reports for more detailed information.

3
4.0 Inspection

Upon receipt of a gagecock set, check all components carefully for damage incurred in shipping. If
damage is evident or suspected, do not attempt any installation. Notify carrier immediately and
request damage inspection. Refer to exploded view drawing in Section 11.0 to inventory parts.

4.1 User Rating Inspection

The user should confirm that:

1. The gagecock set model number and pressure/temperature rating stamped on nameplate
conforms to the description on the user's purchase order
2. The operating conditions described in the purchase order agree with the actual operating
conditions at the installation site
3. The actual operating conditions at the installation site are within the application data
shown on the Penberthy Technical Data Bulletin or product proposal referred to previously
4. The materials of construction of the gagecock set are compatible with both the contained
fluid and the surrounding atmosphere in the specific application.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
If the size, model or performance data of the gagecock set as received does not conform with
any of the criteria above, do not proceed with installation. Contact an authorized Penberthy
distributor for assistance. The incorrect gagecock can result in unacceptable performance
and potential damage to the gage.

5.0 Installation

Installation should only be undertaken by qualified personnel who are familiar with this equipment.
They should have read and understood all of the instructions in this manual. The user should refer to
Penberthy dimension sheets or Penberthy product proposal to obtain dimensional information for
specific size and model gagecock.

Penberthy recommendations on gagecock installations are not necessarily related to the installation of
flat glass liquid level gages. The number of different types of gage and gagecock installations is too
great to adequately explain in an installation manual. Therefore, it is the user's responsibility to assure
that knowledgeable installation personnel plan and carry out the installation in a safe manner. The
following procedures are some of the guidelines that should be employed.

5.1 Piping Strain

The gagecock should be mounted and connected so that it can support the gage without
binding. Torsional stresses can make it difficult or impossible to seal tailpipes. Although union
connections will allow marginal errors in piping alignment, misalignment can still create
unusual strain on connectors. Gages not properly supported by brackets may subject the
gagecock to stresses that can cause leaks or mechanical failure. Typical gage load should
NOT exceed 50 lbs (22.7kg) per gagecock.

5.2 Differential Thermal Expansion

High mechanical loading may be imposed on a gagecock by expanding and contracting gages
due to hot or cold service. Such mechanical loads on the gagecock must be minimized by
controlling process conditions in the system or by using expansion loops.

4
5.3 Mounting

1. Prior to installation, turn the handwheel of each gagecock clockwise until the stem
closes against the seat.
2. Remove union vessel connections from gagecocks, where applicable, and apply
heavy grease (where allowable) to tailpipe seat. (The grease minimizes galling of
the seat surfaces when tightening the coupling nuts.)
3. Wrench tighten tailpipes of upper and lower gagecocks to the vessel using
®
Teflon tape, or equivalent, on all male tapered pipe thread connections as shown
in Figure 1. If the gagecock is flanged or weld mount, use proper industry
standard procedures.
4. If installing with a flat glass gage, follow all installation instructions for the specific
liquid level gage as there are many points to consider on gage installation; among
them, piping strain, differential thermal expansion, weight and bolt torque.
5. Install gage tailpipes to union gage connections, where applicable, making sure
that the coupling nuts are in place.

Figure 1

6.0 Operation

Before initializing gagecock operation, check that all installation procedures have been completed.
Use only qualified experienced personnel who are familiar with gagecock equipment and thoroughly
understand the implications of the tables and all the instructions. Check to determine that all
connections are pressure tight.

WARNING
Gagecock installations should be brought into service slowly. Gagecocks should be opened
slightly, and the gagecock assembly temperature and pressure allowed to slowly equalize. If
the gagecocks are equipped with ball checks, the gagecocks must be opened all the way after
the pressure and temperature have equalized to permit operation of the automatic ball check in
the event of gage glass failure. Failure to follow the recommended operating procedures can
result in severe personal injury or property damage.

6.1 Hydrostatic Test

Take all precautions necessary to handle the possibility of leakage during the test.
Hydrostatic pressure test all installations to 100 psig (690 kPa) and correct any leakage before
proceeding.

5
7.0 Maintenance

WARNING
Use only qualified experienced personnel who are familiar with gagecock equipment and
thoroughly understand the implications of the tables and all the instructions. DO NOT proceed
with any maintenance unless the gagecock assembly has been relieved of all pressure or
vacuum, has been allowed to reach ambient temperature and has been drained or purged of all
fluids. Failure to do so can cause serious personal injury and property damage.

The user must create maintenance schedules, safety manuals and inspection details for each
gagecock. These will be based upon the users own operating experience with their specific
application. Realistic maintenance schedules can only be determined with full knowledge of the
services and application situations involved.

During system shutdown, the gagecocks should be left open to permit the gage to lose pressure and
cool with the rest of the system. Failure to leave the gagecock open during system shutdown may trap
high-pressure fluid in the gage.

7.1 Preventative Maintenance

On all installations the following items should be regularly evaluated by the user for purposes
of maintenance:

1. Leakage around stem area


2. Internal stem leak
3. Leakage around union connections
4. Internal or external corrosion

The user must determine, upon evaluation of his or her own operating experience, an
appropriate maintenance schedule necessary for his or her own specific application. Realistic
maintenance schedules can only be determined with full knowledge of the services and
application situation involved.

7.2 Ball Check Shut-Off

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Ball checks, when installed, may fail to seat due to corrosion of the ball or seat, foreign
material in ball chamber or viscous material in the ball chamber. A routine operational test of
the ball check can prevent significant seepage of liquid in the event of glass breakage.

An operational check can be performed on the gagecock ball check by closing both the upper
and lower gagecock stems completely. Drain contents from and relieve pressure on liquid
gage to an appropriate safe container/area. NOTE: Some loss of process fluid to the drain
line is expected with this test procedure.

6
WARNING
m
Use only qualified experienced personnel who are familiar with gagecock equipment and
thoroughly understand the implications of the tables and all the instructions. DO NOT proceed
with any maintenance unless the gagecock assembly has been relieved of all pressure or
vacuum, has been allowed to reach ambient temperature, and has been drained or purged of
all fluids. Failure to do so can cause serious personal injury and property damage.

With drain line in place, open BOTTOM gagecock as rapidly as possible. Listen for "click"
sound, which will indicate that the ball has seated. If possible, observe the quantity of flow
from the drain line. Flow should either stop completely or be no greater than single drips (no
solid stream). Close lower gagecock. Repeat above procedure for UPPER gagecock. There
must be a pressure differential of at least 5 psig (35 kPa) for the above procedure to work
properly.

If the above procedure is not successful, the only alternative is to isolate the gage and
gagecock assembly from the vessel or to shut the process down completely. Disassemble
the gagecock as outlined in section 8.1 using the exploded parts drawing in Section 11.0 as a
reference. Visibly inspect ball check and ball seats in the gagecock body. Remove any
foreign matter and/or replace with new ball checks if inspection indicates this is required. If
the ball seat is damaged, consider replacing the gagecock or the seat (if it is removable).
Reassemble gagecocks as outlined in Section 8.2.

7.3 Troubleshooting

STEM PACKING LEAKAGE can often be stopped by tightening the stem packing nut. If leak
persists, the stem packing should be replaced by following steps 1) through 5) of the
Disassembly and 1) through 7) of the Reassembly instructions

INTERNAL SEAT LEAKAGE is an indication of a worn or damaged stem or seat. To replace


the stem follow steps 1) through 5) of the Disassembly and 1) through 7) of the Reassembly
instructions. To renew the seat surface, follow steps 1) and 2) of the Disassembly
instructions. Renew the seats by using a fine lapping compound and a mandrel the same
size, shape and seat angle as the stem. Flush the gagecock body clean and reassemble by
following steps 4) and 5) of the Reassembly instructions.

Renewable Threaded Sheets (Series 200 and 400). Remove the seat by inserting a 1/4"
(6 mm) square driver in the seat and turning it counterclockwise. Install the new seat by
turning it clockwise using the square driver, making sure that the ball check, if used, is
replaced in the body. Tighten the seat in place.

LEAKAGE AROUND UNION connections can often be stopped by tightening union coupling
nut or remake connection using Teflon® tape, or equivalent on all male pipe threads as shown
in Figure 1.

INTERNAL OR EXTERNAL CORROSION could be an indication of a misapplication. An


investigation should immediately be carried out to determine the cause of the problem. It is
the user's responsibility to choose a material of construction compatible with both the
contained fluid and the surrounding atmosphere.

7
8.0 Removal - Disassembly - Reassembly

WARNING
Use only qualified experienced personnel who are familiar with gagecock equipment and
thoroughly understand the implications of the tables and all the instructions. DO NOT proceed
with any maintenance unless the gagecock assembly has been relieved of all pressure or
vacuum, has been allowed to reach ambient temperature and has been drained or purged of all
fluids. Failure to do so can cause serious personal injury and property damage.

8.1 Disassembly

Refer to the exploded parts drawing in Section 11.0 for additional reference during
disassembly and reassembly of the gagecocks.

1) Remove handwheel nut (30), nameplate (163) and handwheel (28) or lever (261)
from stem.
2) Loosen and remove stem packing nut (26)
3) Remove stem by turning counterclockwise, along with stem packing gland (19),
stem packing (25) and stem packing retainer (18).
4) Slip the stem packing gland (19), stem packing (25) and stem packing retainer
(18) off stem (17).
5) On Series 200 and 400 gagecocks, remove bonnet nut (21) and bonnet (20).
6) To replace seat on Series 200 and 400 gagecocks, follow instructions as
described in maintenance procedures, section 7.3.

8.2 Reassembly

Refer to the exploded parts drawing in Section 11.0 for additional reference during
disassembly and reassembly of the gagecocks.

1) Prepare for installation of new packing by cleaning all packing chambers and
glands of upper and lower gagecocks.
2) On Series 200 and 400 gagecocks, replace bonnet (20) and bonnet nut (21) and
tighten securely in place.
3) Slip packing retainer (18) on stem (17)
4) Install new stem packing (25) and stem packing gland (19)
5) Thread stem assembly into gagecock by turning clockwise until stem seats and
then back off one turn (1/8 turn with quick close stem)
6) Assemble stem packing nut (26) and tighten in place
7) Assemble handwheel (28) or lever (261), nameplate (163) and handwheel nut
(30) on stem and tighten securely in place.
8) Close both gagecocks by turning handwheel or lever clockwise until stem seats.

Refer to Section 6.0 for operation of the gagecock when returned to service.

9.0 Disposal at End of Useful Life

Penberthy Series 100, 200, 300 and 400 gagecocks are used in a variety of fluid applications. By
following the appropriate federal and industry regulations, the user must determine the extent of
preparation and treatment the Series 100, 200, 300 and 400 gagecocks must incur before their
disposal. A Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) may be required before disposal services accept
certain components.

Metal, glass and polymers should be recycled whenever possible. Refer to order and TV&C -
Prophetstown Material Specification sheets for materials of construction.

8
10.0 Telephone Assistance

If you are having difficulty with your Penberthy Series 100, 200, 300 and 400 gagecocks, contact your
local Penberthy distributor. You may also contact the factory direct at (815) 537-2311 and ask for an
applications engineer. So that we may assist you more effectively, please have as much of the
following information available as possible when you call:
Model #
Name of the company from whom you purchased the Penberthy Series 100, 200, 300 and 400
gagecocks
Invoice # and date
Process conditions (pressure, flow rates, tank shape, etc)
A brief description of the problem
Trouble shooting procedures that failed
If attempts to solve your problem fail, you may request to return your Penberthy Series 100, 200, 300
and 400 gagecocks to the factory for intensive testing. You must obtain a Return Authorization (R.A.)
number from TV&C Prophetstown before returning anything. Failure to do so will result in the unit
being returned to you without being tested, freight collect. To obtain an R.A. number, the following
information (in addition to that above) is needed:
Reason for return
Person to contact at your company
“Ship To” address
There is a minimum charge for evaluation of non-warranty units. You will be contacted before any
repairs are initiated should the cost exceed the minimum charge. If you return a unit under warranty,
but is not defective, the minimum charge will apply.

®
Teflon is a registered trademark of E. I. duPont de Nemours and Company
Grafoil® is a registered trademark of Graftech, Inc.

9
11.0 Exploded Parts Drawing
SPARE PARTS
Ref. No. Item Min. Qty.
18 Retainer, Stem Packing 1
19 Gland, Stem Packing 1
25 Packing, Stem 1
30 Nut, Handwheel 1
RECOMMENDED MAXIMUM QUANTITIES SHOULD
PROVIDE SPARE PARTS FOR 10% OF THE
GAGECOCKS IN SERVICE

Figure 2

7 Gasket
11 Body
12 Tailpipe
13 Nut, Vessel Coupling
14 Retainer, Ball Check
15 Ball
16 Seat
17 Stem
18 Retainer, Stem Packing
19 Gland, Stem Packing
20 Bonnet
21 Nut, Bonnet
25 Packing, Stem
26 Nut, Stem Packing
28 Handwheel
30 Nut, Handwheel
31 Tailpipe, Gage
32 Nut, Gage Coupling
163 Nameplate
261 Lever

Note: Seat (16), Bonnet (20) and Nut (21)


are to be used on Series 200 and 400
gagecocks only.

Figure 3
(Optional gasketed union)
10
NOTES

11
NOTES

12
Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown
320 Locust St., Prophetstown, Illinois 61277
Phone: 815-537-2311
FAX: 815-537-5764
Printed in USA
Part No. 14912-009
© 2005 Tyco Valves & Controls, L.P. Prophetstown, All Rights Reserved

13
Daniel®
Liquid
Measurement
Catalog
Measurement
Products, Systems
and Services
Daniel® Company Overview
For more than 75 years, Daniel Measurement and Control, Inc. has
delivered best-in-class natural gas and liquid flow measurement
products, systems and services to the oil and gas industry to ensure
Is accurate fiscal custody transfer. All Daniel products meet or exceed
unaccounted international hydrocarbon measurement standards. Known around the
world, the Daniel name is synonymous with quality products, industry
hydrocarbon expertise and innovative engineering.

draining As Daniel continues to innovate and build its product technology


your and global organization, you can be confident that Daniel is stronger
than ever. We’re part of the Emerson Process Management group of
bottom companies and its nearly $20 billion parent company, Emerson Electric
line? Co., (NYSE: EMR), so we have the financial strength and staying
power to go with our proven track record. Most importantly, your bottom
line is our bottom line—we enable our customers to achieve their
business objectives by providing them with better service, reducing
When the stakes are their costs and adding value to their business.
high, any amount of
unaccounted
hydrocarbon drains Throughout the worldwide oil and gas industry, Daniel liquid flow
the bottom line. measurement products and systems have proven their value in a
That’s why companies range of demanding measurement applications.
like yours count on
proven measurement
technology and
industry expertise Fiscal custody transfer metering
from Daniel to improve
service, reduce costs and
across the oil and gas industry
add value. Around the world, from crude to refined products, and across
every stage of the oil and gas value chain—from production to
transportation to distribution—Daniel liquid measurement products
and systems are delivering vital metering solutions. Our products
and systems are commonly found in onshore and offshore
production facilities, refining and storage locations, crude oil and
refined product transportation pipelines, as well as in all types of
distribution facilities such as load racks and marketing terminals.

Regardless of the specifics of your facility, Daniel can provide a


comprehensive range of proven liquid measurement solutions,
along with the expertise to install, maintain and troubleshoot them
for accurate and cost-effective long-term performance.
Page 
Daniel® Liquid Ultrasonic Flow Meters
Liquid Ultrasonic Meters are rapidly becoming the technology of choice for
measuring a wide range of fluids. With no moving parts and no impediments
to flow, ultrasonic meters virtually eliminate pressure loss common to other
types of measurement technologies. The technology can be applied to
custody transfer, allocation measurement, check metering, leak detection,
and inventory control applications. With no moving parts, the meter is ideal
for bi-directional measurement as it provides accurate measurement of both
upstream and downstream transit times.

Daniel® Model 3804 Liquid Ultrasonic Flow Meter


Daniel® Model 3804 Liquid Ultrasonic Flow Meter
The Daniel Model 3804 Liquid Ultrasonic Flow Meter is designed to
accurately measure liquid products in applications where reliable
performance is critical. It increases your profitability with exceptional
repeatability and linearity throughout the flow range reducing lost and
unmeasured liquid products.

The Daniel Model 3804 Ultrasonic Flow Meter is the first in the Daniel Series
3800 family of liquid meters. The Daniel Model 3804 is a four-path, in-line
ultrasonic meter that measures transit times of ultrasonic pulses passing
through the liquid on four parallel planes. Each of the four paths has two
integrally mounted ultrasonic transducers. The pair of transducers act
alternately as transmitter and receiver. The difference in transit times of the
downstream-directed pulses and the upstream-directed pulses is directly
proportional to the measured fluid velocity.

Key hardware features and benefits:


Reduce unaccounted fluid loss with +/- 0.15% linearity using a transit
time, four path chordal design
Increase energy savings with low pressure drop design resulting in
reduced pumping costs
Explosion proof electronics, and intrinsically safe transducers
Reduce meter runs and lower capital costs with > 20:1 rangeability
Reduce maintenance costs with the ability to replace transducers in
approximately 2 minutes
Reduce inventory costs through the use of common components
between sizes

Key software features and benefits:


Reduce start-up time configuring your meter with Daniel Customer
Interface (CUI) software
Improve uptime with real-time data and comprehensive meter health
diagnostics
Reduce field technician costs with remote communications and
automated one page inspection reports
Optimize meter operation with field upgradeable firmware and “Playback
and Capture” function

Page 
Daniel® Turbine Flow Meters
Turbine meter technology is a proven, reliable and accurate method of flow
measurement. Now, through technical advancements, turbine meters can
provide solutions to many of the challenges facing the petroleum industry.
Daniel’s turbine meters address the requirements of petroleum production,
transportation and terminal marketing applications.

Daniel® Series 1200 Turbine Flow Meter

Daniel® Series 1200 Turbine Flow Meter


Well-suited for light hydrocarbon load rack applications, the Daniel Series
1200 Liquid Turbine Meter is available in 1, 1.5, 2, 3 and 4-inch line sizes
and offers reliable, accurate performance in load racks in the downstream
terminal market segment.

The Daniel Series 1200 Liquid Turbine Meter installs vertically or horizontally
to meet various installation requirements. With a built-in flow conditioning
plate, the meter is suitable for installation in confined areas such as load
rack skids. The Series 1200 meter is available with stainless steel ball
bearings on all sizes, and tungsten carbide journal bearings on the 3 and
4-inch meters.

The Series 1200 is designed for use within the guidelines of API standards,
Chapter 5.3. Offered with one or two pickoffs and a dual channel
preamplifier in a single housing, which may also be used to mount local
totalizers, the unit is typically used in distribution applications such as load
racks, as part of a terminal automation system, and is ideally suited to the
demands of such applications.

Features and benefits:


Output linear with flow rate
Rangeability of 10 to 1
Horizontal or vertical installation
Available in 1 to 4-inch sizes
Superior accuracy and repeatability
High frequency pulse resolution
Uniform pulse signal output
Universal Mounting Box (UMB) housing dual
channel preamplifier and 4 or 2 pickoffs
Improved serviceability allows easy access
to pickoffs and reduces installation costs
Field mountable pickoffs require no interruption
of conduit lines for maintenance
Explosion proof / weather proof housing

Page 
Daniel® Series 1500 Turbine Flow Meter

Daniel® Series 1500 Turbine Flow Meter


The Daniel Series 1500 Liquid Turbine Flow Meter is a volumetric flow
metering and transmitting device, and is used extensively in the petroleum
industry for accurate measurement of liquid hydrocarbon and other process
fluids. The Daniel Series 1500 Liquid Turbine Flow Meter utilizes advanced
turbine meter technology to assure high flow rates, extended flow range
and sustained performance.

The meter’s proven design elements provide reliability and up-time


availability to help provide continuous 24/7 pipeline operation. It is
designed for use within the guidelines of API Standards, Chapter 5.3 (The
Measurement of Liquid Hydrocarbons by Turbine Meter Systems) and the
test procedures of API Standards, Chapter 4 (Prover Systems).

The Series 1500 Liquid Turbine Flow Meter incorporates rugged internals,
and has been proven over years of varied demanding applications.
Tungsten carbide journal bearings and upstream and downstream supports
with a self-centering mechanism provide a measuring system capable
of reliable high accuracy performance in a wide range of applications,
including crude oil. The Daniel Series 1500 includes the Daniel Universal
Mounting Box (UMB) housing with up to 4 or 2 pickoffs and a dual channel
preamplifier.

For complete redundancy, meters of 2-inch size and larger may be supplied
with dual UMBs. In line sizes 3-inches and larger, this provides up to
four pickoffs and two dual channel preamplifiers. This design feature
allows multiple combinations of pulse outputs for metering, proving and
redundancy. The 2-inch dual UMB unit may be used with 2 pickoffs only.

Features and benefits:


Output linear with flow rate
Rangeability of 10 to 1
Available in 1 to 18-inch sizes
Bi-directional flow models available
Tungsten carbide bearings
Universal Mounting Box (UMB) housing dual channel preamplifier and
4 or 2 pickoffs
Single or dual UMB options
Up to 4 outputs in 2 pairs, each pair 90º electrically out of phase
Improved serviceability allows easy access to pickoffs and reduces
installation costs
Field mountable pickoffs require no interruption of conduit lines for
maintenance
Explosion proof / weather proof housing
Rimmed or bladed rotor options (dependent on size)
Stainless or carbon steel body construction with stainless steel internals
High resolution rotor option

Page 
Daniel® Control Valves
The transfer and processing of liquid hydrocarbons require measurement and
control. The controlling elements in flow are valves. Daniel control valves are
used to control flow rate, line pressure, differential pressure or to offer surge
and pressure relief functions.

Daniel® Series 500 Control Valve


Daniel® Series 500 Control Valve
These valves are ideal for use where minimum pressure drop is required
and can be used for applications where it is not practical to use the flowing
stream as the power medium to operate a valve. Because the main piston
is controlled externally and because of the 45º body design, pressure drop
through this valve is extremely low.

Both compressed air, line medium or other hydraulic sources may be used
to actuate the power cylinder. Various pilot configurations are available to
allow the use of these valves in a number of different applications.

The Daniel Series 500 Control Valve is well suited for fire control, tank
safety, remote on-off control, bypass control and with distribution systems.
This valve is also commonly used for automatic drainage from storage, on-
off manifold control, emergency shut-off on loading and unloading lines and
digital control when used with Daniel presets.

Features and benefits:


Fail safe on loss of power medium
Modular construction - all internal parts including the seat ring can be
removed as a cartridge assembly without disturbing line connections
Linear control characteristics with uniform speed of response
Positive (bubble-tight) shut-off
45º body design assures high capacity
Extremely low pressure drop which conserves power consumption
Atmospheric vent positively prevents mixing of line fluid and power
cylinder operating fluid
Available in 2 to 16-inch sizes

Page 
Daniel® Series 600 Control Valve

Daniel® Series 600 Control Valve


Daniel Series 600 Control Valves are designed for use in aircraft refueling
applications. These safe, fast and economical valves are suitable for
fueling trucks and service carts.

Features and benefits:


Accurate control for flow rates up to 1200 gpm (272 m3/hr)
Meets or exceeds fueling safety requirements
Protects the aircraft fuel system by holding surge pressures at the wing
manifold below 120psi (827kPa)
Victaulic end connections, anodized aluminum valve body, cover and
piston
All other parts stainless steel
Fast, safe operation
Precise, tight shut-off
One moving part - excellent reliability
Compact design
Available in 2 to 6-inch sizes

Page 
Daniel® Series 700 Control Valve
Daniel® Series 700 Control Valve
Daniel 700 Series valves are self-contained, balanced piston, pilot operated
valves that can be configured to perform a wide range of control functions.

They are hydraulically operated, and use the flowing stream as the power
medium. Closing rate and sensitivity control is achieved through the use of a
needle valve located in the pilot supply line.

Applications include load rack terminals, aircraft terminals, pipelines, flow


rate control, on-off control, pressure control, pump control, and tank safety
applications.

Features and benefits:


Fail safe on loss of power medium
Modular construction - all internal parts including the seat ring can be
removed as a cartridge assembly without disturbing line connections
Linear control characteristics with uniform speed of response
Positive (bubble-tight) shut-off
45º body design assures high capacity
Available in 2 to 16-inch sizes

A single valve can incorporate one or multiple control functions


including:
On-off
Pressure reducing
Differential pressure
Back pressure
Pressure relief
Gas loaded relief
Float operated level control
Reverse flow check
Digital control
Two-stage control
Hydraulic or pneumatic on/off
Available in 2 to 16-inch sizes for most models

Page 
Daniel® DanLoad 6000™ Electronic Preset
Daniel® DanLoad 6000™ Electronic Preset
The Daniel DanLoad 6000 Preset incorporates modern technology in a
cost-effective, self-contained enclosure providing computer accuracy and
reliability.

The Daniel Danload 6000 Electronic Preset is a dual microprocessor-based


batch controller for liquid product distribution at loading facilities. Applications
include truck, rail, marine, aviation and pipeline. Designed to deliver precise
preset amounts of product from tank storage or pipeline, to vehicle or vessel,
the DanLoad 6000 Preset is user configurable to support a wide variety of
functions required for today’s market.

The Daniel DanLoad 6000 Preset can be used with the Daniel control valve,
turbine meter, additive injector panels, and teminal automation software as
part of the Daniel “Total System Solution”.

A generic single-version product, the DanLoad 6000 Preset controls straight


or blended product loading, with or without multiple additives and dyes.
Blending operations can be configured as sequential or in-line, using both
proportional and integral algorithms, essential for accurate flow measurement
and control with the fluctuating flow conditions found at the load rack. The
standard temperature conversion algorithms for petroleum products are
included, and the unit is weights and measures approved for custody transfer.
The open Modbus RTU communications interface means that the DanLoad
6000 Preset can operate as a stand-alone unit, or be integrated with any
terminal automation system.

Features and benefits:


Open communications interface using Modbus RTU protocol (DanLoad
interface driver must be used)
Two communication ports
Self-contained NEMA 4 or NEMA 7 enclosure
Configurable flow control operations and alarms
Sequential and in-line blending capability
Sidestream blending capability
Easy to configure
Large text / graphics display
Multi-language capability
CALMON calibration monitoring feature for
use with turbine meters
Additive control and accounting
Temperature and pressure compensation per
API, IP or linear equation methods
Over 2000 load transactions stored
Status LEDs on front panel indicating alarm,
operation mode and permissive power
User configurable transaction archiving
and data logging
Multiple calibration settings
Multi-point meter linearization
Digital and two-stage valve control

Page 
Brooks® Compact Prover™ by Daniel®
Brooks® Compact Prover™ by Daniel®
The Brooks Compact Prover is a small volume prover that uses double
chronometry pulse interpolation for flowmeter (Turbine, Positive
Displacement, Coriolis and Liquid Ultrasonic Meters) calibration and
verification in both laboratory and field conditions.

Because of its small size and ease of operation, The Brooks Compact
Prover is ideal for truck or trailer mounting. One single prover can be used
in several locations for various meter sizes and flow conditions. The Brooks
Compact Prover also reduces cost of field calibration, disposal cost, reduces
cross-product contamination, and minimizes product degradation. It is
available in sizes ranging from 8 to 40-inches for capacities from 0.357 bph
to 25,000 bph (.057 m3/hr to 3,972 m3/h).

Features and benefits:


Repeatability of 0.02% (Waterdraw)
Audit trail traceable to NIST
Recognized by API (Chapter 4)
Volume or mass proving (using integral densitometer)
Can be configured for proving Coriolis or Liquid Ultrasonic Meters using
integral master meter
Automatic operation without chains, clutches or intermittent mechanical
drives
Global weights and measures approvals
Global hazardous area approvals
Compact and portable - may be trailer mounted
Horizontal, vertical or vertical lift configurations
Capacity to prove across the range of 0.357 bph to 25,000 bph (.057
m3/hr to 3,972 m3/h)

Page 
Daniel® Pipe Prover
Daniel® Pipe Prover
Daniel provides pipe provers with 4 to 42-inch measuring sections, flow rates
from 100 bph to 42,000 bph (15.89 m3/hr to 6.674 m3/hr) and suitable for
temperatures from -50ºF to 190ºF. The provers are ball type bi-directional,
as well as uni-directional and piston-type for low temperature. These prover
designs comply with the recommendations of API Chapter 4 and individual
application specifications.

Features and benefits:


Precise on-site meter calibration saves money by minimizing uncertainty
of metered volumes
Automated operation and data logging reduces labor cost and possibility
of operator error
Repeatability of 0.02% (waterdraw)

Page 10
Daniel® Engineered Systems
Daniel Measurement and Control, Inc. is the industry leader in designing,
constructing and commissioning of complex oil and gas metering systems
to exacting standards.

This global organization offers decades of fiscal petroleum flow


measurement application experience. Customers rely on Daniel’s
Engineered Systems Group’s international fabrication facilities, customized
engineering and success in field-testing and support. From the simplest
single-stream skid to complex on-site installations, Daniel delivers both
natural gas and liquid petroleum turn-key applications. The Daniel
Engineered Systems team designs, constructs and commissions the
metering project, blending up-to-the minute technology with decades of
understanding what customers need and expect.

Components of a Daniel Engineered System installation typically includes


meters, valves, provers, flow-control instruments, instrumentation and
read-out equipment, and process management components. Computer
software and hardware are integrated with the measurement system.
Standard calculation methods include AGA3 (now API-MPMS-14.3), ISO
5167, AGA5/7/8, AGA9 and the API Manual for Petroleum Measurement
Standards.

Daniel Supervisory Control Systems utilizes a sophisticated Graphical User


Interface, database server, and a dedicated PLC for the metering skid/MOV
interface. Redundancy is often used for custody transfer systems and/or
when system integrity is essential.

A dedicated Project Manager and Project Team are assigned to each


measurement system project. This team is responsible for overall system
design and project construction from start-to-finish. A separate internal
QA/QC group reviews all design details, inside and outside fabrication,
assembly and system testing.

Whether it is a pipeline, offshore production facility, or a loading facility for


ocean-going tankers, Daniel Engineered Systems is a proven, single-source
solution for customers throughout the world.

Page 11
Daniel® Mesurement Services
Daniel Measurement Services (Daniel) takes pride in providing the
right solution for customers with gas and liquid fiscal flow measurement
applications.
Around the clock and around the world, Daniel Measurement Services has
experienced, highly qualified measurement specialists prepared to help
customers who need assistance with:

Start-up and commissioning


Product upgrades
Product repair
Maintenance contracts
Meter tube inspection
Educational services
Remote diagnostics

At Daniel, we are focused on providing superior customer service.


Through our ongoing practices of continuous improvement, training and
development, and solicitation of customer feedback, Daniel Measurement
Services is committed to being the world’s leading provider of
value–added measurement services.

Page 12
Emerson Process Management Daniel Measurement and Control, Inc. and Daniel Measurement Services, Inc.
Daniel Measurement and Control, Inc., (collectively ”Daniel”) are a wholly owned subsidiary of Emerson Electric Co., and a
World Area Headquarters division of Emerson Process Management. The Daniel logo is a registered trademark
of Daniel Industries, Inc. The Emerson logo is a registered trademark and service
Houston, Texas, USA mark of Emerson Electric Co. The contents of this publication are presented for
T: 713-467-6000, F: 713-827-3880 informational purposes only, and while every effort has been made to ensure their
USA Toll Free 1-888-FLOW-001 accuracy, they are not to be construed as warranties or guarantees, express or
www.daniel.com implied, regarding the products or services described herein or their use or
applicability. We reserve the right to modify or improve the designs or specifications
Calgary, Alberta, Canada of such products at any time. Daniel does not assume responsibility for the selection,
T: 403-279-1879, F: 403-236-1337 use or maintenance of any product. Responsibility for proper selection, use and
Alberta Toll Free 1-800-242-3197 maintenance of any Daniel product remains solely with the purchaser and end-user.
Sales@Danielind-can.com
Service@Danielind-can.com

Stirling, Scotland - Europe, Middle East, Africa


T: +44 (0) 1786 433400, F: +44 (0) 1786 433401

Singapore - Asia Pacific


Emerson Process Management Asia Pacific Private Limited
T: +65-6777-8211, F: +65-6770-8001

©2006 Daniel Measurement and Control, Inc., All Rights Reserved. Printed in the USA. DAN-LIQ-CAT-0906
Fundamentals
of
Orifice Meter
Measurement

Measurement and Control


Western Hemisphere
P.O.Box 19097
Houston, Texas 77224 U.S.A.
Phone: (713) 467-6000 Fax: (713) 827-3880
Fundamentals of Orifice Meter Measurement

Fluid meters are divided into two functional groups -

One measures quantity (Positive Displacement); the other measures rate of flow (Inferential.)
All fluid meters, however, consist of two distinct parts, each of which has different functions to perform.
The first is the primary element, which is in contact with the fluid, resulting in some form of interaction.
This interaction may be that of imparting motion to the primary element; the fluid may be accelerated etc.
The second or secondary element translates the interaction between fluid and primary element into a
signal that can be converted into volume, weights or rates of flow and indicates or records the results.

For example, a weigher uses weighing tanks as its primary element and a counter for recording
the number of fillings and dumpings as its secondary element. In an orifice meter, the orifice together with
the adjacent part of the pipe and the pressure connections, constitute the primary element, while the
secondary element consists of a differential pressure device together with some sort of mechanism for
translating a pressure difference into a rate of flow and indicating the result, in some cases also recording
it graphically and integrating with respect to the time. This same combination of primary and secondary
elements will be observed in almost all other types of meters.

Positive Displacement (Quantity Meters) - Some of the more common positive displacement
meters are: Weighers, Reciprocating Piston, Rotating Piston, Nutating Disk, Sliding and Rotating Vanes,
Gear and Lobed Impeller, and the meter most commonly used to sell small quantities of gas at relatively
low flow rates, the Bellows meter.

Inferential (Rate Meters) - (a) Orifice Plates - The most commonly used rate or inferential meter
is the thin-plate, concentric orifice; a detailed discussion is covered in later paragraphs.

(b) Flow Nozzles & Venturi Tubes - Flow Nozzles and Venturi Tubes are primary rate devices
which will handle about 60% more flow than an orifice plate for the same bore under the same conditions,
and can therefore handle higher velocity flows. If a differential limit is chosen, then a smaller bore nozzle
or Venturi may be used to measure the same flow. They are more expensive to install and do not lend
themselves to as easy size change or inspection as orifice plates.

(c) Pitot Tubes - A Pitot or impact tube makes use of the difference between the static and kinetic
pressures at a single point. A similar device which is in effect a multiple pitot tube, averages the flow
profile.

(d) Turbine Meters - A Turbine meter is one in which the primary element is kept in rotation by the
linear velocity of the stream in which it is immersed. The number of revolutions the device makes is
proportional to the rate of flow.

(e) Swirlmeters, Vortex Shedding Meters, Rotometers, Mass Flow Meters, etc. - These are
devices that have applications in flow measurement. The manufacturers should be contacted for detailed
information.

© 1997 Daniel Measurement and Control Is aregistered trademark

Page 1
What is an Orifice Meter?

An orifice meter is a conduit and a restriction to create a pressure drop. An hour glass is a form
of orifice. A nozzle, venturi or thin sharp edged orifice can be used as the flow restriction. In order to use
any of these devices for measurement it is necessary to empirically calibrate them. That is, pass a known
volume through the meter and note the reading in order to provide a standard for measuring other
quantities. Due to the ease of duplicating and the simple construction, the thin sharp edged orifice has
been adopted as a standard and extensive calibration work has been done so that it is widely accepted
as a standard means of measuring fluids. Provided the standard mechanics of construction are followed
no further calibration is required. An orifice in a pipeline is shown in figure 1 with a manometer for
measuring the drop in pressure (differential) as the fluid passes thru the orifice. The minimum cross
sectional area of the jet is known as the “vena contracta.”

How does it work?

As the fluid approaches the orifice the pressure increases slightly and then drops suddenly as the
orifice is passed. It continues to drop until the “vena contracta” is reached and then gradually increases
until at approximately 5 to 8 diameters downstream a maximum pressure point is reached that will be
lower than the pressure upstream of the orifice. The decrease in pressure as the fluid passes thru the
orifice is a result of the increased velocity of the gas passing thru the reduced area of the orifice. When
the velocity decreases as the fluid leaves the orifice the pressure increases and tends to return to its
original level. All of the pressure loss is not recovered because of friction and turbulence losses in the
stream. The pressure drop across the orifice ( P in Fig. 1) increases when the rate of flow increases.
When there is no flow there is no differential. The differential pressure is proportional to the square of the
velocity, it therefore follows that if all other factors remain constant, then the differential is proportional to
the square of the rate of flow.

Orifice Flow Measurement - History

The first record of the use of orifices for the measurement of fluids was by Giovanni B. Venturi, an
Italian Physicist, who in 1797 did some work that led to the development of the modern Venturi Meter by
Clemons Herschel in 1886. It has been reported that an orifice meter, designed by Professor Robinson
of Ohio State University was used to measure gas near Columbus, Ohio, about 1890. About 1903 Mr. T.B.
Weymouth began a series of tests in Pennsylvania leading to the publication of coefficients for orifice
meters with flange taps. At the same time Mr. E.O. Hickstein made a similar series of tests at Joplin,
Missouri, from which he developed data for orifice meters with pipe taps.

A great deal of research and experimental work was conducted by the American Gas Association
and the American Society of Mechanical Engineers between 1924 and 1935 in developing orifice meter
coefficients and standards of construction for orifice meters. In 1935 a joint A.G.A. - A.S.M.E. report was
issued title “History of Orifice Meters and The Calibration, Construction, and Operation of Orifices For
Metering.” This report is the basis for most present day orifice meter measurement installation. An
updated version of this standard based on new data was issued in early 1991 by A.P.I. titled: Manual of
Petroleum Measurement Standards, Chapter 14, Section 3, Parts 1-4. Several additional publications are
available to simplify measurement by orifice meters. These are: ASME Fluid Meters 6th Edition, ASME
Power Test Code, Chapter 4 on Flow Measurement and Flow Measurement Engineering Handbook by
R.W. Miller.

© 1997 Daniel Measurement and Control Is aregistered trademark

Page 2
Typical Orifice Flow Pattern
Flange Taps Shown
Note: See pressure recovery curves on page 7

Fundamental Gas Laws

All matter is composed of exceedingly tiny particles called molecules A molecule is defined as
the smallest particle which can exist in the free and undecomposed state, i.e., natural gas is composed
of molecules of methane, ethane, etc. These molecules are in constant motion and it is the impact of
these molecules on the sides of a container which is measured as pressure. Temperature regulates
the speed of the molecules and therefore, an increase in temperature increases the motion of the
molecules which in turn increases the pressure.

As decreased temperature and pressure causes decreased motion of the molecules, it follows
there must be some point where there is no molecular activity. The points where there is no molecular
activity are absolute zero temperature (approximately -460°F) and absolute zero pressure
(approximately 14.7 pounds per square inch below atmospheric pressure). Absolute pressure is equal
to gauge pressure plus atmospheric pressure (14.7 p.s.i.). Absolute temperature is equal to degrees
Fahrenheit (°F) plus 459.67° and is called degrees Rankin.

Boyles Law states that in an ideal gas the volume is inversely proportional to the absolute
pressure. If a cylinder has a volume of gas at an absolute pressure of 14.7 and a piston was to
displace the volume in the cylinder until the pressure reached 29.4 p.s.i., then the cylinder would
contain one-half of its original volume.

Charles Law states that the volume of an ideal gas is directly proportional to the absolute
temperature. If a cylinder has a volume of gas at 60°F or 514.67° Rankin (absolute) and a piston was
used to displace the volume so as to maintain a constant pressure while the temperature was doubled
to the 580°F or 1039.67° Rankin (absolute) the cylinder would contain twice its original volume.

© 1997 Daniel Measurement and Control Is aregistered trademark

Page 3
The combined ideal Boyles and Charles Law is commonly written in the form of the equation:

P1 V1 P2 V2
=

T1 T2
Where:
P = Pressure at Condition 1 or 2 1 = Flowing Conditions
V = Volume at Condition 1 or 2 2 = Base Conditions
T = Temperature at Condition 1 or 2

When discussing a quantity of gas it is necessary to define it. We could use weight such as
pounds or ounces but it is difficult for most people to think of gas as having weight. So, the common
definition is a cubic foot at some base pressure and base temperature. The base conditions used by
most areas of the United States are 14.73 p.s.i.a. and 60°F. See USEFUL FORMULAS on page 15.

ORIFICE GAS FLOW EQUATION

Qv = 218.527*Cd*Ev*Y1*(d 2)*[Tb/Pb]*[(Pf1*Zb*hw)/(Gr*Zf1*Tf)]0.5 (3-6)

Where
Cd = Orifice plate coefficient of discharge
d = Orifice plate bore diameter calculated at flowing temperature (Tf) - in.

Gr = Real gas relative density (specify gravity)


hw = Orifice differential pressure in inches of water at 60 degF
Ev = Velocity of approach factor
Pb = Base pressure - p